BNP-A2998 *

MITSUBISHI CNC
/MELD/IS3OOWseries
PROGRAMMING MANUAL 320L-V/330L-V
i 320HL-V/330HL-V 1

ADVANCED AND EVER ADVANCING

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared for the MELDAS 320L-V/330L-V/320HL-V/330HL-V systems which are software-
fixed configuration types of computerized numerical controllers (CNC) designed for executing high-performance
contouring control mainly with lathes.
This manual details the progr amming of the above systems and it should therefore be read prior to the use of these
systems.
This manual has been written on the assumption that all the system functions have been provided although not all
the functions may be featured when the CNC in question is supplied. For use,, therefore, check the table of
functions provided for each system on the following page and also consult the specifications manual issued by the
machine builder.

CAUTIONARY NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL

(1) This manual contains general descriptions as seen from the standpoint of the NC system. Reference should
therefore be made to the manuals issued by the machine builder for descriptions concerning individual
machine tools. In the case of restrictions, usable states and other such notes, the instructions in the manuals
issued by the machine builders take precedence over this manual.
(2) Every effort has been made to describe instructions for special handling, but it should be considered that any
operations not mentioned in this manual cannot be conducted.
 CONTENTS.

CONTENTS
1. CONTROL AXES ............................................................. 1

1.1 COORDINATE WORD AND CONTROL AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1+2 COORDINATE SYSTEMS AND COORDINATE ZERO POINT SYMBOLS ............. 2

2. INPUT COMMAND UNITS ..................................................... 3

2.1 INPUTCOMMANDUNITS ................................................. 3

2J? INPUTSETTING UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
23 COMMAND UNITX1O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3. DATAFORMATS .................................................. .... ....... 5

3.1 TAPE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... .. . . 5
3.2 PROGRAM FORMATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... . 8
33 TAPEMEMORYFORMAT .......... . .
.... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...*. . . 10
3.4 OPTIONALBLOCKSKIP( ’7”) . . . . . . . . .
.... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... . 10
3.5 PROGRAM/SEQUENCE/BLOCKNUMBERS (O,N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... . 11
3.6 PAR.ITYH/V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,..... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... . 12
3.7 GCODESYSTEM ................. ....... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... . 14

‘4. BUFFER REGISTER ......................................................... . 16

4.1 PRE-READBUFFERS ................................... .................. 16

5. POSITION COMMANDS ......................................... .............. 17

5.1 INCREMENTAJJABSOLUTEVALUECOMMANDS ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

5.2 RADIALJDIAMETRICALCOMMANDS ......... .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
53 INCWMETRICCONVERSION(G20,G21) ...... .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.4 DECIMALPOINTINPUT ................... .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS ................................ ,,............... 23

6.1 POSITIONING(RAPID TRAVERSE GOO) . . .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

6.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (GO1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
63 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) . .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.4 R-SPECIFIED CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.5 PLANE SELECTION G17, G18,G19 ...... .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6.6 THREAD CUTTING .................. . . . . . . ...+.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6.7 MILLING INTERPOLATION ........... .......... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

7. FEED FUNCTIONS ........................................................... 77

7.1 RAPIDTRAVERSERATE ............................. .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

7.2 CUTTINGFEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
73 SYNCHRONOUS/ASYNCHRONOUSFEED (G94,G95) ....... .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.4 FEED RATE DESIGNATION AND EFFECTS ONCONTROLAXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.5 THREAD CUTTINGLEADS ........................... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.6 AUTOMATICACCELERATION/DEC13LERATION .......... .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.7 SI?EEDCLAMP ..................................... .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7.8 EXACT STOPCHECK(G09) ........................... .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

I
 CONTEIWS.

8. DWELL ................................................................... 87

8.1 PER-SECOND DWELL (G94/G04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

8.2 PER-REVOLUTIONDWELL(G95/G04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . , ●
88

9. MISCELLEANOUS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...+.. . 89

9.1 MISCELLANEOUS F~CTIONS(M2-DIGITS BCD) . . . . . . . ..+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

9.2 MISCELLANEOUS FTJNCTIONS (M8-DIGITS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ● 90
93 SECONDARYMISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS (A8/B8/C8-DIGITS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

10. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS ........................................................ 92

10.1 SPINDLEFUNCTIONS (S2-DIGITSBCD) .. ........ .... . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . ... 92

10.2 SPINDLEFUNCTINOS (S5-DIGITSANALOG) ....... .... . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . ... 92
103 SPINDLE FUNCTIONS (S8-DIGITS) . . . . . . . ........ .... . . . . . . .. ... . . . . . . . . . ... 92
10.4 CONSTANT PEIUPHERAL SPEED CONTROL (G96,G97) .. . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . ... 93
10.5 SPINDLECLAMPSPEED SETTING (G92) . . ........ .... . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . .,+ 93
10.6 SPINDLEFUNCTION (MULTI-SPINDLE) .. ........ .... . . . ● . . ..... . . . . . . . . . ● .. 94

11. TOOLFUNCTIONS ........................................................... 100

11.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS (T4-DIGITS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . ..+**4 . 100

11.2 TOOL FUNCTIONS (T8-DIGITS) ............................................ 100

12. TOOL OFFSETFUNCTIONS .................................................... 101

12.1 TOOL OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . , ● 101

12.2 TOOLLENGTHOFFSET .................................................. 103
123 TOOLNOSEWEAROFFSET ............................. .................. 105
12.4 TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40, G41, G42, G46) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
12.4.1 OUTLINE ......................................... ................. 106
12.4.2 TOOL NOSE pOINTAND Compensation DireCtiOnS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..++. . 108
12.4.3 TOOL NOSE RCOMPENSATION OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
12.4.4 OTHER OPERATIONS DURING NOSE RCOMPENSATION ................... 118
12.4.5 G41/G42COMMANDSANDI,J,KDESIGNATION ......................,.. ● 126
12.4.6 INTERRUPTS DURINGTOOLNOSE RADIUS Compensation . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . 131
12.4.7 GENERAL CHECKPOINTS FORTOOL NOsE RADIUS COMPENSATION ........ 133
12.4.8 INTERFEIWNCECHECK ........................... ................... 134
12.5 PROGRAMMED TOOLOFFSETINPUT (G1O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . 138

13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. ...,.+. ● 141

13.1 CANNED CYCLES FORTURNING ................................. .......... 141

13.1.1 LONGITUDINAL CUTTING CYCLE (G77) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
13.1.2 THREAD CU’ITINGCYCLE(G78) ....,.......................... ...,,,. ● 144
13.13 FACE CWI’INGCYCLE(G 79) .......,................................ ● ● 146
13.2 MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
13.2.1 LONGITUDINALROUGH TCJRNING CYCLEI(G71) ......................... 149
13.2.2 FACE ROUGH~RNINGCYCLE I(G72) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
13.23 STOCK REMOVALIN ROUGH MACHINING CYCLE (G73) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
13.2.4 FINISHING CYCLE (G70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
13.2.5 FACE CIYI’-O FFCYCLE(G74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+ ● 162
132.6 LONGITUDINAL CUT-OFF CYCLE (G75) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..++. ● 163
13.2.7 MULTIPLE REPETITIVE THREAD CUTTINGCYCLE(G76) ................... 164
13.2.8 CHECKPOINTS FOR MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLES (G70-G76) .... 166

II
 I

CONTENTS,

133 HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLES (G80 _ G89) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

133.1 G83 FACE DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
133.2 G84 FACE TAPPING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
1333 G85 FACE BORING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
133.4 G80HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE CANCEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
133.5 CHECKPOINTS FOR USING HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLES . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
13.4 DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE 2 (GSX2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
13.5 SUBPROGRAM CONTROL (M98, M99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
13.6 VARIABLE COMMANDS .................................................. 184
13.7 USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS ........................................... 186
13.7.1 USER MACRO COMMANDS (G65, G66, G66.1 G67) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
13.7.2 MACRO CALL INSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
13.73 VARLA.BLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
13.7.4 TYPES OF VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . 196
13.7.5 ARITHMETIC COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
13.7.6 CONTROL COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
13.7.7 EXT’ERNAL O~PUI’COMMANDS ...................................... 219
13.7.8 CHECKPOINTS ..................................................... 221
13.8 FACING TOLL REST MIRROR IMAGE (G68, G69) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
13.9 CORNER CHAMFERING, CORNER ROUNDING FUNCTION I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
13.10 CORNER CHAMFERING, ROUNDING FUNCTION II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
13.11 LINEAR ANGLE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
13.12 GEOMETRIC COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
13.13 DATA SE’ITING (G1O, Gil) ................................................ 238

14. COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

14.1 COORDINATE WORDS AND CONTROL AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . 251

14.2 BASIC MACHINING, WORK AND LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEMS . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 252
143 MACHINE ZERO POINT AND 2ND REFERENCE POINT (ZERO POINT) .. . . . . . . . . . . . 253
14.4 AUTOMATIC COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . 254
14.5 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM SELECTION (G53) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
14.6 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING (G92) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . 256
14.7 REFERENCE (ZERO) POINT RETURN (G28, G29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 257
14.8 2ND REFERENCE (ZERO) POINT RETURN (G30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
14.9 REFERENCE POINT CHECK (G27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . 262
14.10 WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SE’ITING AND OFFSET (G54 - G59) . ... . . . . . . . . . . . 263
14.11 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM SE’ITING (G52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . 266

15. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

15.1 CHUCK BARRIERS/TAILSTOCK BARRIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

16. MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS .......................................... 270

16.1 SKIP FUNCTION (G31) ................................................... 270

III
CONTENTS. -

APPENDIX 1. LIST OF FUNCTIONS CODES .......................................... 275

A.PPENDIX2. LIST OF COMMAND VALUES AND SE’ITING RANGES ...................... 276

APPENDIX 3. CIRCULAR CUTTING RADIUS ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

APPENDIX 4. STANDARD CANNED CYCLE SUBPROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

APPENDIX 5. LIST OF VARIABLE NUMBERS (1) ...................................... 286

APPENDIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE TABLES OF DATA SETTING N NUMBERS ............... 288

APPENDIX 7, SUPPLEMENTARY DETAILS ON INCOMPLETE THREAD AREAS ARISING

DURING THREAD CU’ITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

APPENDIX 8. LIST OF ALARMS ................................................... 333

IV
 ,,
TABLE OF FUNCTIONS FOR EACH SYSTEM (1)

—: Not m-ovided O: Standard A: O~tion

Item No. Description 320L 330HL
1. CONTROL AXES ... ...
1.1 COORDINATE WORD I o 0
2. INPUT COMMAND UNIT ... .,.
2.1 INPUT COMMAND UNIT 1~ o 0
2.2 INPUT SE’I”HNG UNIT 0.1 UJ A A
2.3 COMMAND UNIT X 10 I A A
3. DATA FORMAT ... ...
3.1 TAPE CODES (ISO/EIA) o 0
3.2 PROGRAM FORMATS (WORDSA13DRESSES) o 0
3.4 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP 1 I o 1 0
3.5 PROGRAM/SEQUENCE/BLOCK NUMBERS I 1 o 1 0
3.6 PARITY H/V o 0
4. BUFFER REGISTER ... ...
4.1 INPUT BUFFER Note: No tape operation for 330HL. o –
4.2 PRE-READ BUFFERS o 0
5. POSITION COMMANDS !., ...
5.1 POSITION COMMAND SYSTEMS
o 0
(INCREMENTAIJABSOLUTE)
5.2 RADIAIJDIAMETRICAL COMMANDS o 0
5.3 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION Parameter A A
(G20, G21) Program A A
5.4 DECIMAL POINT INPUT o 0
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS ... ...
1 1 1
6.1 POSITIONING (GOO) o 0 i
6.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (GO1) o 0
6.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) o 0
6.4 R-SPECIFIED CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
o 0
(G02,G03)
6.5 PLANE SELECTION (G17, G18, G19) o 0
6.6 THREAD CUTTING (G33) o 0
G34A G34A
6.7 MILLING INTERPOLATION (G12.1, G13.1) A A
7. FEED FUNCTIONS ... ...
7.1 RAPID TRAVERSE RATE I o 0
7.2 CUTTING FEED RATE I Iolol
7.3 SYNCHRONOUS FEED Per-minute feed
o 0
(G94, G95) (G94)
Per-revolution feed
o 0
(G95)
7.8 EXACT STOP CHECK (G09) o 0
8. DWELL ... ...
8.1 PER-SECOND DWELL (G94/G04) o 0
8.2 PER-REVOLUTION DWELL (G95/G04) o 0

v
 —: Not provided O: Standard A: Option
Item No. Description 320L 330HL
9. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS ... ...
9.1 I MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS (M2-DIGI’R3 I
!
1010
9.2 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS (MS-DIGITS) A A
9.3 SECONDARY MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
A A
(.WB/c 8-DIGITS)
10. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS ... ...
10.1 SPINDLE FUNCTIONS C32-DIGITS) o 0
10.2 I SPINDLE FUNCTIONS (S5-DIGITS ANALOG) A A
10.3 I SPINDLE FUNCTIONS (S8-DIGITS) I IA IA
10.4 SPINDLE FUNCTION (CONSTANT PERIPHERAL
A A
SPEED CONTROL) (G96, G97)
10.6 SPINDLE FUNCTION (MULTI-SPINDLE) A A
11. TOOL FUNCTIONS ... ...
11.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS (T4-DIGITS) o 0
11.2 ! TOOL FUNCTIONS (T8-DIGITS) I IAIA
12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS ... ...
12.1 TOOL OI?FSET No. of setx 20 0 –
No. of sets 40 A o
12.2 I TOOL LENGTH OFFSET I Iolo
12.3 ! TOOL NOSE WEAR COMPENSATION I 1010
12.4 I TOOL NOSE R COMPENSATION (G41, G42, G46, G40 I 1010
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G38 R G42)
A A
(FOR MILLING FUNCTIONS)
12.5 PROGRAMMED TOOL” COMPENSATION INPUT (G1O) A A
13. I PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS I I ... I ,..
13.1 CANNED CYCLES FOR TURNING LONGITUDINAL
o 0
CUTTING CYCLE (G77)
THREAD CUTTING CYCLE (G78) o 0
I FACE TURNING CYCLE (G79)
. . I 1010
13,2 MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLES FINISHING
A A
CYCLE (G70)
I LONGITUDINAL ROUGH TURNING CYCLE (G71) A A
I FACE ROUGH TURNING CYCLE [G72) I
STOCK REMOVAL IN ROUGH MACHINING CYCLE A A
(G73)
FACE CUT-OFF CYCLE (G74) A A
LONGITUDINAL CUT-OFF CYCLE (G75) A A
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE THREAD CU’ITING CYCLE
A A
(G76) I

VI
 -: Not provided O: Standard A: Option
Item No. I Description I
13.3 I HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE CANCEL (G80) I IAIAI
DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE 1 (Z AXIS) (G83) A A
TAPPING CYCLE (Z AXIS) (G84) A A
BORING CYCLE (Z AXIS) (G85) A A
I DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE 1 (X AXIS) (G87) I IAIAI
TAPPING CYCLE (X AXIS) (G88) A A
BORING CYCLE (X AXIS) (G89) A A
HOLE MACHINING CYCLE INITIAL POINT, A A
REFERENCE POINT LEVEL RETURN [G98, G99)
13.4 DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE 2 A A
13.5 SUBPROGRAM CONTROL (M98, M99) o 0
13.6 I VARIABLE EXPONENTS (#n) A A
I
13.7 I USER MACROS (G65, G66, G66.1, G67) I IA]AI
13.8 I FACING TOOL REST MIRROR IMAGE (G68,
.-. G69) I IAIAI
13.9 CORNER CHAMFERING, CORNER ROUNDING I A A
(LINE-LINE)
13.10 CORNER CHAMFERING,
(ARC-LINE, ARC-ARC)
CORNER ROUNDING II
I I A
I A
I
13.11 LINEAR ANGLE COMMAND o 0
13.12 GEOMETRIC COMMAND I A A
,
13.13 I DATA SETTING [G1O, Gil) I IAIAI
14. I COORDINATE SYSTEM SE’ITING FUNCTIONS I I ... I ... I
14.4 BASIC MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM (G53) o 0
14.5 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING (G92) o 0
14.6 AUTOMATIC COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING o 0
14.7 I AUTOMATIC REFERENCE POINT RETURN (G28, G29) I Iolol
14.8 I 2ND, 3RD. 4TH REFERENCE POINT RETURN (G30) I IAIAI
14.9 REFERENCE POINT CHECK (G27) o 0
14.10 WORK COORDINATE SYSTEMS SETTING AND o 0
\ OFFSET (G54 N G59) I t
14.11 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING (G52) o 0
15. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ... ...
15.1 I BARRIER CHECK ON/OFF (G22, G23) A A
16. I MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS I I ... I ...
16.1 I SKIP PUNC’TION (G31) I A I A

VII
 1. CONTROL AXES
1.1. COORDINATE WORD AND CONTROL AXIS

1. CONTROL AXES
1.1. CO ORDINATE WORD AND CONTROL AXIS
In the case of a lathq the axis parallel to the spindle is known as the Z axis and its forwarddirecti~ is the direction
in which the tool rest moves away from the headstock while the axis at right angles to the Z axis ]s the X axis and
its forward direction is the direction in which it moves away from the Z axis, as shown in the figure below.

Tailstock

!
Headstock

-I-Y Tool rest

Coordinate.axes and txdarities

Since coordinates based on the right hand rule are used with a lathe, the forward direction of the Y axis in the
above figure which is at right angles to the X-Z plane is downward. It should be borne in mind that an arc on the
XZ plane is expresed as clockwise or counterclockwise as seen from the forwa~d direction of the Y axis. (Refer
to the section on circular interpolation.)

G52,

(Valid in G54 – G59)

*
2nd reference point - -1-z
/“’”
G28 e Q ----
+x
K Q-”
Reference point
(+Y)

@
Relationship between coordinates

-1-
1. CONTROL AXES
1.2.COORDINATE SYSTEMS AND COORDINATE ZERO POINT
SYMBOLS

1.2. COORDINATE SYSTEMS AND CO ORDINATE ZERO POINT

SYMBOLS

-4 : Reference point ‘

: Machine coordinate zero point

: Work coordinate zero points

+ (G54 – G59)

Upon completion of the reference point return, the parameters are referred to and automatically set for the basic
machine coordinate system and work coordinate systems (G54 — G59).
The basic machine coordinate system is set so that the first reference noint is at the uosition desimated bv. the
parameter from the basic machhe coordinate zero point (machine zer~ point). “

Bait machine Machine zero point

coordinatesystem — -+-z

Camdnate
z, !ySem q@em Sjstem Syxem . x,
x* 1 (GM) 2 (G55) 5 (G58) 6( G59)z;
L <L
- -4*- >+:” ----+---- --- “-----$&r---- -7++--–- -
fy&&T - ‘3” -p---- , ~ ~ -~y---” -y#r--
~ #. ‘--
Y 1 atesystem
ccordinate i I I
stem I 1 !, I t
shiftedby 1.”1 I i xi (G52)
?I92) /
-1-x z,
I . *

1
1st reference poin

The local coordinate system (G52) is vaIid on the coordimte systems designated by the commands for the work
coordinate systems 1 through 6.
Using the G92 command, the basic machine coordinate system can be shifted and made the hypothetical machine
coordinate system. At the same timq work coordinate systems 1 through 6 are also shifted.

-2-
 2. INPUT COMMAND UNITS
2.1. INPUT COMMAND UNITS

2. INPUT COMMAND UNITS

2.1. INPUT COMMAND UNITS
These are the units used for the movement amounts in the program as commanded by the MDI input. They are
expressed in millimeters, inches or degrees ~).

2.2. INPUT SETTING UNITS

These are the units of setting data which are used, as with the compensation amounts, in common for all axes.
The input command unit can be sekicted for each axis and input setting units can be selected in common for the
axes by parameters from among the following types. (For further details on settings, reference to the Control
Instructions,)

Type I Linear axis \Rotary

axis
Millimeter Inch (0)
Diametrical Radial Diametrical Radial
\ command command command command
Input Cs-1 1.0 1.0 0.1 0.1 1.0
command CS-2 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.1
unit
CS-A 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.01
CS-B 0.001 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 0.001
Cs-c 0.0001 0.0001 0.00001 0.00001 0.0001
Least IS-A 0.005 0.01 0.0005 0.001 0.01
command IS-B 0.0005 0.001 0.00005 0.0001 0.001
increment
IS-C 0.00005 0.0001 o.000005 0.00001 o.000~
Input setting IS-A 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.01
unit Is-3 0.001 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 0.001
Is-c ~ O.0001 [ O.0001 I O.00001 I O.00001 I O.000:

NOTE 1: Inch/metric conversion is performed in either of 2 ways: conversion from the parameter
scra (“initial inch”: valid only when the power is switched on) and conversion using the G
command (G20 or G21).
However, when a G command is used for the conversion, the conversion applies only to the
input command units and not to the input setting units.
Consequently, the tool offsel amounts and other compensation amounts as well as the
variable data should be preset to correspond to inches or millimeters.
2: The millimeter and inch systems cannot be used together.

-3–
2. INPUT COMMAND UNITS
2.3.COMMAND UNIT xl~

2.3. COMMAND UNIT X 10

The input command units of machining programs can be processed as 10# through parameter selection. When a
machining program has already been prepared using the input command unit of 10I.Land it is run in an NC unit
which has been set to a command unit of 1~, the same processing as before is enabled by selecting this parameter.
It is rdso possible to process a machining program using the Iw emnmand in an NC system which has been set to
the input command unit of O.lp. This function cannot be applied to input command unit 10JLsystems (type A).
The parameter selection is set in the “command unit x1O” control parameter.
Coordinate vaIue data without deeimal point commands are all multiplied by 10.
The contents of tool offset amounts are treated as input settirw units and so the eomuensation
. amounts are not
multiplied by 10.
When the input command unit is Ip:

Control axis Program Movement amount when program command is Program

command cxeeuted (same for diametrical and radial settings) usable as is?
[Al4 PI
NC to be MELDAS-300 p]
programmed
[A] Command unit I Command unit
x1O OFF x1O ON
Linear axis xl ; (Y1 ;, Z1 ;) lap 1P lop Yes
lmm lmm No
Rotary axis cl ; 0.01 “ O.QO1Q 0.010 Yes
(0.01 0 system) l@(-J o Looo 0 No
1.000 “ 0.001 “ 0.010 No
(10 system) 1.0000 1.0000 Yes

NO= The figures on the table’s top level of the MELDAS- 300 movement amounts apply to decimal
point input type 1 and those on the bottom leweI apply to decimal point input type 2.
For rotary axes, the type must be aligned with the command units when preparing the machining
programs. The parameters are changed by the machine parameter settings.

-4-
 3. DATA FORMATS
3.1.TAPE CODES

3. DATA FORMATS
3.1. TAPE CODES
. ..
The tape command codes used for this MELDAS series are combinations of alphabet letters (A, B, C ... Z)j
numbers (O,1,2 ... 9) and signs (+, –, / ...). These alphabet letters, numbers and signs are referred to as characters.
Each character is represented by a combination of 8 holes which may, or may not, be present.
These combinations make up what is called codes.
This MELDAS series employs two types of tape cod= the EfA code (RS-244-A) and the 1S0 code (R-84-O).

NOTE 1: If a code not given in the tape code table in Fig. 1 is assigned during operation, an illegal
address error (P32) will result.
2 The following codes which exist with 1S0 but not with EIA can be designated by paramettm
[ (left square parenthesis)
~ (right square parenthesis)
(sharp sign)
* (asterisk)
= (equals sign)
. (tilon)
exclamation mark) = (queuing code) Valid only for
!$’ [dollar sign)= (code designating system number) 33CHL
}
Any codes which overlap with existing codes or codes which result in parity H
cannot be designated.

NOTE 3: EJ2VIS0 conversion is done automatically by the first EOB/LF code after NC resetting.

NOTE 4: For the sake of Convenience a semicolon@ has been used in the CNC display to indicate the
end of a block (EOB/LF) which separates one block from another. Do not use the semicolon
key, however, in actual programming but use the keys in the following table instead.
EOBiEOR keys and displays

1s0 CNC display

Key USed
End of block EOB or CR LF or NL ;
End of record EOR % %’

(1) Significant data section (label skip function)

All data up to the first EOB C), after the power has been turned on or after operation has been reset, are
ignored during automatic operation based on tapq memory loading operation or during a search operation.
In other words the significant data section of a tape extends from the character or number code after the
kitkI EOB ~) “code ti-ter resetting to the point wh&e the reset command is issued.

When “TmTl” has been set in the comment E

:
with title output available

● O*,* ● 0000 ● **O 00000 0 ●

o * * ● O*
* *000 O** * ●
o ● @ ● ●
o 00000 ● 000 ● ● **
● *e*e*e*e *e*** .*e**. ****a **a . . . . . . . . .

** 00 ●0 90

The above title is output before the machining program.

-5-
3. DATA FORMATS
3.1.TAPE CODES

(2) Control out, ccmtrol in

When the ISO code is used, all data between control out “(” and control in “)” are ignored by the NC system,
although these data appear on the setting and display unit. Consequently, the command tape namq number
and other such data not directly related to control can be inserted in this section, When the EIA code is used,
the same operation as with “(” and “)” under the 1S0 code can be performed by entering the males of specific
channel combinations as parameters.
This information (except “@)in Fig. 1 of the tape codes) will also be loaded, however, during tape loading.
The system is set to the “control in” mode when the power is switched on.

Example of HA code
. $*.:.* **:* @*
● *O ● 00
● m********* ● 94 .*.**.*. *.*
● O* ● O
*O* ● *
**
A.:. ● OQ ●
● ●

I
Tape name print-out tzxample
\

I Example of
1S0 code
J. C
~RGOOX- 85000

@e@*
Y-64000 (CUTTER:

:0 *
RETURN)p
L

::900”:*O** ●:O***********000 ●
** :*:*:* ***0 * ●
**0* O.*e *99* ● O******.*** ***********
● ●

‘g00$0$:0040000000
●
O.OOOO ●o@@**ooo*
**g ●**--* 00
● ●

● 00800
e
.0
MO** O* OO***O
0009000 * 9●
* ● ●

I Operator information print-out example l~t

Information in this seetihn is ignored and nothing is .
exeeuted.
(3) EOR (%) code
Gener&lly, the end-of-record code is punched at both ends of the tape. It has the following functions:
1) Rewind stop when rewinding tape (with tape handler)
2) Rewind start during tape search (with tape handler)
3) Completion of loading during tape loading into memo~
(4) Tape preparation for tape operation (with tape handler)

‘y““”””+~
1 :“”-””
%locm ;

L-& 2m
Initial block Last bIock

If a tape handler is not used, there is no need for the 2-meter dummy at both ends of the tape or for the head EOR
(%) code.

-6-
 3. DATA FORMATS
3.1.T@E CODES

The EL4 or ISO code is automatically identified by the first EOB/LF code after NC resetting.

EL4 code (RS-244-A) 1S0 code (R-S40~

Feed holes Feed holes
87654 32 I + Channel no. 87664 3zl+ Channel no.
f++ --

is

Codes (A) are stored on tape but an error results (except when they are used in the comment section) during
operation.
The (B) codes are non-working codes and are always ignored.
:::~~ There are no EI.A standard codes corresponding to the areas.
j;:;;::,;},:.:,
..,.
Fig. 1 Table of tape codes

–7-
3.DATA FORMATS
3.2.PROGRAM FORMATS

3.2. PRO GRAM FORMATS

The prescribed arrangement used when assigning control information to the NC control unit is known as the
program format, and the format used with the MELDAS-300 series is called the “word address format.”
. ..
(1) Word and address
A word is a collection of characters arranged in a specific sequence. This entity is u%d as the unit for
processing data and for causing the numerically controlled machine tool to execute specific operations.
Each word used for the MELDAS-300 series consists of an a.bhabet letter and a number of several digits
(sometimes with a “ +“ or “-” sign placed at the head of the ~umber.).

Word
F %

❑looo------o

L Alphabet (address)
Word” configuration

The alphabet letter at the head of the word is the address. It defines the meaniw of the numerical
information which folIows it.
“s;>=” can be commanded for a multiple number of spindle commands although this applies only to address
s.
For details of the types of words and the number of signiilcant digits of words used for this MELDAS series,
refer to Table 1 containing the format abbreviations.
(2) Blocks
A block is a collection of words. It includes the information which is required for the nuxnerkdly cantrolkd ‘
machine to execute specific operations. One block unit constitutes a complete cmumand. The end of each
block is marked with an EOB (end-of-block) code.
(3) Programs
A program is a collection of severaI blocks.

-8-
 3. DATA FORMATS
3.2.PROGRAM FORMATS

Table 1 Format detah

Item Abbreviation
Program number 08 . ..
Sequence number N5
Preparato~ function G3iG21
Movement axis Input setting unit A 0.01 “, mm X+62 Z+62 ++62
Input setting unit B 0.001 “, mm x-t-53 z-t-53 ++53
Input setting unit C 0.0001 0, x+44 Z+44 ++44
mm
Movement Input setting unit A 0.01 0, mm 1+62 K+62
command, arc, Input setting unit B 0.001 0, mm 1+53 K+53
cutter radius
hput setting unit C 0.0001 0, 1+44 K+44
mm
Dwell Inpnt setting unit A 0.01 0, mm X+53 P8
Innut settirm unit B 0.001 “. mm X+53 P8
Input setting unit C 0.0001 0, X+53 P8
mm I

Feed function Input setting unit A 0,01 “, mm F62 @er-minute feed) F43 (per-revolution feed)
Input setting unit B 0.001 “, mm F53 (per-minute feed) F34 (per-revolution feed)
Input setting unit C 0.0001 0, F54 (per-minute feed) F25 (per-revolution feed)
1-
Tool offset T1/T2
Miscellaneous fim-iction M2fM8
Snindie function S21S5/S8 or SO = n (for 330HL svstem onlvl
Tool function T2/T8
2nd miscellaneous function A8/B8/c8
Subprogram P8H5L4
Canned cycle Input setting unit A 0.01 0, mm R+62Q62P8L4
Ikmut settimz unit B 0.001 0. mm R+53 053 P8 L4
I Input scttingunit C 0.00010, I R+44 Q44 P8 L4 I

NOTE 1: “ + “ denotes the A, B, C or Y additional axis address (% B, C, Y, P or R for the 330HL

r@em).
2: The number of digits in the words is checked by the maximum number of digits in the
addresses.

-9-
3.DATA FORMATS
3.3.TAPE MEMORY FORMAT

3.3. TAPE MEMORY FORMAT

(1) Storage tape and significant sections (automatic ISO/EIA identification)
As with tape operation, the code of a tape which is to be stored into the memory can be either an 1S0 or
EJA Codq and this code is automatically identified by the head EOB code after resetting. ..
The section which is stored into the memory extends from the character following the head EOB after
resetting as far as the EOR code.
The significant codes listed in the tape code table Fig. 1 in Section 3.1 are the codes in the above significant
section which are actually stored into the memory. All other codes are ignored and are not stored.
The data between control out “(” and control in “)” are stored into the memory.

3.4. OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP (“/”)

This function selectively ignores specific blocks in a machining program which starts with the “t” (slash) code.

3.4.1 CIPTIONAL 13L0 CK SKIP

Provided that the optional block skip switch is ON, blocks starting with the “/” code are ignored. They are
executed if the switch is OFF,
Parity check is valid regardless of whether the optional block skip switch is ON or OFF,
When, for instanc~ all blocks are to be executd for one workpiece but specific blocks are not to be executed for
another workpiece, the same command tape can be used to machine different parts by inserting the “/” code at
the head of those specific blocks.

3-4.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR USING OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP

1) Put the “/” code at the head of the block. This will be processed as a division symbol when placed inside
the block.
Exampkx N20 G1 X2WZ25.; ..... NG ~P283 DIVIDE BY ZEROm will occur as this will be handled
/N20 G1 X25. Z25.; ..... OK as 25./0.)
2) Parity checks (H and V) are conducted regardless of the optional block skip switch position.
3) The optional block skip is processed immediately before the pre-read buffer.
Consequently, it is not possible to skip up to the block which has been read into the pm-read buffer.
4) This function is valid even during a sequence number search.
5) All blocks with the “/” code are also input and output during tape storing and tape output, regardless
of the position of the optional block skip switch.
 3. DATA FORMATS
3.5.P.ROGRAM/SEQUENCE/BL OCK NUMBERS (o, N)

3.5. PRO GRAM/SEQUENCE/BLOCK NUMBERS (O, N)

These numbers are used for monitoring the execution of the machining programs and for calling both machining
programs and specific stages in machining programs.
Program numbers are classified by workpiece correspondence or by subprogram units, and they aredesignated bY
the address “0” followed by a number with up to 8 digits.
Sequence numbers are attached where appropriate to command blocks which configure machining programs, and
they are designated by the address “N” followed by a number with up to 5 digits.
Block numbers are automatically providd inside the NC system itself. They are preset to zero every time a
program number or sequence number is read, and they are counted up one at a time unless program numbers or
sequence numbers are commanded in blocks which are subsequently read.
Consequently, all the blocks of the machining programs given in the table below can be determined without further
consideration by combinations of program numbers, sequence numbers and block numbers.

NC input machining program NC monitor display

Program no. Sequence no. Block no.
012345678 (DEMO.PROG) ; 12345678 0 0
N1OOGOOG9OX12O.Z1OO. ; 12345678 100 0
G94S1OOI ; 12345678 100 1
N102G71P21OQ22OIO.2 12345678 102 0
KO.2D0.5F0500 ;
N200G94S1200 F300 ; 1234567.8 200 0
N21OGO1XOZ95. ; 12345678 210 0
G01X20. ; 12345678 210 1
G03X50.Z80.K-15. ; 12345678 210 2
{G01Z55. ; 12345678 210 3
G02X80.2%0.115. ; 12345678 210 4
GO1X1OO.; 12345678 210 5
1-
G01Z30. ;
GO2Z1O.K-15. ;
12345678
12345678
210
210
6
7
N220G01Z.O ; 12345678 220 0
N230GOOZ120.Z150. ; 12345678 230 “o
N240M02 ; 12345678 240 0
% 12345678 240 0
3.DATA FORMATS
3.6.PARITY H/V

3.6. PARITY H/V

Parity check provides a mean of checking whether the tape has been correctly perforated or not. This involvw
checking for perforated code errors or, in other words, for perforation errors. There are two types of parity check:
parity H and parity V. . ..
(1) Parity H
Parity H checks the number of holes configuring a character and it is done during tape operation, tape input
and sequence number search.
A parity H error is caused in the following cases.
1) 1S0 code
When a code with an odd number of holes in a significant data section has been detected
2) EL4 cmde
When a code with an even number of holes is found in a significant data section. This dots not include
AS (alI space) and AM (all mark) indicated in the Fig. 1 tape code list in Section 3.1.)
@rample 1) Parity H error (with EIA code)

*8 o 9 :.*H *O ● @
: @ @e 00
**
9*9*9*4090*
**:
e**9*0*,
Q
*0W+
:
90*009
*O
*~*00
* : *:O
8*9*9***
e m 90 *
* * 00 O*O* ●*
:99: @Q* 00 ** @ o O* @@ *
e * * *9
e * e
k
A

This character causes a parity H error.

k /

(Example 2) Parity H error (with ISO code)

~ This character causes a parity H error.

When a parity H error occurs, the tape stops following the alarm code.

-12-
 3. DATA FORMATS
3.6.PARITY H/V

(2) Parity V
A parity V check is done during tape operation, tape input and sequence number search when the parity V
check function is turned on by the “parameter” page setting of the setting and display unit. It is not done
during memory operation.
A parity V error occurs in the following case when the number of codes from the first significant code to
the EOB ~) in the significant data section in the vertical direction of the tape is an odd number, that is, when
the number of characters in one block is odd.
When a parity V error is detected, the tape stops at the code following the EOB (J.
(Example 3)

IxMHLl
}
This block causes a parity V error.

rwsm2 1: Among the tape codes me both codes which are counted as characters for parity and codes
which are not counted as such. For details, refer to the tape code table in Fig. 1 of S@ion
3.1.
2: J%Iy space codes which may appear within the seztion from the initial EOB code to the
address code or “/” code are not counted for parity V check.

-13-
 ,,

3.DATA FORMATS
3.7.G CODE SYSTEM

3.7. G CODE SYSTEM

There are 3 G code systems: 1, 2 and 3. Parameter G code types (l), (2) and (3) are used to set the applicable
system.
G code system 3 is an optional specification.
The description of the G functions is based on G code system 2 which serves as the standard. ““’

NOTE 1: An alarm results when a G code not listed in the table is commanded. (“P34”: G-CODE
ERROR)
2: An alarm results when a G code not included in the optional specifications is commanded.
(Example) An alarm (“P50”: NO INCH/MM SPEC ) occurs when the inch command G
code (G20) is commanded although the inch/mm specifications have not been
provided.

TABLE OF G COMMANDS

G code system I Group 1 Function I G code system I Group I Function

(Standard = 2) I “I (Standard = 2)

F“
1 19121 1 213
GOO GOO GOO 01 Positioning G31 G31 G31 00 ISkip function
GO1 ~GOl ‘GO1 01 Linear interpolation G32 E G33 01 IThread cuttiruz
G02 I G02 I G02 I 01 Circular interpolation G34 G34 G34 01 Vriable lead thread
fclockwisel cutting

=-b-b-b Circular interpolation

(counterclockwise) I
G37 G37 G37 00 Automatic tool
compensation
G04
G09
G04
G09
G04
G09
00
00
Dwell
Exact stop
I
1- G40 G40 F G40

G41
*
07

07
Tool nose R
compensation cancel
Tool nose R
Data setting G41 G41
G1O \ G1O I G1O I 00
compensation left
Gll Gll iData setting mode
I Icancel G42 G42 G42 07 Tool nose R
I
compensation right
312.1 G12.1 G12.1 19 Milling mode ON
v v G43 G43 ‘G43 08 * 2nd spindle control
313.1 G13.1 G13.I 19 Milling mode OFF OFF
9
G14 r G14 ~ G14 18 Balance cut OFF G G44 GM 08 * 2nd spindle control
G15 G15 G15 18 Balance cut ON ON
1G17 ‘G17 = G17 02 Plane selection Xp- G46 G46 G46 07 Tool nose R
Yp compensation
(automatic selection
1G18 -G18 ‘G18 02 Plane selection Zp-
of direction) ON
Xp
z G92 G92 00 Coordinate system

Ez3E
1G19 ‘G19 ‘G19 02 Plane selection Yp-
settiqj spindle clamp
Ill
I I Izll ‘1
speed setting
~G20 w G20 - G70 06
G52 G52 G52 00 Local coordinate
1G21 ‘G21 ‘G71 06 system setting
G22 G22 G22 04 G53 G53 G53 00 Machine coordinate
G23 ~ G23 ~ G23 I 04 Carrier check OFF svstem selection
I
G27 G27 G27 00 Reference point G54 G54 G54 12 Work coordinate
return check system 1 selection
G23 G28 G28 00 Reference point G55 G55 G55 12 Work corodinate
return system 2 sekction
G29 Return from G56 G56 G56 12 Work coordinate
;reference r)oint I system 3 selection
G30
e
-14-
 3. DATA FORMATS
3.7.(3CODES YSTEM

G CODE SYSTEM

Function Function
-&12&ilGr”up uzGzL.lGroup
1 2 3
G57 G57 G57 Work coordinate G83 G83 G83 09 Deep hole driig
I svstem 4 selection Cvcle 1 (z axis)
G58 G58 G58 12 Work coordinate G79 G83.2 G83.2 09 Deep hole drilling
system 5 selection cycle 2
G59 G59 G59 12 Work coordinate G84 G84 G84 09 Tapping cycle (Z
system 6 selection I I i Iaxis)
G61 G61 G61 13 Exact stop check G85 G85 G85 09 Boring @cle (Z axis)
, mode G87 G87 G87 09 Deep hole driig
G64 ~ G64 r G64 I H ICutting mode
II cycle (X axis)
G65
%-t%-R- ‘Macro call G88 G88 G88 09 Tapping cycle
(x axis)

F33=
G66 lMacro modal call A I
G66.1
G67

G68
w G89
G90

!S92
G89
G77

G78
G89
G20

G21
09
09

09
Boring cycle (X axis)
Lorlgitudinal turning
canned cycle
Thread cutting
canned cvcle
G69 G94 G79 G24 09 Face turning canned
cycle
1 1
G70 G70 ! G72 I 09 ~Ftishmg cycle ‘G96 ‘G96 ‘G96 17 Constant peripheral
speed control
G71 G71
I
G73 09 ‘Longitudinal turning
cvcle I
‘G97 ‘G97 “’G97 17 Constant peripheral
sueed
. control cancel
G72 G72 G74 09
t- b G98 - G94 p G94 05 Asynchronous feed

L
G73 G73 G75 09 ‘Stock removal in m G99 = G95 mG95 05 Synchronous feed
~rough machining — ‘G90 G90 03 Absolute value
cvcle command
G74 G74 G76 09 Face cut-off cvcle I — ‘G91 ‘G91 03 Incremental value
I G75 I G75 I G77 I 09 Ikmgitudimd cut-off I command
cycle — r G98 v G98 10 Hole machining cycle

==1
Multiple repetitive initial return
thread cutting cycle
HoIe machining cycle
I I cancel

I I I I j command I

NOTE: k The “v” mark denotes a G code which is selected within each group when the power is switched
on or when resetting that initializes the modal commands is executed.
2 The “m” mark denotes a G code for which a parameter can be selected as the initial status when
the power is switched on or when resetting that initializes the modal commands is executed.

–15–
4. BUFFER REGISTER
4.L INPUT BUFFER

4. BUFFER REGISTER
4.1. mlz-m ImFF13Rs
1) During automatic processing the contents of 1 block are normally preread so that program analysis
processing is conducted smoothly. However, during tool nose R compensation, a maximum of5 blocks
are pr~read for the intersection point calculation including interference check.
2) The specifications of the data in 1 block areas follows:
“ The data of 1 block are stored in this buffer.
“ Only the significant codes in the significant data section are read into the pre-read buffer.
“ When males are sandwiched in the control in or control out mode and the optional block skip
function is ON, the data extending from the “/” (slash) code up to the EOB code are not read into
the pm-read buffer.
“ The pre-read buffer contents are cleared with resetting.
“ When the single block function is ON during continuous operation, the pre-read buffer stores the
following block data and then stops operation.
..—.
-1
Analysis proctxxing
------ ..- —. —- ------ --. —-- --- .-— _____
i I
Max. 5 execution blocks I
I 1

Keyboard
n Memory —

i 1
Mode ~
switching ~

~
n.
Arithmetic
processing
~
~
I
1
.

EEF-+El-
I
~ Not& Data equivalent to 1 block are stored in 1 I
I pre-read buffer. I
I I
1------ ---—-—- ——---- -—--—— --- —-- ---- I
)
.- —----- ---- -—-- —-—--- - -------- ------ —.—..—--- --- - ---------- ---------- .—— - ,----

–16-
 5. POSITION COMMANDS ‘‘
5.1.INCREMENTX.?XAB SOLUTE VALUE COMMANDS

5. POSITION COMMANDS
5.1. INCREMENTAL/ABS OLtJTE VALUE COMMANDS
There are2 methods of issuing tool movement amount commands: the incremental value method arid the absolute
value method.
The incremental value method applies for coordinates of a point which is to be moved and it issues a cummand
using the distance from the present point; on the other hand, the absolute value system issues a command using
the distance from the coordinate zero point. The following figure shows what happens when the tool is moved
from point PI to point P2.
X axis

1
Spindle

—. p2Z axis

Coordinate zero point

Incremental and absolute value commands

The incremental and absolute commands for the X and Z axes are identified by addresses when control narameter
.
#6 is ON and by G codes (G90/G91) when it is OFF.
Similarly, even with additional mea (C or Y axis), they are differentiated by addresses, or G code. .

Command system Remarks

Absolute value X axis Address X . For setting correspondence between
addreases and axes into machine
Z axis Address Z parameters.
C/y axis Address C/Y . Abscdute and incremental values can be
Incremental value X axis Address U used together in the same block.
Z axis Address W
C/y axis Address I-IN
Example
x w;
Incremental value command for Z axis
I Absolute value command for X axis

NOTE 1: With the 330HL system, P and R may also be used as the addressm for the additional axes.
Coordinate vahws can be omitted, in which ease they are treated as zero.
The absolute and incremental value commands can be differentiated for any axis by the G’90
and G91 commands.
Example When the C axis has been differentiated by G90/G91, (when incremental addresses
have not been set)

Incremental value command for C axis

Incremental value command for Z axis
“lX= Absolute value command for X axis

-17-
5. POSITION COMMANDS
5’.2. RADL4L/DIAMETRICAL COMMANDS

5.2. RADLAIJDIAMETRICAL COMMANDS

The cross sections of worlcpieces machined on a lathe are circular, and the diametrical or radial value of those
circles can be used for movement commands in the X-axis direction. A radial command will move the tool by the
cammanded amount only, but a diametrical cammand will move the tool both in the X-axis direction by an
amount equivalent to one-half the command amount only and in the %mis direction by the commanded amount
only.
This system permits radial ‘or diametrical commands to be issued, depending on’ the parameter setting. The figure
below shows the command procedure when the tool is to be moved from point PI to point P2.
X axis

PI
,0
,8
// /
,/
Spindle u’ 1‘
P2 rl
—. . Z axis

Coordinate zero point

X cmnmand U command Remarks

nS3Jlulm
.J:.l lwf —-. -.-:-.l n-_l!-1 Even when a diametrical com-
I lJ~dIILGLHLXLl ] nmnm Diametrical
t I mand has been selected, only -the
U command can be made a radial
X=rl X= 2rl U=r, U= 2rz command by parameter.
I I I I
Radial and diametrical commands

NOTE 1: In the above examplq the tool moves from P1 to P2 in the minus direction of the X axis and
so when an incremental value is issued, the minus sign is given to the numerical value being
commanded.
2 In this manual, diametrical commands are used in descriptions of both the X and U axes for
the sake of convenience.

–18–
 5. POSITION COMMANDS “
5.3.INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21J

5.3. INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21)

(1) Function and objective
These G commands are used to switch between the inch and millimeter (metric) systems.
(2) Command format ...
G20: Inch command
G21: Metric command
(3) Detailed description
The G20 and G21 commands merely select the command units. They do not select the input units.
G20 and G21 selection is meaningful only for linear axes and it is meaningless for rota~ axes.
@ample I) Relationship betweim input command units and G2WG21 wmmands (with dtimal point input
type I)

his Input cammand Command Initial i h OFF Initial inch ON

unit type (cS-) txample G21 G20
x B Xloo ; 0.100 mm 0.254 mm
z R Zloo ; 0.100 mm 0.254 mm
Y A Yloo ; 1.00 mm 2.54 mm
c 2 Cloo ; 10.W 10JY’ 10.OO I 10.0”

5.4. DECIMAL POINT IIS3?UT

(1) Function and obiective
This function en~bles the decimal uoint command to be input. It assigns the decimal Point in millimeter or
inch units for the machining pro&am input information that defmes”the tool paths, ~istances and speads.
A parameter selects whether type I (minimum input command unit) or type 11 (zero point) is to apply for the
least significant digit of data without a decimal point.
(2) Command format
00000.000 Metric system
0000.0000 Inch system
(3) Detailed description
1) The decimal point command is valid for the distances, angles, times and speeds in machining programs.
2) Refer to the table listing the addresses used and valid/invalid decimal point eomrnands in Section 5-4
for details on the valid address= for the decimal point mmmands.
3) The number of significant digits in a decimal point command is shown below (for input command unit
CS-B).
,
Movement command
@near)
Movement command
~ I1 Feed rate I
%
Dwell (X)
I
Integer Decimal Integer Decimal Integer I Decimal I Integer I Decimal
part part part part

E
MM 0. – .Ooo – o. – .OoQ– o. – .Ooo – o. – .WO –
(milli- 99999. .999 99999. .999 60000. .999 99999. .999
meter)
0 – 999. .Oooo –
.9999
o – 99. .Ooo –

t--t--l
INCH 0. – .Oooo – 99999. .0 –.999 o. – .Oooo –
(inch) 9999. .9999 (359.) “ 2362. .9999 .999
o–99. .m
—
.993999

NOTE The top row gives the feed rate as a per-minute rate and the bottom row as a per-revolution rate.

-19-
5.POSITION COMMANDS
5.4.DECIMAL POINT INPUT

4) The dmimal point command is valid even for commands defining the variabie data used in
subprograms,
5) Decimal point commands for dwimal point invalid addresses are processed as integer data only and
everything below the deeimal point is ignored. Addresses which are invalid for the decimal point are
D, H, L, M, N, O, P, S and T. A1l variable commands, however, are treated as data with deeimal
points.
(4) Example of program
1) Example of program for decimal point valid address

Decimal point eomrnand 1 Decimal point

command 2
Program example When 1 = 1P, When 1 = lop l=lmm
GOX123.45 X123.450 mm X123.450 mm X123.450 mm
(decimal points are all mm
points
GOX12345 X12.345 mm X123.450 mm X12345.000 mm
(Iast digit is 1P
unit)
#ill = 123, #112=5.55 X123.000 mm, X123.000 mm, X123.000 mm,
x#lll z#l12 25.550 mm 25.550 mm 25.550 mm
#113 =#111 +#112 #113 = 128.550 #113 = 128.550 #113= 128.550
(addition)
#114 = #111-#112 #114 = 117.450 #114= 117.450 #114= 117.450
(subtraction)
#115 = #111*#112 #115 = 682.650 #115 = 682.650 #lUi = 682.650
(multiplication)
#116 =#111/#112 #116 = 22.162, #116=22.162, #116=22.162,
#117 =#112/#111 #117 =0.045 #117= 0.045 #117= 0.045
(division)

–20-
 5. POSITION COMMANDS ~
5.4.DECIMAL POINT INPUT

Addresses used and validlinvalid decimal point commands

Address Decimal Application Remarks K Valid Arc center coordin-

point ate
command
A VaIid Valid Tool nose R
CO.xdinatepmition
data compensation/tool..
radius compensation
Invalid I Secondarymiscellan~ I vector components
I I ous funcfioncode I 1 Invalid Hole machining
Valid Angledata
qcle
Invalid MRCprogramnumber Number of repeti-
Invalid Data setting tions
axisnumber
Valid Deep hole drilling
Valid Deepholedrillingcycle cycle (2)
(2) Second and subsequ-
Safetydistancw
ent cut amounts
B Valid Coordinateposition
data L Invalid Subprogram
Invalid Secondarymiscellane- Number of repeti-
ous fimctioncode tions
c Vafid Coordinateposition Invalid Program tool L2, L1O,
data compensation input Lll
type selection
Invalid Data setting selec- L50
tion
Invalid Data setting 4 bytes
VaIid Progmmtool offset 2-word type data
input
Tool neseR offset M Invalid Miscellaneous
fi.mctionwd~
N Invalid Sequence numbers
Invalid Data setting,
data numbers
o Invalid Program numbers
P Invalid Dwell time
Invalid Subprogram call
> progra m numbers
Invalid Second reference
G I Valid I PreparatoT function I point number
I
t I code I Invalid Constant peripheral
H I Valid Coordinateposition speed control,
data axis number
Invalid Sequencenumbers in Invalid MRC finishing
subprogmms shape start sequence
Invalid Data aettin~ number
bit typedata Valid Cut-off cycle shift
I Valid Arc centercoordinates amountkut amount
Valid Tool noseR Invalid Multiple repetitive
thread cutting cycle,
number of cutting
passes, chamfering,
tool nose angle
1 I First cut amount 1 I Valid Multiple repetitive
J Valid Arc centercoordinates thread cutting eycie
Thread height
Valid Tool noseR
compensationhol Invalid Program tool oft%et
radius compensation input/OffSet number
vectorcomponents Invalid Data setting,
Invalid Deepho[edrillingcycle broad classification
(2& at *m mint number
Invalid Return sequence
NOTE Decimal points are all valid in user number from
subprogram
macro arguments.
Valid Coordinate position 330HL
data only
-21–
 !,

5.POSITION COMMANDS
5.4.DECIMAL POINT INPUT

Decimal R Valid Coodinate position 330HL

point data only
com- s Invalid Spindle function
mand codes
Invalid Minimum spindle Invalid Maximum spindle
clamp speed clamp speed
Invalid MRC finishing Invalid Constant peripheral
shape end sequence speed control,
number peripheral speed
Valid Cut-off cycle Invalid Data setting, 2 bytes
cut amountjshift wordtype data
amount
T Invalid Tool fimction codes
Valid Multiple repetitive
thread cutting cycle u Valid Coordinate position
Minimum cut data
amount Invalid Secondary .
Valid Multiple repetitive miseelkmeous
I
thread cuttkg cycle function codes
First cut amount Valid Program tool offset
Valid Deep hole drilling input
cycle 1 v Valid Coordinate position
Cut amount of each data
pass Invalid Secondary
fnvalid Program tool offset miscellaneous
input function codes
Hypothetical tool Valid Program tool of&et
nose point number input
[nvalid Deep hole drilling w Valid Coordinate position
cycle (2) data

e
Dwell at cut point
Invalid Secondary
Valid miscelkneous
function codes
Valid Valid Program tool offket
input
Valid x Valid Coordinate position
data
de&leration ranger- 1 Valid Dwell
VaIid MRC
Invalid Secondary
longitudinal/face I miscellaneous
escape amount
function codes
Cnvalid MRC shaping
Valid Program tool offset
division number
input
Valid cut-off Cyclq
Y Valid Coordinate position
return amount I data
Valid Cut-off cycle,
escape amount Invalid secondary
miscdlaneou.s
Valid Multiple repetitive function codes
thread cutting cycle,
Valid Program tool offset
finishirw allowance
input
Valid Multiple repetitive
z Valid Coordinate position
thread cutting cycleJ I data
turning cycle, taper
differenm Invalid Secondary
Valid miscellaneous
Hole machining
function codes
cyclefdeep hole ckil-
ling cycle (2), Valid Program tool offset
distance to reference input
point
Valid Program tool offset
input/Tool nose R
offset amount
(absolute)

-22-
 ,,

,,’

INTERPOLATION
6. FUNCTIONS
6.1.POSITIONING {RAPID TRAVERSE: Gi?Oj

6. lNTHtPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6.1. POSITIONING (RAPID TIU%VERSE: GOO)
...
(1) Function and objective
This cammand is accompanied by coordinate words. It positions the tool along a linear or non-linear path
from the present point as the start point to the end point which is specified by the coordinatfi wards.
(2) Command format
GOO Xx/Uu Zz/Ww ; The command addresses are valid for all additional axes.
Symbols x, u, z and w are coordinate values.
(3) Detaikl description
1) C)nce this command has been issued, the GOOmode is retained until it is changed by another G function
or until the GO1, G02, G03 or G33 command in the 01 group is issued. If the next command is GOO,
all that is required is simply that the coordinate words be specified.
2) In the GOOrnod~ the to;] ;S always accelerated at the start ‘point of the block and decelerated at the
end point. Execution proceeds to the next block after it has been ccmfirmed that the command pulse
of the present block is O and that the tracking error of the acc&ration/deceleration circuit is 0. The
in-position width is set by parameter.
3) Any G command (G83 – G89) in the 09 group is cancelkd (G80) by the GOOcommand.
4) Whether the tool moves along a linear or non-linear path is determined by parameter, but the
positioning time dots not change.
a. Linear path: This is the same as linear intqpolation (GO1), and the speed is limited by the rapid
traverse rate of each axis.
b. Non-Iinear path: The tool is positioned at the rapid traverse rate independently for each axis.
5] When no number following the G address, this is treated as GOO.
(4) Example of program
@ample)

f.--.---.--.m
;
*
1 1
I 4
1 I
! *1
&.-9--.v.- J
Tool rest :1
1
+x
II
t
(+ 1s0, +300)
\ I
I

I
.— .— - .—. —
—
Workpiece -l-z

Unit: mm
Chuck
\

In the above figure

GOOX1OOOOO 2150000 ; Absolute value command
GOOU-80000 W-150000 ; Incremental value command
(With an input setting unit of 0.001 mm)

-23-
 ,’

6. LVTERP OLAT.lC)NFUNCTIONS
6.L POSITIONING (RAPID TRAVERSEI WO)

NOTE 1: When the “GO non-interpolation” user parameter is OFF (not indicated in reverse vidm),
the path along which the tool is positioned is the shortest path connecting the start and end
Points. The positioning speed is automatically calculated so that the shortest distribution
~ime is obtai&d in ord& ~hat the commanded speeds for each axis do not exceed the rapid
traverse rate. . ..
When, for instant% the X-axis and Z-axis rapid traverse rates are both 9600 mm/min. the
tool will follow the”path in the figure below ;f the following is programmed:
GOOZ -300000 X400000 ;
(With an input setting unit of 0.001 mm)

End point
Actual X axis rate: 6400 mrn/min

f“
fx
‘x

\ z

1
l-—————3m—————
Start point
(Unih mm)
‘z”x’-

Actual Z axis rate 9600 mm/min

NOTE 2 When the “GO non-interpolation” user parameter is ON (indicated in reverse videol the tool
will move along the pat~ from the sta~ point to the end”point at the rapid travmse rate of
each axis.
When. for instance the X-axis and Zaxis rauid traverse rates are both 9600 mm/min,,, the
tool wiIl follow the-path in the figure below ~f the following is programmed:
GOOZ -300000 X400000;
(With an input setting unit of 0.001 mm)

I
End point Actual X axis rate 9600 mrnlmin

/-’”.

fx I
---
4 Start point
@nib mm)
“7
ActuaI Z axis rate 9600 mm/min

–24-
 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6.2.LINEAR INTERPOLATION (Gill)

NOTE 3: The rapid traverse rate for each axis with the GOO command differs according to the
individual machine and so reference should be made to the machine specifications manual.
4 Rapid traverse (GOO)deceleration check
Upon completion of the rapid traverse (GOO), execute the next block after the deceleration
check time @d) has elapsed. The deceleration check time @d) is as follows, depending on the
acceleration/deceleration type.
Linear acceleration/Iinear deceleration ..... Td = Ts + u
Exponential acceleration/DC deceleration ..... Td = 2 x Ts + a
Exponential acceleration/exponential deceleration ..... Td = 2 x Ts -i- a
Where Ts is the acceleration time constant, a = O to 14 msec

. The time required for the deceleration check during rapid traverse is the longest among the rapid traverse
deceleration check times of each axis determined by the rapid traverse acceleration/dec&ration time constants
and by the rapid traverse acceleration/dcxeleration mode of the axes mmmanded simultanmusly.

6.2. LINEAR INTERPOLATION (GO1)

(1) Function and objective
This command is accompanied by coordinate words and a feed rate command. It makes the tool move
(interpolate) linearly from its present position to the end point specified by the coordinate words at the
sued rmecified bv addreas l?. In this case. the feixl rate sr)ecified
. bY
. address F alwavs. acts as a linear
s@ed ii the tool-nose center advance dir’wtion.
(2) Command format
GO1 Xx/Uu ZZ/Ww au Ff ; (“a” is an additiond axis)
x, u, z, w and u are coordinate values.

X axis

..— - -— Zaxis

(3) Detailed description

Once this command is issued, the mode is maintained until another G function (GOO,G02, G03, G33)
in the 01 group which changes the GO1 mode is issued. Therefore, if the next command is also GO1 and
if the frxd rate is the same, all that is required to be done is to specify the coordinate words. If no F
command is given in the first GO1 command block, program error “P62” results.
The feed rate for a rotary axis is commanded by 0/rein (decimal point position unit). (3?300 =
300 0/rein)
The G functions (G70 — G89) in the 09 group are cancelled (G80) by the GO1 command.

-25-
6.INTERP OLATIOiV FUNCTIONS
6.2.LINE~ INTERPOLATION (GUI}

(4] Examples of programs

(ExampIe 1)

X axis
( )
I t I

f ? e Z axis .

50.0

\ /
GO1 X50.O Z20.O F300 ;
Cutting in the sequence of Pl~Pz+Pq-P4 at 300 mndmin feed rate
PO~Pl, Pq+PO is for tool positioning

2’40
200

MO Unit: mm
L +x

+2

100 Input setting unit: 0.(201 mm.

1
I
t I I I *
40 90 160 220230

GOO x200000 Z40000 ; po+pl

GO1 XIOOOOOZ90000 F300 pl-Dp2
Z160000 ; p2+p3
X140000 Z220000 ; p3+p4
GOO X240000 Z230000 ; p4+po

-26–
 ‘,

6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6.3.CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03)

6.3. CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03)

(1) Function and objeetive
These commands serve to move the tool along an arc.
(2) Command format . ..
G02 (G03) ,Xxjuu ZzlWw, ,Ii Kk, &
End point coordinates AC center coordinates Feed rate
LT Counterclockwise (CCW)
Clockwise (CW)

X/U ... Arc end point coordinates, X axis (absolute value of work coordinate system for ~ incremental
value from present position for U)
Z/W ... Arc end point coordinates, Z axis (absolute value of work coordinate system for z incremental
value from pr~t position for W)
1... Arc center, X axis (for I, radius command/incremental value of X coordinate at center as seen from
start point)
K ... Arc center, Z axis (for K, incremental value of Z coordinate at center as seen from start point)
F ... Feed rate

X axis
Center
i

End point

u/2
“x

\ .— . .— Z axis
P

l————

‘1

–27-
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6.3. CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION {G02, W3)

(3)
. . Detailed description
G02 (or G03) is retained until another G command (GOO,GO1 or G33) in the 01 group that changes its mode
is issued.
The direction of the arc rotation is differentiated by G02 and G03:
G02: Clockwise (CW) ...
G03: Counterclockwise (CCW)

I LnucK
C CW(G03)
1 I
(–a I I
1 I ----- .
----”-----”1 v ~
i $_
CW(G02) !
1
-i-z
I
.—. —
i—
-f-z
1 Work- I

J ri-z
J?f CVJ(G02) I
-----
- —---
piece
--—-
____ 1

\ II
I n- c CW(G03)
+x

LJ Tool rest

An arc which extends for more than one quadrant can be executed with a single block command. .
The folIowing information is needed for circular interpolation.
a. Rotation direction: Clockwise (G02) or counterclockwise (G03)?
b. Arc end point coordinates: Given by addresses ~ & U, W
c. Arc center coordinates Given by addresses I, K (incremental commands)
d. Peed ratw Given by address F
A urcmram error results when I. K or R is not commanded.
C&sideration must be given to the sign for I and K since I is the distance in the X-axis direction to the arc center
as seen from the start point and K is the distance in the Z-axis direction.
No T commands can be issued in the G2/G3 modal status.
A program error results (“P151”) if a T cammand is issued in the G2/G3 modal status.

-28-
 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6.3.CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION {W2, G03)

Example of program

X axis
+ ..

50.0

Coordinate 120.0
zero point

. . Z axis
J

?
70.0 50.0
1-

G2 X120,0 Z70.O 150.o F2Ml ; Absolute value command

G2 U1OO.O W-50.O 1.50.o F200 ; Incremental value command

-29-
6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6.3.CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02,W3)

(5) Checkpoints for circular interpolation

NOTE 1: The terms “clockwise” (G02) and ‘counterclockwise” (G03) used for arc operations are
defined as a case where&a ri~ht-hand coordinate system. the ne~ative direction is viewed from
the position direction of the ;oordmate axis which-is at right ar@es to the plane in question.
2: When the end point is the same position as the start point, a 360 arc (full circle) is commanded
when the center is commanded using I and K. In this case, always designate the end point.
3: The following occurs when the start and end point radii do not match in an arc command
...

1) Program error “P70” results at the arc start point when error AR is greater than the “arc error”
parameter value.
.
[ G02Zf!0. K50. :

I f’+ /
Start &
point
/

Start
Center
End
1
\

H point radius

2) Spiral interpolation in the direction of the commanded endpoint results when error Al? is less than the
parameter value.
.

Spiral interpolation
G02ZW. K50. ;

i m’”,

point - Stan pointradius ~?

I -z
point radius ~

Although the parameter setting range is from O to 0.100 mm (input units), the parameter values in the above
examples are assumed to be extremely high in order to facilitate understanding.

-30-
 !,,

‘, ,,,,,

INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6. ““
6.4.R-SPECIFIED CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02,G03)

6-4. R-SPECIFIED CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03)

(1) Function and objective
Along with the conventional circular interpolation commands based on the arc center coordinate (I, K)
designation, these commands can also be issued by directly designating the arc radius R. .
(2) Command format
G02 (G03) Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Rr Ff;
XIU:X-axis end point coordinate
ZIW:Z-axis end point coordinate
r: AC radius
k Feed rate
(3) Detailed description
The arc center is on the bisector line which is perpendicular to the line connecting the start and end points
of the arc. The noint. where the arc with the srmcified radius whose start noint is the center intersects the
perpendicular b~secto~ lin~ serves as the cente~ coordinates of the arc command,
If the R sign of the commanded program is plus, the arc is smaller than a semispherq if it is minus, the arc
is larger than a semiphere.

\
/~ ~ kc path when R sign is Gnus
/
\
-/ \
i
\
when R sign is plus
\
\
\

The following condition must be met with an R-specified arc interpolation command:
L/2xr~l
Where L is the line from the start noint to end Doint.
If an R specification and 1, K specification are ~iven at the same time in the same block, the arc command with
the R specification takes precedence.
In the case of a full-circle command (where the start and end points coincide), an R-specified arc command will
be completed immediately if it is issued and no operation will result. An I, K-specified arc command should
therefore be used in such a case.
(4) Examples of programs
(Example 1)
G03 Zzl XzI Rrl Ffl ; ... R-specified arc on ZX plane
(Example 2]
G02 Xxl Zzl Iil Kkl Rrl Ffl ; ... R-specified arc on X2 plane ...
(When the R specification and I, K specification are contained in the same block, the R specification has
priority in processing.) .’

-31-
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6.5.PLANE SELECTION GI 7,G18,G19

6.5. PLANE SELECTION G17, G18, G19

These commands are used to seled the control plane and the plane on which the arc exists.
If the 3 basic axes and the parallel axes corresponding to these basic axes are entered as parameters, the commands
can seIect the plane cmmposed of any 2 axes which are not parallel axes. If a rotary axis is entered as.a para~lel axis,
the commands can select the plane containing the rotary axis.
These commands are used to sekct:

s The plane for circular interpolation

. The plane for nose radius (cutter) compensation
. The plane for milling interpolation
The command format is as below:

G17 ; (U plane selection)

I, 1 and K each denote a basic axis or the
G18 ; (K1 plane selection)
corresponding parallel axis.
G19 ; (JK pkme selection )}

When the power is turned on or when the system is reset, the plane set by the control parameters (initial Z-X plane,
initial Y-Z plane) is selected. If neither of these has been set, the X-Y plane is selected.

1 J

L-
G03 G03 G03

G02 G02 G02

9 $ q

J
G17 (I-J) plane 18 (K-I) plane G19 (J-K) plane

IFARAMETER ENTRY
Basic axes and parallel axes can be entered
Basic axis Parallel axis in the parameters. The same axis name can
I x Y be entered in duplication, but when it is
J Y assigned in duplication, the plane is
determined by (4) under plane selection
K z
system Section 6-5-2.
Fig. 1 IZxamplea of plane selection parameter entry It is not possible to set axes, which have not
been entered, as control axes.

-32-
 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6.5. PLANE SELECTION Glz G18, G19

6.5.2 PLANE SELECTION SYSTEM

This section describes the plane selection for the parameter entry examples shown in Fig. 1.
1) AXiSaddresses assigned in the same block as the pIane selection (G17, G18, G19) command determine
which of the basic axes or parallel axes are to be in the actual plane selected. .-.
Example)

x G18XZ : Y G18YZ : z G19Yz :

2) Plane selection is not performed with blocks in which the plane selection G code (G17, G18, G19) is
not assigned.
G182L Z_ ; ZX plane
Y_ Z_ ; ZX plane (no plane change)
3) When the axis addresses are omitted in the block containing the plane selection G codes (G17, G18,
G19), it is assumed that the axis addreswx of the 3 basic axes have been assigned.
G18 ; (ZX plane = G18XZ ;)
4) Whtm the basic axes or their paralIeI axes are duplicated and assigned in the same block as the plane
selection G code (G17, G18, G19), the pkme is determined in the order of basic axes, and then paraliel
axes.
G18XYZ; The ZX plane is selected. Thereforq the Y’ movement is unrelakd to the selected
plane.

NOTE 1: Where the initial X-Z plane in the control parameter is kept ON, the G18 plane is selected
when the power is turned on or when the system is reset.

-33-
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6.6. THREAD CUTTING

6.6. THREAD CUTTING

6.6.1 CONSTANT LEAD THREAI) CUTTING (G33)

(1) Outline . ..
The G33 command exercises feed control over the tool which is synchronized with the spindle rotation and
so this makes it possl%le to conduct constant-had straight thread-cutting, tapered thread-cutting, and
continuous thread-cutting.

F/E F/E
StraigM thread Scrolled thread Continuous thread

(2) Command format

G33 Zz/Ww ?WUu Ff Qq ; (Normal lead thread cutting commands)
Where =, Ww, Xx, Uu = Thread end point addresses and coordinates
Ff = bad of long axis (axis which moves most) direction
Qq = Thread cutting start shift anglq 0.001 to 360.000°
G33 Zz/Ww Xx/Uu EC Qq ; (Precision lead thread cutting commands)
Where B, Ww, Xx, Uu = Thread end point addresses and mordinates
l% = Lead of long axis (axis which moves most) direction
~ = Thread cutting start shift anglq 0.001 to 360JXW

Xaxisb
End
point

i
u/2
, start point
- ~ “1
z w
. . Z axis

-34-
 6’.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6.6.THRE# CUTTING

(3) Detailed description

1) The E command is also used for the number of ridges in inch thread cutting, and is usable only as a same
command unit modal. Whether the ridge number or precision lead is to be designated can be selected
by parameter setting.
2) The Iead in the long axis direction is commanded for the taper thread lead.

x
!{ u/2 ~
Tapered thread section

a’
v
w
m

—;
When a K 45° lead is in &mis direction
When a >45° lead is in X-axis direction
When a = 45° lead can be in either Z or X-axis direction.

Thread cutting metric input

Inputunit A (0.01mm) B(~COl
nun) c (wOJlm)
Sysfenl
Csu!roaad F (nun/rw} E (Unl!Aw) BwwAntN F (mm/Iw) E (nunhx) Etiag881ill&)1?(tnnlhw) E(mm/I@ E(ri&ulhdd
ad-
MlnimmriOQM. 1(-o.oq 1(-o.oOllJ 1(-Q 1(-o@l\ 1(.o.003n), 1(- lL 1(-o.ooxll~ 1(-O.OWW1),i (- 1),
nw.ndunit (L-l.(m) (L-1.IXXO) (1.=1.0) (L-LUJCO) (L-1.00W3) (1.-1.03) (L=Lm) (L-1.w.wn (L-1.tq
COnlnvxid O.on O.fxnl 0.1 O,(IM1 O.CUJ1 0.01 O.OUYI1 O.woox. 0.001
range -9999s9 -9S?Q.XJ99 -9999999.9 .999.993 -9$9.99999 – 999W?.99 -99.959s9 XU99999 -s9$99.999
Thread cutting inch input
rnpltmit A (lM)31
inch) a (aOmlinch) c (0.W031
inch)
Systan
Command F (itwhh.’) E (ihchkw) EO’id#w F (&b/w) E(iichkv) Boiwir& F (iikw) E (ii!tw) E@it@4nCto
adb
Minimumaetw 1(-o.03101~ 1(-O.WWW, 1(-1] 1(-o.oloiwl), 1(-o.o#@Mf),1(-1), 1(-o.fmoool), 1(-o.wtOoOOI),
1(=1~
W&dunit (L- L03XO) (L- MdoOOO)(L- LoXl) (L-ldwlloo) (L-1.#ow310)(L=J1.0330) (1.-MOO4OOO) (L-l$wwoo) (1.=LUMCO)
COznlnand O.CUM1 O.ewxll O.on O.wxol O.sowol O.ow oMloooOl o.ownYJl OLUIO1
range -999.9W99 - 99.$%9999 -99599.999 - 99SXW99 -9.W9$ZW –WW999 – 9.s9999 -OS999W$9 -999.99939

NOTE 1: It is not mxssible to assign a lead where the feed rate as converted into per-minute feed
exceds tie maximum cu~ting feed rate.
3) The constant peripheral sped control function should not be used for taper thread cutting commands
or scrolled thread cutting commands.
4) Thq spindle speed should be kept constant throughout from the rough cutting until the finishing.
5) If the feed hold function is employed during thread cutting to stop the feed, the thread ridges will lose
their shape. For this reason, fed hold does not function during thread cutting.
If the feed hold switch is pressed during thread cutting, block stop will result at the end point of the
block following the block in which thread cutting is completed (no longer G33 mode).
6) The converted cutting feed rate is compared with the cutting feed clamp rate when thrmd cutting starts,
and if it is found to exceed the clamp ratq an operation error will rewdt. (S= NOTE 1)
7) In order to protect the lead during thread cutting, a cutting feed rate which has been converted may
sometimes excewl the cutting feed clamp rate.
8) An illegal lead is normally produced at the start of the thread and at the end of the cutting because of
servo system delay and other such factors.
Therefor~ it is necessary to command a thread length which is determined by adding the illegal lead
lengths al and 6Z to the required thread length.

–35- “
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6.6.THREAD CUTTING

9) The spindle speed is subject to the following restriction:

1 S R SMmimum feed rate/Thread Iead
Where R ~ Permissible sped of encoder (rPm)
R = Spindle sped (rPm)
Thread lead = mm or inches
Maximum feed rate = mm/min or inch/mm (this is subject to the restrictions imposed by the machine
specifications).
10) Dry run is valid for thread cutting but the feed rate based on dry run is not synchronized with the
spindle rotation.
The dry run signal is checked at the start of thread cutting and any switching during thread cutting is
@ored.
11) Synchronous feed applies for the thread cutting commands even with an asynchronous feed command
(GM).
12) Spindle override is valid even during thread cutting. When the override is excedxl dnring thread
cutting, the thread wilI not be cut properly due to servo system delay.
13) When a thread cutting command is programmed during tool nose R compensation, the compensation
is temporarily cancekl and the thrtnd cutting is executed.
14) When the mode is switched to another automatic mode while G33 is executed, the foIlowing block
which does not contain a thread cutting command is first txecuted and then the automatic operation
stops.
15) When the mode is switched to the manual mode while G33 is executed, the following block which does
not contain a thread cutting command is first executed and then the automatic operation stops. In the
case of a single block, the following block which does not contain a thread cutting command is fwst
exeated and then the automatic operation stops.
16) The thread cutting command waits for the single rotation sync signal of the rotary encoder and starts
movement.
However. movement starts without waitim for this simal when another smtem issues a thread cuttimz
command during ongoing thread cutting by one partic&ir system. Theref&e, thread cutting command;
should not be issued by a mukiple number of systems.
(4) Example of program

Z axis

40.0 ~ 50.0
I

G33 X90.O Z40.O E12.34567 ; ... Absolute value command

G33 U70.O W–50.O E12.34567 ; ... Incremental value command

-36-
 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6.6. TliUU%4D CUTTING

6.6.2 INCH THREAD CUTTING (G33)

(1) Outline
If the number of ridges per inch in the long axis direetion is assigned in the G33 command, the feed of the
tool synchronized with the spindle rotation will be controlled, which means that constant-lead straight
thread-cutting, tapered thread-cutting, and continuous thread-cutting ean be performed.
(2) Command format
G33 -W ~wU & @ ;
Where 2%,., Ww. Xx., Uu = Thread end noint addresses and coordinates
l%= Number of “tidws per inch in direction of lon~ axis (axis which moves most)
(decimal point &m&and ean also be assigned) -
Qq = Thread cutting start shifi angle, 0.001 to 360.000”

X axis w
●
End
Ir point

Z axis

(3)
. . Detailed deserintion
1) The numlkr of ridges in the Iong axis direction is assigned as the number of ridges per inch.
2) The E code is also used to assign the precision lead length, and whether the ridge number or preeision
lead kmgth is to be designated w be selected by parameter setting. ~he “G33E precision” on the
parameter page is set OFF for ridge number designation).
3) The E command value should be set within the lead value range when the lead is converted.
4) See Section 6.6.1 on lead thread cutting for other details.
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6.6.THREAD CUTTING

(4) I&ample of program

. ..
X axis

. 20.0
Z axis
T

- 40.0 50.0

G33 X90.O Z40.O E12.O ; ... Absolute value command

G33 U70.O W-50.O E12.O ; ... Incremental value emn.mand

6.6.3 CONTINUOUS ‘1’HREi%D CUTTING

Continuous thread cutting is possible by assigning thread cutting commands continuously.
In this way, it is possl%le to cut special threads whose lead or shape changes.

/
—. — -——. —.—.—— —. ——. —. —. —.— —.— .-— —.— —-—

~.
G2?3
e
“

-38-
 6. INTERPOLATIONFUiVCTIbNS
6.6.
TKlRE4DCUK?ZNG

6.6.4 VARMMJ3 LEAD THREAD CUTJTJSG

(1) Outline
Thread cutting of variable leads has been made possible by assigning the lead increase/decrease amount per
one screw rotation.
(2) Command format
G34 X/U . F/E .. K .;
Thread eficint X coordinate
ZIW Thread end ~oint Z coordinate
F/E Thread basic lead
K Lead increase/decrease amount per one screw rotation

Non-leadaxis
‘t
-
i
i
“i

i
i
Leadd$
--i-– .—. +
i

F+3.5K” F-t-2.5K” F+l.5K F+O.5K

\

t-

‘1
Leadspeed
1’
“F+4K F+3K F+2K F+K F“

-39-
6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS .
6=6.
mm cmNG

<3) Command range

Thread cuttin~metric input

Note 1)
Input unit
A (0.01 mm) B (0.001mm) C (0.0001mmj
system
K (n*mm/rev)

4
Command
address F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) m no. of
pitches
Minimum 1(=0.001) 1(= 0.0001) 1(= 0.0001) 1(=0.00001) 1(= 0.00001) 1(= 0.000001) Same as F or
command unit (1.= 1.000) (1,=1.0000) (1.= 1.0000) (1.= 1.00000) (1.= 1.00000) (1.= 1.000000) E
Command 0.001 0.00001 0.0001 0.00001 0.00001 0.000i)ol (with symbol)
range -9999.999 -9999.9999 -999.9999 -999499999 -99.99999 -99.999999 I

Thread cuttinglinch input

Input unit
qmem
A (0.001inch)
I
B (0.0001inch)
I C (0.00001inch)
I Am/c I
Command
address E (inch/rev)
I E (inch/rev)
I F (inch/rev)
I E (inch/rev)
I
F (inch/rev)

Minimum 1(= 0.00001) q =0.000001) 1(= 0.000QO1) 1(= 0.0000001) 1(= 0.0000001)
command unit (l.= 1.00000) (L= 1.000000) (1.=1.000000) (1.= 1.0000000) (1.= 1.0000000)
Command 0.00001 0.000001 0.000001 0+0000001 0.0000001 0.00000001 (with sy
range -999.99999 -99.999999 -99.9999$’9 -9.9999999 -9.9999999 -0.99999999

(4) Increased thread pitch

When K is positive, this will be an increased pitch.
I block movement amount (n pitch) = (F-t-K) + (F+2K) + (F+3K) + ..+ (F+nK)

(5) Decreased thread pitch

When K is negative, this will be a decreased pitch.
I block movement amount (n pitch) = (F–K) + (F–2K) + (F–3K) -t- .. i- (F–nK)

(6) Error display

I Error No. Description Remedy

I
P93 SCREW PITCH ERR

L-- 1) The F/E, K values are not correct

during the thread cutting command.
2) The final lead is not within the F/E
command range,

Reference 1) Final lead = ~ (F2 + 2KZ)

Reference 2) No, of pitches = (–F + final lead) /K
Cordkm the F/E and K values and
properly set.
Reference 1)

Note) Z lead axis length

(n Other precautions
Same as for G33.

-40-
 6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6.ZM..LING LiVTERPOLAITON

6.7 MILLING lNTERPOLAIYON

Milling interpolation converts the command programmed in the orthogonal coordinate system into a linear axis
movement and rotary axis movement, and controls the contour.

Y (Hypothetical axis)
I

Milling machining is executed when G12.1 is assigned. When G13.1 is assigned, milling will be canceled and normal
lathe cutting will be carried out.

Promun format
G12.l; MilIing mode ON
G13.l; MilIi.ng mode OFF (lathe cutting mode) -

The G codes required for miIling machining selection and condition setting are given below.

G code l%nction Remarka

G12.1 MiIling mode ON Initial value is G13.1
G13.1 Mfig mode OFF
G16 Y-Z cylindrical plane selection Initial value (per G12.1 command) is G17,
G17 X-Y pkme selection G16 or G19 according to the parameter
G19 Y-Z ukme selection selection.
G41 Tool nose R compensation left Initial value is G40
G42 Tool nose R compensation right

Machining mode

G13.1 (Lathe cutting mode) G12.1 (Milling mode)

I
G16
G17 Gla G19 (x-z) G17 G19
(X-Y plane) (Z-X plane) (Y-Z plane) (Cylindrical (X-Y phme) (Y-Z plane)
plane)

+~
G46, G41, G42/4(1 G41, G42/G40
(Nose R compensation) (Tool compensation)

-41-
6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6.%MILLING INTERPOLATKNV

6.7.1
MILLING MODE SELECTION (G12.1)
(1) Select the lathe cutting mode (G13.1) or milling mode (G12.1) with the G12.1 or G13.1 code,
(2) This command is a modal, and the lathe cutting mode will be selected when the power is turned ON.
(3) When G12.1 is assigned, the following conditions must be satisfied. A program error will occur when not
satisfied.
1) Nose R compensation is canceled.
2) The constant peripheral speed is canceled.
(4) A program error will occur if the commanded axis during the milling mode has not been reference point
returned.
(5) The milling mode is valid only for system 1.
(6) The asynchronous mode F command will be forcibly canceled by G12.1. Do not designate the F value during
the milling mode.

Note: If the nose R compensation is canceled with the G@ independent command and therti is no movement
command, the nose R compensation cancel operation will be executed with the G12.1 block.

-42-
 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6-ZMILLING RVTE.RPOLAITON

6.7.2 CONTROL AXIS AND COMMAND AXE IN MILLING INTERPOLATION

(1) The control axes for milling interpolation are the two orthogonal linear axes (X, Z axes) and the one rotary
axis. The rotary axis is selected with parameters.
(2) The command axes in milling interpolation are the three orthogonal linear axes. The axis names are assigned
as X, Z and hypothetical axis.
The hypothetical axis is the axis that is orthogonal with the X and Z axes, and in the interpolation command
is hypothetical. The hypothetical axis name is set to Y or to the control rotary axis selected in (1) with
parameters.

x
‘t

(3) The milling command axis X is not the direct interpolation of control axis X. This axis X will be handled as
the milling coordinate X axis used during the G12.1 command.
(4) Only radius values are used in the flm% coordinate system. (The radius and diameter command parameters
in t~e lathe cutting mode wdl be ignore~.

<Ex. 1>
X4 ‘
I

N1 GO X40:
N2 G12.l;
N3 G 1 X1O, Y1O, FM;

Hypothetical axis

Program1

-43-
6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6-ZMILLING INTERPOLATION

The status of executing N3 in program 1 is shown below.

X = Mill_X
x Mill_X axis

Hypothetical
< axis
Hypothetical ,
axis
/ //

J3
x
I\
Hypothetical
axis Mill_X axis
Mill_X axis ~

Hypothetical
axis

Present vakxe

x 14.141
c 45.000

(5) Milling interpolation is also possible when one linear axis and one rotary axis is used for the commartd axes.
b this case, the linear axis must be the X axis. The rotary axis and hypothetical axis selection is as shown
above. Select the G17 plane during the milling mode.
(6) The hypothetical axis absohte irtcrernentd axes names during the milling mode is shown balow. Always
command the radius for these axis commands.

mill ax
Absolute axis name Incremental axis name
(Hypothetical axis parameter)
o Y v
1 Rotary axis name (C) Rotary axis incremental name (H)

(Hereafter, the hypothetical axis name will be referred to as Y and the rotary axis name as C.)

-44-
 6. INTERR2L4TIONFUNCTIONS
6% MILLING INTERPOLAXiQN

6.7.3 ITAN13 SELECTION

This command is used to determine the plane where the tool moves with the arc interpolation and tool nose R
compensation in the milling mode.
Command format
G17/G19; G16: Y-Z cylindrical plane
G16 c–; G1’Z X-Y plane
Cylindrical radius value G19: Y-Z plane

(1) These plane selection G commands are medals, and the G17 plane is automatically selected as the initial value
when the milling mode is entered from the lathe cutting mode with the G12.1 command. When the G13.1
command is assigned to change to the lathe cutting mode from the milling mode, the plane selected before
the milling mode will be set.
(2) G16/G19 can be selected as the initial value with parameters for the plane selection d“wing the G1.2.l
command.
(3) The foIlowing three planes can be selected.
1) G16

veloped with the cylindersid~

x.
hen machining the work sides.

Y-Z qdindrical pIane

..

-45-
6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6.ZMILLING INTERPOLATION

This is the X-Y plane in the XYZ

orthogonal coordinate system.
This is selected when machining the work
edge.

. X-Y plane
.
3) G19

This is the Y-Z plane in the XYZ

orthogonal coordinate system.

v
A
4
I

k center

Y-Z plane
 ,,
,,’ !!,
,,
,!
,,,.,
6, INTEWOLATIONFVIVcTIONS ‘~
6.%MZLL.lNGlNIERPOLAIYOIV

6.7.4 MILLING COOI?DINATE SYSTEM SETTING

The coordinate system in the milling mode is seIected according to the selected plane each time the milling mode
is selected with the G12.1 command from the lathe cutting mode (G13.1).

(a) G17/G19 phme

(1) For the X and Z axis, the current position is set to the coordinate value of the radius value.
(2) The Y axis is set as the axis that orthogonally crosses with the X and Z axis, and is set to Y= O during the
G12.1 wmmand.

x
TooI 4

(b) G16 plane

(1) When the G16 pkme is selected, the cylinder radius value is commauded with G16C_;. If the radius value
is not designated, the cylinder will be defined using the X axis present value in the G16 command as the
radius value. If the radius value caxmot be defined, a program error (P485) wdl occur.
(2) The X axis is the dfitance from the work center line, and is the same as the normal lathe cutting mode.

-47-
6.INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6% MILLLVG INKERPOLA!XQN

(3) G16 (X-Z cylindrical plane) is actually the side of the cylinder.
The X axis is the distance from the work center, and the Y axis is the circle circumference that uses the
cylinder base radius defined when G16 is assigned.
(4) The Y axis zero point is the position where G12.1 is assigned.

(Example)

G12.1 G16 C50. ; o r G12.1 ;

G16 C50. ;

Y
)- r
Z

-4$-
 6. lNTERRXATIQN FUNCTIi?Nt$
6% M..L~G INTERPOL4YXON

6.7.5 PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS

Table of G codes valid during the milling mode

Group G code l?unction Group G code Function

1 1 1 I
* GOO Positioning G65 Macro call
I 1
* I GOl I Linear interpolation I G66 I Macro modal call A

* I G02 I Circular interpolation (CW) I G66.1 I Macro modal call B

* I G03 I Circular interpolation (CCW) I G67 I Macro modal call cancel
Dwell
L-E-
G09 Exact stop check I G80 I Hole machining cycle cancel
G83 Deep hole drilling cycle
(z axis)

G13.1 Lathe cutting mode G84 Tapping cycle (Z axis)

[ 1
G85 Boring cycle (Z axis)

G87 Deep hole drilling cycle

(x axis)

c) G16 YZ cylindrkal plane G88 Tapping cycle (X axis)

selection
G17 XY plane selection I G89 I Boring cycle (X axis)

1 1
G19 YZ plane selection

I I G22 I Barrier check ON I G94 I Asynchronous feed

Barrier check OFF

G98 Hole machining cycle initial

point return
G99 Hole machining cycle
reference point return

G61 Exact stop mode

F%
G40 Tool nose R compensation
cancel

G41 Tool nose R compensation G64 Cutting mode

left

G42 Tool nose R compensation

right

* : Milling interpolation comnumds

O : G codes valid only in milling mode

-49-
 .. ‘,

6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6.ZikflUINGIiVTERPOL/iTIi2N

If a G code that is invalid in the milling mode is commanded, a program error (P481) will occur.

Of the G codes, oxdy GO, Gl, G2, and G3 commands can be assigned to the Y axis. These commands are
called the milling interpolation commands.
1) Positioning
When GOOis assigned during the milling mode, positioning to the designated point in the selected plane
will be executed with rapid traverse.

I GO W_ YW_ ZM_ ;
I

2) Linear interpolation
When GO1 is assigned in the milling mode, linear interpolation to the designated point in the selected plane
will be executed with the rate designated with the F command.

(a) G16 mode

‘u’ Compile

1
I Program format
,G 01 Y/V_ Z/W_X/U_P_ ;
 6. INTERPQLATIOAT
FUNcTIoNS
6.ZMILLING INTERPOUT!TON

(b) G17 mode

x
‘!
--——- —— ~ Program format
/
I z ~i: GO1 X/U_Y/V_!4/W_F_ ;
I
, t >
._-__ —_-&” z

(C)YG19 mode

x
,,

Program format
x
GOi Y/V_Z /W_X/U_F_ :
*Z

/ 7

-51-
6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6.XMILLING INTERPOLATION

3) Circular interpolation
If G02/G03 is assigned in the milling mode, circular interpolation in the selected plane will be executed with
the designated rate.

(a) G16 mode

u’ Compile

I
I
Program format
G O 2/0 3 Y/V_2~W_J_K_F_ ;

Or

G O 2/0 3 Y/V_ Z/W_R_F_ ;

G02 ..... circular interpolation (clockwise)

G03 ..... circular interpolation (counterclockwise)
circular end point coordinate Y axis (Y absolute vaiue, V incremental value)
z ::::: circular end point coordinate Z axis (Z: absolute value, W incremental value)
UK . ..... circular center incremental value (radius command incremental value from start point
to center)
R ....... circle radius
F ....... feed rate

(b) G17 mode

x
! Program format
G O 2/0 3 X/U_Y/V_I_J_F_;
1
I Or

G O 2/O 3 X/lJ_Y/V_R_F_ ;

-52-
 6. INTEwoLATIoiv FUNCTIONS ‘“
6.%lklZLLllVG
i?NTERP0,Li4T101V

.. ... circular end point coordinate X axis

Yiv . ..., circular end point coordinate Y axis
I/J . . . . . . circular center incremental value (incremental value from start point to center)
R ....... circle radius
F ....... feed rate

(c) G19 mode ~

Program format
G O 2/0 3 Y/V_ Z/W_ J_K_F_ :
I
1’ Or

Y
G O 2/’0 3 Y/V_ Z/W~R_F_: .

Ylv ..... circular end point coordinate Y axis

circular end point coordinate Z axis
?Ew. ::;:: circular center incremental value (incremental value from start point to center)
R ....... circle radius
F ....... feed rate
 ,!
6. INTERPOLATIONFUVCTIONS
ii=Z
MIZJJ7VGINTERPOLA?KZV

(2) The movement commands in the milling mode are all assigned with the coordinate system determined by the
selected machining plane. Therefore, the rotary axis cannot be moved with a direct command in the milling
mode. When designating a specific work position and carrying out. the milling mode, execute positioning in
the lathe cutting mode f~st.

(Example)

G O X1OO.CMO. ; ~ Positioning before milling

G12.1 ;
G O“X50. ;

(3) ~~:~gram error wi~ occur if an axis other than the X, Z and Y (rotary axis) is designated during the milling

-54-
 ,,

6.INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6.%MILLING RVTERPOLA7!’YON

6.7.6 SELECTION OF LATHE CUTTING MODE FROM MILLING MODE

(1) The lathe cutting mode is entered from the milling mode with the G13,1 command.
(2) When G13.1 is assigned, the following conditions must be satisfied. When not satisfied, a program error wiIl
occur.
1) Tool nose R compensation is canceled.
(3) With G13.1, the plane selection will be that before G12.1 was executed.
(4) The synchronous/asynchronous mode and asynchronous F value will be that before G12.1 was executed.
Fiotw If G13.1 is executed after canceling G40 and with no movement command, the nose R compensation
cancel operation (G40) will be executed with the G13.1 block.

6.7.7
FEED FUNCTION
(1) Cutting asynchronous feed
The feed can be set to 0.001mm/min with the F5.3 digit in the asynchronous mode (G94 command). The
setting range is 0.001 to 60000.000mm/min. If the effective feed exceeds the cutting feed clamp speed, the
clamping will be executed with the clamp speed.
Note 1: When selecting the lathe cutting mode - milling mode OFF with G12.1, the F command modal value
will be canceled. Therefore, the feed rate must be set with the F command after switching modes.
Note 2: The asynchronous mode will be forcibly entered with G12.1.
Note 3: When the milling mode is canceled with G13.1, the feed mode F command modal value will return
to the values before the G12.1 command.

6.7.8
PROGRAM AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
The following program awdiary functions are valid during the milling mode.
(1) Linear angle command
(2) Variable command
(3) ‘Automatic corner rounding/ corner R
(4) Geometric function
(5) Hole machining cycle
(6] Subprogram function
(7) User macro

6.7.9
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
(1) The M commands and B commands can be assigned during milling.
(2) The S command during milling will command the rotary tool rotation speed instead of the spindle rotation
speed.
(3) A program error will occur if the T command is assigned in the milling mode. Therefore, always select the
tool before issuing G12.1.
6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6.%MILLING DVTERPO.L4TI’N

T 1212; ,= Issuethe T command

—. beforethe G12.1command.
Goxloo. zo, ;
G12.1 ;
“i
A program error will occur if the T command assigned
T 1200; ~ in the milling.

G13.1:

6.7.10 TOOL (X?F’SET’ FUNCTION

(a) Tool length compensation

(1) The tool offset during milling will add the designated tool Iength offset amount to the cutting coordinates
converted from the milling coordinate system.

ActuaI tool position

MNing coordinate system
/’

Movement on the milling ,

coordinate system

-56-
 6. INTERPoLATIoN FUNCTIONS ““
6.%MILLWG INTERPOLA~ON

(2) The tool length offset is as shown in (1) so the form will not be compensated properly if the offset amount
differs from the actual amount.
(i) If the tooI length is smaller than the offset amount

Exampkx Tool length X = 20.0 and is actually 15.0

/’(/

,.,,. / hA
“’’”ngcomman” I “+(
ActuaI form
1
.T:o, .moviment
--

(ii) If the tool length is longer than the offset amount

Example Tool length X=20.0 and is actualIy 25.0 ~

, , 1
x

I /’ Milling command““A
Tool movement
I

-57-
 ‘1

‘,

6,INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6.ZMILLING IN7ERPOIL47X?N

(b) T(Yo1nose R compensation

The form can be compensated in tie vector direction of the tool radius amount designated with the G
command (G411- G42) and selected compensation No.

Command format

Command format Function

G40XxYy ; TOO1nose R compensation cancel
G41XxYy ; Tool nose R compensation (left)
G42XxYy ; Tool nose R compensation (right)

1) Specify the tool nose R compensation after the milling mode is entered.
Cancel the tool nose R compensation when entering the lathe cutting mode.
2) Specify the tool command compensation No. before entering the milling mode (before com&m&g G12.1).
If the T command is assigned during the fling mode, a program error will occur.
3) The tool nose R compensation will be executed in the selected plane.
G17 plane ... XY axis
G19 plane
Yz axis
G16 plane }

-58-
 6.I.ERPOIATION FUNCTIONS “
6-ZMILLING LVIERFOLATK7N

(1) Tool nose R compensation cancel mode

Under any of the following conditions, the tool nose R compensation will be canceled.
1) During the G12.1 command
2) After the compensation cancel command (G40) is executed.
In the compensation cancel mode, the compensator vector will be O, and the tool center patch wiIl match
the program patch.
Always end programs that include the tool nose R compensation program with the compensation cancel
state.
(2) Tool nose R compensation start (start up)
When all the following conditions are satisfied in the compensation cancel state, the tool nose R compensation
state will begin.
1) When G41 or G42 is assigned.
2) When the tool nose R compensation No, is O< Ts maximum compensation No.
3) When the movement comrnan d is that other than the circular command.
Regardless of continuous or single block operation, three movement command blocks will be pre-read.
However, if three movement command blocks do not exist, a maximum of five blocks will be pre-read
continuously.
In the compensation mode, and maximum of five blocks will be pre-read and compensation calculated in
the same Method.

I Control status diagram

_; s_ ; GOO_ : G41_ ; GOl_ ; G02_; )

Pre-read buffer

Execution bIock

The type A or type B compensation start operation is used.

Select the type to be used with the control parameter [tool nose compensation type B].
This type is the same as the compensation cancel operation type.
The S in the following diagrams refers to the single block stop point.

-59-
6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
ti Z MILLING INll?RlWIu4T10N

4) Machining an outer wall (acute angle) (Type A or B can be selected by parameter.) [ e <90° ]

linear - I&mar (me Al Linear - Circular (type Al

●
:Center
. of arc
s !
. ..-— —— —.-
To~l nose R center path
Tool nose R center path ;
r i ●

*
Programmed path \’ path
r \
.—. —

\
\

\
Start point

I.iaear - Linear (typeB] - Circular(GTM

Iinear B~

.----— ----- ‘&xter of arc~

,
Tool nose R center path To(I nose R
●
. cent;r path
/ 1 .
*
%?, Programmed path
path
/
\
\

\ \
\
.\
Start point
\

Start point

.-. — .
(3) Tool nose R compensation starting operations
1) Machining an inner wall

Linear+ Cireldar

@ Programmed path El — .—. — -—

r = offset amount
- — ———— —- TOOInose R center path path

Start point Start point i

Center of arc

-60-
 6. INTER.PQLATION
FUNCTIONS ““
6.ZMILLING J?NTERPOLAITON

2) Machining an outer wall (obtuse angle) (Type A or B can be selected by parameter.) [90° = @ < 180”]

Iinear. lirmarml
Ye Al Iinear + Ci.mdar(lype Al

s — .. s
—- ..-
,/ ~ = off~~~
~~o”~t TOO1 nose R centerpath /
,. Tool nose R center path
G41,’ G41z’
\
/ Programmed path \
/ f \
# /
/ \
/ \

Start point start point : i -1

Center of arc Programmed path

Linear- Ciredar CnPe 13~

Point of intersection
Point of intersection s
s ----- .-—
Tool nose R center path
\ Too, =05, R path

/ \
Programmed path \
G 4 1,/
/’ \
/ \
\
i
Startpoint’ Start point
Center of are Programmed path

(4) Operations in compensation mode

Compensation is valid both for positioning and for interpolation commands such as circular and linear
interpolation.
Even if the same compensation command (G41, G42) is assigned in the compensation mode, the command
will be imored.
When 4-or more Mocks not accompanying movement are assigned continuously in the compensation mode,
overcutting or undercutting will result,
1) Machining an outer wall

---- -— —-. .
Tool nose R center path
I r
s
%, * @ Programmed path
\
\ pro~mmed path
\ \
\ \
\
___— -——- \
k
point of in~ersection Tool nose R center path \
‘\

-61-
 ,,,

6.IN’TERWLATI’NFUNCTION..
6.%MILLING INTERPOLATION

\ Linear
- circdau (90%se<18r\

e:
-——. —.-—
Tool nose R center path
/
s
%,

..4
.. \
●.”
.’ s Tool nose R center path .. \
,“ w“
#. Center of arc I
I
d #

/“”
Center of arc
/

cidiir. IA- mke+q :

Center of arc
e
t

Y
Pro~’mmed path ‘%
\“
\\ i$l J“ \
n \
\ : // \
\ \
\’ —-,/ \
Tool nose R center path r ~ / -real nose R center path ~, r
.
MM 0 \
s
Point of intersection Yd ,
SW

i’
almdar + armdar CXPse<ltlflq chd~ - cbda.r (cr<e<mq

I Center of arc
*
Programmed path i’ Programmed path

/]
--- r // *—N%
0“ ‘\ Tool nose R z \
center path “ Nr
\
.“” Point of intersection --. ”
.“’ . ..
8“ * --- +
Center of arc Center of arc Center of arc

-62-
 6.INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6% MILLING INTERPOLAR?..N

2) Machining an inner walI ~

Iinear
- Linear angle)
(obtuse linear
- Linear ande~
(obtuse ‘

Programmed path Programmed path

~ Tool nose R center path
-—. —-. .- ----- --
0 Point of intersection \ TOOInose R center path
0
0
0’
0
H
0

Linear -. Cixutar (obtuse awle~ Linear - C&alar (nbtude an~e~

Programmed path

—
~4 /“k” ~~ 4“”
\
1 \
& -*
Center of arc

Ci.reular- Linear (Obtase antie~ Ch-ahr - Linear(Obtllseangfc~

--.-----. ----a Center of arc

Programmed path

i
E point of .. ...>+ <Too] nose R center path ‘:.5.::? -
Tool nose R center path

Center of arc
/

circular - Circalar (obtuse angfc) CimuIar. Circnlar (acuteandc~

‘oint ‘f ‘ntemection Tool nose P. center path @ Center of arc

#---
M s. - ?
A #
R
/ “1
If
f’
/’
Center of arc 0
Programmed path ~ ‘.
d b
Center of arc Center of arc %- -- TOOI nose R center path

Programmed path
.*
 ,1

6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6.%lkfILL.ING
lNTERPOMITON

3). When the arc end ~oint is not on the arc.

For spiral arc corr&and: area from arc start uoint to end Doi.nt is interooIated as a rmiral arc.
For normal circular command If the differen~e after comp&sation is wi&in the para&eter value, the area
will be interpolated as a spiral arc.

f \
4
~
Imaginarycircle
.—-O TOOI nose R center path
1.
.0”- x. “-- ~
/ Programmed path \.

L J

4) When the inner intersection point does not exist

In a case such as shown below, the intersection point of arcs A and B may cease to exist due to the offset
amount. In such cases, program error “P152” occurs, and the tool stops at the end point of the previous
block.

Program error stop

Tool nose R center path
--—- ——-.
Center of arc A
-——. -.
———- —--

programmed path
A

Line intersecting arcs A, B

(5) Tool nose radius compensation cancel

If the foIlowing condition is satisfied in the tool nose radius compensation mode, the compensation will be
canceled. However, the movement command must be a command that is not a circular command If the
compensation is canceled by a circular command, program error ‘P151” will occur.
1) The G40 command has been executed.
The cancel mode is established once the compensation cancel command has been read, 5-block pre-reading
is suspended and l-block pre-reading is made operational.

-64-
 .

,,’

6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIQNi
6% MILLING INTERPULATJUN

(6) Tool nose radius compensation cancel operation

1) Machining an inner wdl

Yintm - I.inear circular + Linear

@ Programmed @
— path .—. —. —.—

r = offset amount,
path,
— — — — — - Tool nose R center path

~nd point End point .

Cente;of arc

2) Machining an outer wall (obtuse angle) (Type A or B can be selected by parameter.)

Linear -+linear ..mpe Al “ cilar - hear b Al

.s -- —-- ---- s
K -* .
“: Tool nose R center path
/’ r = offsetfimount
/
/
r ‘\
G4 0,~ G40/0 — Tool nose R center patk
.. .. ....-
/ Programmed path
/’
# /

End point End point d

Center of arc Programmed path

Iinear - Linear CJkPe3+ cirdar B~

- linear (-1%-Pe
—.... .—— . .

Point of intersection Point of intemection

s __— — —----
. Tool nose R center path

/“~’ r ~-— Tool nose R center patl

G 4 0;/ Programmed path
,f, +(\ ‘,
f
/

End point 13ndpoint Center of arc Programmed path’

-65-
6.INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6Z MILLING mmouTION

3) Machining an outside wall (acute angle) (Type A or B can be selected by parameter.)

Center of arc
*
*
* I
1
: TooI nos~ R!
TOOInose R center path ; center
r\1’ : ~,. .path.
—--- —4
s .-
path

—.— .—

End point

Linear- Linear (l%PeB~ Ciilar - I.inear

(wpc q

~ Center of arc
-—.—— .--— —- *
i
:
,1 Tool nose R center path I Tool n&e
I
o
R center path
i A“””-”- )
Programmed path
path

%
G 4 0“>

End point’

End point

-66-
 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIUNS
6-Z ikilLL.lNGLNZERPCMMTOIV

(7) Changing the compensation direction during tool nose radius compensation
The compensation direction can be changed by changing the compensation command in the compensation
mode without canceling the compensation fist. However, no change is possible in the compensation start
block and the following block.

Linear - r.imnr
\ .

Whenthere is no intersec-
tion duringthe changeof
G41 G41 G42 the compensationdirection
. . --------

/
,/

\
k

J..,iflear- circular

G41 G42 G41G41 G42

-----
: Y

i
\ Programmed path
\
\
\

Tool nose R center path’

-67-
6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6.ZMILLING ME.U.P.OLATION

Cimular - Circuiar

TooI nose R center path

Center of arc
# \
0
/

Programmed path G 41 G42

G41

m
Center of arc
G41 G41 G42

Linear Ierllxn

G41
Tool nose center paths- ----
---—— ---*--
-----
G42 r
T

(8) GO block
If there k a GO command block, the intersection calculation will not be carried out in the previous block. The
tool comes to a vertical position at the end point, and the Go block will lose the compensation vector
temporarily. In this case, the compensation cancel operation will not be possible, and the tool will go directly
to the point without vectors, or the programmed command point. The compensation vector is created again
in the G1 block.

Y 1

I N1OGI2.1 ;
—- ----- ~ Nll G42 ;
r I NI.2G 1 YMO.F1OO ;
N13 / NI3X-1OO. ;
N 12 / N14G o Y-loo. ;
N14 I N17
-- N15GI XIOO. ;’
r x
N 16 N16 Yo. ;
~
N15 N17G40G o X200. :
I t
L —-- ———- . J

-68-
 6.INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6.%ML!XJNG INTERPOLATK2N

(9) Blocks without movement and pre-read prohibit M command

1
The following blocks are without movement.
a.MO~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mcommand
b. s12; . . . . . . . . . . Scomrnand
c. G04X500”; ” . . . . . . . . . . Dwell No movement
d. G1OPO1R5O; . . . . . . . . Offset amount setting
e. (G17) Z40 ; . . . . . . . . . Movement but not on offset plane
f. G90; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gcode only J
g. G91X0; . . . . . . . . . . . Zero movement amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . Movement amount is zero.
MOO,MO1, M02 and M30 are pre-read prohibit M commands.

1) When assigned at compensation start

When 4 or more blocks without movement folIow in succession or if there is 9 pre-read prohibit M
command, an offset vector is not created.

N1 X30. Y60. ; N2, 3, 4, 5, 6

N2 G41 : 1
N3 G4 X1OOO;
N4 F1OO; FBlock without movement
N5” S500;
N6 M3; #
N7 X20. Y-50. ;
N8 X50. Y -20. ;

2) When assigned in the compensation mode

When four or more blocks without movement follow in succession in the compensation mode and if there
is no pre-read prohibit M command, the intersection point vectors will be created as usual.

f %
N6 G91X1OO. Y200. ; N7 N8
N7 G04X P1OOO; ‘D=
OO”””-**U
Blockwithoutmovement
NfJ X200. ; -———* ——
N6 N8

BIock N7 is assigned;

When 4 or more bIocks without movement follow in succession or if there is a pre-read prohibit M
command, the offset vectors are created perpendicuhwly at the end point of the previous block.

-69-
6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6.Z HILLING I.RPOLATtO.N

N6 X1OO. Y200. : Nll

N7 G4 X1OOO;
-h
N8 F1OO; N6 NH ‘-
N9 S5W; ) Block without movement
N1O lU4 ; .
Nll X1OO. ; >
In this case,a cut results.,

3) When compensation cancel is independent

(i) When the block before G40 is G1 @) When the block before G40 is GO
-— e..
———. — /-
/-

r
/

( /
.(
N20
N1O //
N1OG 1 X_Y_; / NH N20G 1 X_Y_ ;
N11G40 ; N21G o x_Y_ ; {~ N21
Ii /
N12G o x_Y_: NI.2 N~G40 ;
r
N22

Compensation is canceled at the movement Compensation is canceled at the GO in the

command after G40. block before G40.
Note: If G13.1 is assigned after G40 in the program (i) with no movement command, the compensation will
be canceled in the G13.1 block.

(10) Corner movement

When multiple offset vectors are created at the joints between movement corm’nand bIocks, the tool will
move in a straight Iine between those vectors. This action is called corner movement.
When the vect;rs do not coincide, the tool moves to machine the corner although this movement is part and
parcel of the joint block. Consequently, operation in the single block mode will execute the previous block
+ corner movement as a single block and the remtig joining movement + following the block will be
executed as a single block in the following operation.

\ #-
% N2
\
\
\
\
.-- .-.-+
Centerof arc
This movementand feed
rate fallunder block N2,

I
(.
Stop point with single block

-70-
 1, ‘:
‘,
6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6-ZMILLING INTERPOLATION

6.7.11
INTERFEIU3!JCE
CHECK
(1) Outline
A tool, whose nose radius has been compensated under the tool nose R compensation functions by the usual
2-block pre-read, may sometimes cut into the workpiece. This is known as interference, and interference
check is the function that prevents this from occurring.
There are three types of interference check, as indicated below, and each can be selected for use by
parameter.

Function Parameter Oneration

Interference check Interference avoidance A program error results before the execution of
alarm function OFF the block in which the cut arises, and operation
Interference check stops.
invtild OFF
Interference check Interference avoidance The tool patch is changed so that the workpiece is
avoidance function ON not cut into.
Interference check
invalid ON
Interference check Interference check The program continues to cut fiven when cut-in
invflld function invalid ON occurs. Thk is used for fme segment programs.

(Example)

(G41)
N1 GI X50. Y-1OO. ;
N2 X70. Y-1OO. ;
N3 XlXl. YO;

Cu

\ d

1) With alarm function

Thfi alarm occurs before N1 is executed and so, using the buffer correction function, N1 can be changfid
as below and machtig can be continued.
NIG1 X20, Y-40. ;
2) With avoidance function
The intersection point of NI and N3 is calculated and the interference avoidance vectors are created.
3) With interference check invalid function
The tool passes while cutting into the N1 and N3 linear line.

-71-
6. INTERPULATIUJV
FUNCTIONS
6.%MILLING INTERPOLATION

Exanmle of interference check

Victors @, @’ check - No interference
1
Vectors @, @’ check + No interference
1
Vectors o, @’ check + Interference - Vectors o, @’ are deleted.
1
Vectors @); @ are deleted.

With the above process, the vectors o, @, @’, and@ remain as valid vectors, and the path that eormects vectors
~, ~, @, and @’is executed as the interference avoidance path.

(2) Detailed description

Conditions regarded as interference
If there is a movement command in three of the five pre-read blocks, and if the compensation calculation
vector created at the contact point intersects, this will be regarded as interference.

%
TOOI nose R center path
i, / Programmed path
\y/ r
\
N1 N3
Vectors intersect.

~
N2

When interference check cannot be executed.

1) When three movement command blocks caunot be read in
(When there are more than three blocks without movement in the five pre-read blocks.)
2) When interference occurs after the fourth movement command block.

-72-
 ,,
6. I.TER.PiZA.TIOiV
FU~CTIONS
6% MILLING INTERPQLATKJ,

\
( ----- —__ .+~-
-HA
z Tool nose R center path’
. .

“i?--wrro interference check not possible

L
Operation during interference avoidance
The folIowing operation will occur during the interference avoidance function.
Y

vv.
#’
Tool nose R center path,
Programmed path

1~

N3

w
NI

N2 ‘

TooI nose R center path when

interference is avoided
—-—- -—-.
TooI nose R center path without
interference check ,,
--—- —

//////// //
Nl”
/
TooI nose R center path when
// interference is avoided ,
———- __ -.—- ---
Linear movement TooI nose R center path without ~
interference check

Programmed path
////////////////
I
‘- ‘3
J/////////i’~ffff///
N1 I r Centarof arc

-73-
6.INTEWULu4TIOiVFUNCTIONS
6.%MILLING I?VIERPO.LATION

Operation during interference check (cont.)

-—

N2

TooI nose R center path

When all the interference avoidance
line vectors have been deleted, and
new avoidance vector will be created
Programmed path
as shown here, and interference %11
be avoided.
/

TooI nose R center path 2

,- . .. .... N2
//

Tool nose R center path 1

Programmed path

The groove wiIl be left uncut in the following case.

I Interference avoidance path

= -.
I
TOOInow R center path

I /0

Programmed path
Solid line: i
interference avoidance path
Brokenlirw
nath withoutinterferencecheck J

h a case such as shown at the right, 1234

the tooI will move in the reverse
dwection at N2. Program error
‘P153” now occurs before NI
execution.

-74-
 ,,

6. INTERPOLATIONl$U~CTIOiV$
6.ZMILLING llVTERPOLEITION

(3) Interference check alarm

The interference check alarm occurs under the following conditions.
o When the interference check alarm function has been selected.
1). When all the vectors at the end block of its own block have been deleted
When, as shown on the right,
vectors 1 through 4 at the end point
of the N1 block have alI been
deleted, program error “P153”
results before N1 execution.

m When the interference check avoidance function has been selected

2) When there are valid vectors at the end point of the following block even when all the vectors at the and
point of its own block have been deleted
a: When, as shown on the right, the
N2 interference check is
conducted, the N2 end point
vectors are all deleted but the N3
end point vectors are regm-ded as
valid. Program error ‘PI.53H now
occurs at the N1 end point.
Alarm stop

N1

b. In the case such as shown on the

right, the tool will move in the ‘1
reverse duection at N2.
Program error “P153n now occurs
before N1 execution.

-75-
6. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
6.ZMILLING INTERPOLAR’TON

3) When avoidance vectors cannot be

created
Even when, as shown on the right, * Alarm stop
b
the conditions for creating
avoidance vectors are met, it may
still be impossible to create these
vectors or the interference vectors ?41 “
may interfere with N3. As a result,
program error “P153” will occur at
the N1 end point when the vect~r
intersecting angle is more than 90. N2

N3

N1

N2

Angleof Mersectlon

‘\

4) When the program advance direction and the advance diiection after compensation are revarsed
In the following case, interference is still regarded as occurring even when there is actually no interference.
When grooves that are narrower than the tool nose R diameter or that have parallel or widening walls are
programmed

)
I~mgrammcd 1 stop
f
W

-76-
 7.1. RA.PIV TRAVERSE RATE

7. FEED mcTroNs
7.1. RAPID TRAVERSE RATE
The rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis. The available sped ranges are fro-m
1 mm/min to 60,000 mm/min for input setting units of 1P and from 0.1 mm/min to 12,000 mmlmin for input
setting units of O.1#. The upper Iimit is subject to the restrictions imposed by the machine specifications.
Refer to the specifications manual of the machine for the rapid traverse rate settings.
Two paths are available during positionin~ the interpolation type where the area from the start point to the end
point is linearly interpolated or the non-interpolation type where movement proceeds at the maximum speed of
each axis. The type is selected by parameter. The positioning time is the same in each case.

NOTE Rapid traverse override

Override can be applied by an external input signal for both manuaI and automatic rapid
traverse. There are 2 types which are determined by the PLC specifications.
Type 1: Override in 4 steps 1%, 25%, 50% and 100%
Type 2: Override in 1% steps from O% to 100%.

7.2. CUTTING FEED RATE

The cutting feed rate is assigned with address F and 8 digits (F8digit direct designation).
The F8 digits are assigned with a decimal point for a 5-digit integer and a 3-digit fraction. The cutting feed rate
is valid for the GO1, G02, G03 and G33 commands.
&amples (asynchronous fed)

Feed rate
G1 XIOO. ZIOO. F2(ll ; 200.0 mmlmin F200. or F200.000 givm the same rate.
G1 moo. Zloo. 3?123.4 ; 123,4 xnmfmin
G1 XUX1.ZJOO. F56.789 ; S6.789 mm/min

NOTE 1: A program error (W62”) results when there is no F command in the first cutting cmnmand
(GO1, G02, G03, G33) after the power has been switched on.
2: The maximum speed for both rapid traverse and cutting fed is 2362 inchhnin when a mtiric
system machine is used with inch cammands.

-77-
 ill
7.FEED FUNCTIONS
7.3.SIfNCIYRONOIYS/AS K?VCHRONC$lJS FEED (G94,G95)

7.3. SYNCHRONOUS/ASYNCHRONOUS FEED (G94, 695)

(1) Function and objective
Using the G95 command, it is possible to assign the feed amount per rotation with an F code. when this
command is used, the rotary encoder must be attached to the spindle. ...
(2) Command format
G94: Per-minute feed (mrnhin) (asynchronous feed)
G95: Per-revolution feed (mm/rev) (synchronous feed)
The G95 command is a modal command and so it is valid until the G94 command (yer-minute feed) is next
assigned,
1) The F code command range is as follows.
The movement amount per spindle revolution with synchronous feed @r-revolution feed) is assigned
. by the F code, and the command range is as shown in the table below.
Metric input
Input command
unit system
A (0.01 mm) B (0.001 mm) C (o.wni mm)
&nmnand Per-minute ked Per-mvolution Per-minute feed Per-mvoIution Per-minute feed Per-revolution
mode fed fwd feed
Command F (Xnmhnin) F (mm/rev) F (mmlmin) F (mm/rev) F (mm/min) F (mmkv)
addrttss
Minimum com- ll(yxJ ll(=y&l] yyx# l,=yKK# ll(=yK&J ll(y&l)
mand unit . . ,=. .= . =0 .=. .- .
Command 0.01- O.fxu- 0.001- O.fxxn– O.00001- o.alCol–
range @coofJ.GQ 9999.999 600G0.COO 999.9999 12000.m 99.99999
Inch innut
hput command
A (0.001inch) B (0.0001 inch) C (0,00001inch)
unit Wstem
Command Per-minute feed Per-revolution Per-minute feed Per-revolution Per-minute feed Per-revolution
mode feed feed feed
Command F (jnchlmin) F @chfrcv) F @h/rein) F (inch/rev) F @ch/min) E @chlnw)
addreaa
Minimum com- 1 (=0.01> 1 (=o.000ol} 1 (=0.01} 1 (=o.ml) 1 (=0.01) 1 (=oaoWxM)
manclunit {1.= 1.000) (1.= 1.00030) (1.= lJxxlO) (I. = km) (1.= 1.02030) (1.
= lJMKJCW)
Command 0.001– O.ml – O.0001– ‘ O.ml - O.ml - O.oowan -
range 23622047 999.99999 23622047 99.999999 472.44094 9.9999999

2) The effective sptxd (actwd movement speed of machine) under per-revolution feed conditions is given
in the following formula (Formula 1).
FC~~e:~ x OVR .... (Formula 1)
= Effective rate (mm/min, inch/rein)
F = Cmmmndcd feed rate (mm/rev, inch/rev)
N = Spindle speed (rPm)
OVR = Cutting fed override
When a multiple numbei of axes have been commanded at the same tim~ the effective rate FC in
formula 1 applies in the vector direction of the command.

NOTE 1; The effective rate (mm/min or inchhu.in), which is produced by converting the commanded
speed, the spindle speed and the cutting feed override into the per-minute speed, appears as
the FC on the monitor 1. page of the setting and display unit.
2 When the above effective rate exceeds the cutting feed clamp rat% it is clamped at that clamp
rate.
3: If the spindle speed is zero when synchronous feed is executed, operation alarm “105”
remdts.
4: During machine lock high-sped processing, the rate will be 60$(100mrdmin (or 2,362
inchlmin, (3),000 deg/min) regardless of the commanded speed and spindle speed. When
high-speed processing is not undertaken, the rate will be the same as for non-machine lock
conditions.
5: Under dry run conditions, asynchronous speed applies and movement results at th~
externally set rate (mm/min or inch/rein).
6: Whether asynchronous feed (G94) or synchronous feed (G95) is to ba established whm the
power is switched on or when M02 or M30 is executed can be selected by means of the
“initial synchronous feed” setting on the parameter 2. screen.

?,2
-78-
 7.FEED FUNCTION%
7.4.FEED RATE DESIGNATION A_MD EFFECTS O-N CONTROL AXES

7.4. FEED RATE DESIGNATION AND EFFECTS ON CONTROL AXES

Ithas already been mentioned that a machine has a number of control axes. These control axes cm bfi divided into
linear axes which control linear movement and rotary axes which control rotaq movement. The feed rate is
designed to assign the displacmnent speed of these ax= and the effect exerted on the tool movement speed which
poses problems during cutting differs according to when controi is exercised over the linear axes or when it is
mercised over the rotary axes.
The displacement amount for each axis is assigmxl separately for each axis by a value corresponding to the
respective axis. The feed rate is not assigned for each axis but assigned as a singIe value. Thereforq when two or
more axes are to be controlled simultaneously, it is necessary to understand how this will work for each of the axes
involved.
The assignment of the feed rate is described with the following related items.
(1) When controlling lin&r axes
Even when only one machine axis is to be controlled or there are two or more axes to be eontrolkd
simultaneously, the feed rate which is assigned by the F code functions as a linear speed in the tool advance
direction.
@ample) When the feed rate is designated as “f” and linear axes (X and Z) are to be controlled

t
P *@MI end point)
x ,- --——- —

Speed in this direction is “f”.

-z
P , (rOolstart z
point)

When only linear axes are to be controkl, it is sufficient to designate the cutting feed in the program. The feed
rate for each axis is such that the dedgnated rate is broken down into the components corresponding to the
movement amounts.
In the above examphx

Feed rate for X axis = f x

&

Feed rate for Z axis = f x

&

(2) When controlling rotary axes

When rotary axes are to be controlled, the designated feed rate functions as the rotary sped of the rotary
axes or, in other words, as an angular sped.
Consequently, the cutting feed in the tool advance direction, or in other words the linear speed, varies
according to the distance between the center of rotation and the tool. This distance must be borne in mind
when designating the feed rate in the program.
 ,,

7.FEED FUNCTIONS
7.4.J?03E..
RAZE DESIGNATION AND EFFECTS ION CO.KERO.. AXES

@tample) When the feed rate is designated as “f” and rotary axis (C)is to be controlled
(“f” units = o/rein)

. ..
P* (tooI end point)
Angular speed is “f”.
/
A
/
/
0 \ Linear sped is: T” r “ f/180 “
Rotation ,V
~Zj 1 c
center
‘:a “ ‘too’ statip”int)

In this casq in order to make the cutting feed @near feed) in the tool advance direction “fc”:

fc=fx ,+.

Themforq the feed rate to be designated in the program must be

180
f=fcx
w-r

NOTE When the circular interpolation function is used and the tool is moved along the cireumfereme
of an arc by the linear control axis, the rate in the tool advance directicm, or in other words the
tangential direction, will be the feed rate designated in the program.

P*

‘m”””is’’” x i x

. ...
-80-
 7. FEED FUNCTIONS
7.4..FEYZDRATE .DE.S1’.ATION AND .EFF-ECTSON CYYNTRQL AXES

@ample) When the fed rate is designated as “t” and the linear axes (X and Z) are to be controlled using the
circular interpolation function
In this cas~ the feed rate of the X and Z axes will change along with the tool movement. However,
the combined speed will always be maintained at the constant value “f”.
. ..
(3) When linear and rotary axm are to be controlhxl at the same time
The NC svstem Droceeds in cxactlv the same wav whether linear or rotary axes are to be eontrolkd.
When a r&ry &is is to be contr~llcd, the num&ical value assigned by the coordinate word (C, H) is the
angle and the numeric-al values assigned by the fed rate (J?) are all handled as linear speeds. In other words,
10 of the rotary axis is treated as being equivalent to 1 mm of the linear axis.
Consequently, when both linear and rotary axes are to be controlled simultaneously, the components for
each axis of the numerieal values assigned by F will be the same as for sedion (1) above (applying when linear
axes are to be controlled). However, although in this case both the size and direetion of the speed
components based on linear axis control do not vary, the direetion of the sped components based on rotary
axis control will change along with the tool movement (their size will not change). This means, as a result,
that the combined tool advance direction feed rate will vary along with the tool movement.”
@ample) When the fed rate is designated as “f” and linear (X) and rotary (C) axes are to be controlled
simultaneously
If the X-axis incremental command value is “x” and the C-axis incremental command value is “c”:

Size and direction are fixed for k.

f c%--:,
..
Size is fried for fc but direction varies.

//
Arc,‘“T-7$ ai
Both size and direction vary for ft.

/r )’
/’
7.FEED FUNCTIONS
7.4.FE.D RAZE D.ESIGNATYON AND .EFFEC?%SON COIV%ROL AXES

X-axis feed rate (linear speed) ‘%” and C-axis fed rate (angular speed) “d’ are expressed as:

x .... (2)
fx=fx — .... (1) u =fxc
W -
. ..
Linear sped “fc” based on C-axis eontroI is expressed ax

Trx r
fc=wx .... (3)
180

If the smxd in the tool advance direetion at start ooint P, is “ft” and the eomwonent SJXXXIS
in the X-axis and ‘
Y-axis &eetioris are “ftx” and Wty,” reapeetively;then t&seem be expressed & “
ftx = -rsin ( Ad)x --&Ax .... (4)
I&l

fty = -rcos (~ 29) x .-&.-W .... (5)

180
Where r is the clistanee between center of rotation and tool (in mm units), and
$ is the angle betwwm the PI point and the X axis at the center of rotation (in units Q).
The combined speed “ft” according to formulae (1), (2), (3), (4) and (5) ix

ft={ ftxg+fty ’

Consequently, feed rate “f” designated by the program must be as follow~

x* 4-C*
f=ftx . . .. G’)
~.~e~

X2 -xoc.~sifl( ~e) ~ { )2
180 180

“ft” in formula (6) is the speed at the l?l point and thevzdue of @changes as the C axis rotatm, which means that
the value of “ft” will also change. Consequently, in order to keap the cutting fed “ft” as constant as possibl% th~
angle of rotation which is designated in one block must be redueed to as low as posdde and the extent of the
change in the@ value must be minimized.
 7.5. THREAD CUTTING IJMDS

7.5. THREAD CUTTING LEADS

F7-digit or E&digit commands for thread leads can be issued for the thread cutting mode (G33, G34, G76, G78
eomnmnds).
The thread lead command range is 0.00U1 to 999.9999 mmirev (F7 digits) or 0.0001 to 999.99999 &rev (E3
digits) (with input unit af microns).
Thread cutting metric input
Input unit B (0.001mm) C (0.0001mm)
system A (0.01mm)
Command F E E F E F E E
addres @lnlh@ (mm/rev) (ridges/inch) (mruhwv) (mm/rev) ~dge#inch) (mm/rev) (mm/rev) (ridgesfinch]
Minimum 1 1
command (=0.001) ;= O.MIQ1> ;1!: %) (=0.COO1> ~=os!oool> ;I:%o) &ol> :i&Ool> ;I%?m)
unit (1.= 1.000) (1.= 1.0000) (l,= UloOo) (l.= (1.= .=
1.00WJO) I.m) l.m)
Command 0.001- O.WM- 0.1- 0.0001- 0.0031- 0.01- 0.WO.21– o.m~ - 0.001-
range 9999.9$9 9999.9999 9999999.9 999.9999 999.99999 m.w 99.99999 99.999999 99999.999

Thread cutting inch input

Input unit
Svstcm
. I
A (~.~1 illCh)
I S3
(0.COO1
inch]
I C (0.00C01inch)
I
Command F E E F E E F E H {
addrw+s (imchhw) Qnchlrev) (ridgeMnch) @ch/rev) (mchhev) (ridgeMnch) (hlchhv) (lnchhwf) (ridgt+hch)
Minimum 1 1 (ml}
command [; 0.03001} ~i&om> ;1:: :???) ~i$kolh ~ikl) /l%koo) ;LL1> MaooOl) (1. =
unit .= .= .= ~.m)
l.m) 1.(KM020) l.&) LOOoooGQ) l.oboQo) h%ooo03)
Cbmmnd O.00001- o.ml - 0.001– o.ml – MKXxKxu–O.OCK)l
- wxlOOUl- oaoGQoim-O.ooi)ol-
range 999.99999 %W99999 99999.999 99.999999 9.9999999 9999.9999 9.9999W 0.99999999 999.99999

7.6. AUTOMATIC. ACCEL13RATION/IX3CELERATION

The rapid traverse and manual feed acceleraticddeceleration pattern is linear acceleration and linear decalexation.
Time constant T’~ em be set independently for each axis using parameters in 1 rnsee sttps from 1 to 50fl msec.
The cutting fed (not manual feed) aeeeleratiorddeceleration pattern is exponential acceleration/deceleration. Time
mmstant Tc can beset independently for each axis using parameters in 1 rnsee steps aem.ss a range from 1 to 500
resee. @Jorrnally, the same time constant is set for all axes.)

f With eontiriuous
t commands

t
-
TC Tc

Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration Cutting feed acceleratiorddeeelemtion

pattern pattern
@R = Rapid traverse time cxmstant) w. = Cutting feed time txmstant)
@d = Deceleration check time)
7. FEED FUNCTIONS
7.z SPEED CLAMP

With rapid traverse and manual feed, the following block is executed after the command pulse of tha present block
has become “O” and the tracking error of the acceleration/deceleration circuit has become “0.” However, with
cutting feed, the following block is executed as soon as the command pulse of the present block becomes “O”
although an external signal (error detect) can detect that the tracking error of the acceleration/deceleration circuit
has reached “0” and the folIowing block can be tmscuted. When the in-position check has been made valid
(selected by machine parameter) during the deceleration check, it is first confirmed that the tracking error of the
acceleration/deceleration circuit has reached “0/’ then it is checked that the position deviation is less than the
parameter setting, and finally the following block is executed. It depends on the machine as to whether the error
detect function can be activated by a switch or M function and so reference should be made to the instructions
issued by the machine builder.

7.7. SPEED CLAMP

This function exercises contd over the actual cutting feed rate in which override has been applied to the cutting
feed rate command so that the speed clamp value which has been preset independently for each axis is not
mceeded.

NOTE Speed clamping is not applied to asynchronous feed and thread cutting.

7.8. EXACT STOP CHECK (G09)

[1), Function and objective
In order for roundness to be prevented during corner cutting and for machine shock to be alleviated when
the tool feed rate changes suddenly, there are times when it is desirable to start the commands in the
following block once the in-position state after the machine has decelerated and stopped or the elapsing of
the deceleration check time has been checked. The exact stop check function is designed to accomplish this
purpose.
The “inpos” machine parameter among the basic specifications parameters enables cmtrol to be exercised
either by the deceleration check time or in-position state. The in-position state is valid when “inpos” is set
to 1.
‘I’he in-position width is set into parameter “ZRZ” on the semo parameter screen by the machine builder,
(2) Command format
G09 GO1 (G02, G03) ;
The exact stop check command G09 has an eff~t only with the cutting command (GO1 – G03) in its
particular block.
(3) Fxamule of nronram
‘ ‘ NOO1“G09 GO1 “ X1OO.OOOI?150 ; ....... The commands in the following block are started once the
deceleration check time or in-positicm state has been checkcxl
after the machine has decderated and stopped.
IWK12 Zloo.000 ;

Solid Iine indicates speed pattern with G09 command.

Broken line indicatts speed pattern without G09 cmmmand.

Fig. 1 Exact stop check result

-84-
 FEEb FUNCTIONS
7.
7.8..EX4CT STOP CHECK (G09)

(4) Detailed operation

1) With continuous cutting fed

. ..

Next block
Previous block

I -J
Ts

Fig. 2 Continuous cutting fed command

I

2) With cutting feed in-position check

Previous block Next block

~ Lc (in-position width]

Ts Ts
b“- 4
Fig. 3 Block join with cutting feed in-position check

In Fire. 2 and 3:
Ts =“Cutting feed aceeleratiorddeeeleration time constant
Lc = In-position width
As shown in Fig. 3, the in-position width “k” can be set into the “ZICZ’ servo parameter as the remaining
distance (shaded area in Fig. 3) of the previous block when the next block is started.
The setting unit for the “ZRZ” servo parameter is 0.001 mm or 0.0001 inch.
The in-position width is designed to reduce the roundness at the workpiece comms to below the constant value.

Lc
L Next block
Previous block

To eliminate corner roundnm, set the “ZRZ” servo parameter to zero and perform an in-position check or assign
the dwell command (G04) between blocks.

.
,,.
-85-
7.FEED FUNCTIONS
7.8.EXACT STOP CHECK <W9]

3) With deceleration check

(a) With linear acceleration/deceleration
r
...

Previous block

TX Acceleration/deceleratiori time
Ts con5tant
Td: Deceleration check time -
. Td Td = Ts -t- (O – 14ms)

(b) With expcmeutiaI aec.deration/deceleration

Previous block

Tw Acc&xation/dec.eIeration time
Ts constant
Td: Dei.xkation check time
Td . Td = 2XTS + (0–14ms)

(c) With exponential acc&ration/linear deceleration

Previous block

. 2XTS

Td Ts .
TX Acceleratiorddectderation time constant
Td: Deceleration check time
Td =2x Ts+(0–14ms)

The timti required for the deceleration check during cutting feed is the longest among the cutting feed dmelmatitm
check times of each axis determined by the cutting feml acceleratiorddmeleration time constants and by the cutting
feed accelerationldeceIeration mode of the mw ‘mmmanded simultaneously.

INOTE 1: To execute exact stop check in a canned cycle cutting block, insert command G09 into thti
canned cycIe subprogram.

-86-
 8.1. PER-SECOND DWELL {G94/W4J
\ .—z

8. DWELL
The G04 command can delay the start of the next block.
..
8.1. PER-SECOND DWELL (G94JG04)
(1) Function and objective
Whea the dwell command is given in the per-minute feed mode (G94), the execution of the next block is
delayed for the designated time.
(2) Command format
G94 G04 X/U_ ; Or G94 G04 P- ;
Command unit: 0.001 see
Decimal point commands are invalid for address P and if such commands are assigned, everything following
the decimal point will be ignored.
(3) Detailed description
1) The table below lists the dwell time.

I Input setting unit I Command range based on address ! Command range based on address

0.01/0.001 mm 0.001 – 99999.999 (see) II – 99999999 (WC)(Ximl See)

0.0001 inch 0.001 – 99999.999 (See) II — 99999999 (see) (Xo.ml see)

2) When a cutting command is in the previous block, the dwell command starts calculating the dwell time
after the machine has decelerated an! stopped. When it is commanded in the same block as an M, S,
T or B command, the calculation starts simultaneously.
3) Dwell is valid even for machine lock but it can be completed immediately by the control parameter
(“machin@ lock high spwd”).
4) The per-second dwell can be established regardless of the G94 or G95 mode by means of the control
parameter (“G04 time fbmd”).

Previous block
cutting cmarnand ~
I
i Next block
I
I
Dwtdl command
J
I 4 *
I DwelI time

(4) I%mmpkx of prowams

1) ~en i;pu~ setting unit is 0.01 mm, O.MMmm or 0.0001 inch
@&ample 1) G04 X 5(XI; .....0.5 sec. dwell time
(Example 2) G04 X 5000 ; .....5 sec. dwell time
@ample 3) G04 X 5. ; .....5 sec. dwell time
@ample 4] G04 P 5000 ; .....5 sec. dwell time
(Examnle 5) G04 P 12.345 ; .....0.012 sec. dwell time
2) When ~he time designation has been inserted prior to G04 with an input setting unit of 0.0001 inch:
@nnple 6) X5. G04 ; ..... 50 sec. dwell time (this is equivalent to X50000G04)

-87-
8. D WELL
&2. P.ER-REVOLIYTIQN D WELL lG95/W4J

8.2. PER-REVOLUTION DWELL (G95JG04)

(1) Function and objective
When the G04 command is issued in the per-r~olution feed mode (G95), the spindle first rotates by a rate
equivalent to the designated speed and then the next block is executed. ....
(2) Command format
G95 G04 X/U. ; or G95 G04 P. ;
Command unit: 0.001 rev
De&nal point commands are imvdid for address P and if such commands are assigned, everything following
the decimal point will be ignored.
(3) Detailed deaerintion
1) The table”b~ow lists the dwell speeds.

Input setting unit Command range’based on address Command range based on address
Ku P
0.01/0.001 mm 0.001 – 99999.999 (rm) 1 – 99999999 (x 0.001 rev)
0.0001 inch 0.001 – 99999.999 (rev) 1 – 99999999 (x 0.001 rev)

2) When a cutting command is in the previous block, the dwell command starts controlling the dwell time
after the machine has completed its deceleration. If it is commanded in the same block as an M, S, T
or B command, the control is started simultanemsly,
3) DwelI is valid even for machine lock but it can be completed immediately by the control parameter
~machine lock high speed”).
4) Dwell also stops during spindle stop. It is resumed when the spindle starts to rotate again.
5) The per-second dwell can be fixed by means of the control parameter (“G04 time fixed”).
6) This function cannot be used unless a position detection eneoder has been mounted cm the spindle.

Previous block ~
cutting command I
I Next block
!
t
i
DW& command
I
i
I e
f Dwell 7
rotational
angle

, ,.
-88-’
 !l,
,,,

MISCELLANEOUS FUNcfIQN$
9. “
9.L MISCELLAN.EO?YS FUNCTIONS {M2-LLK?lTsBCD)

9. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
. ..

9.1. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS (M2-DIGITS BCD)

The miscellaneous (M) functions are also known as auxillary functions, and they include such numerically
controlled machine functions as spindle fomvard and reverse rotation, operation sto~ and coolant ON/OFF.
These functions are cimignated by a 2digit number following the address M with this particular NC system, and
only one group can be commanded in a single block.
@mmpIe) GOOXxl Mml ;
When two or more commands are issued, only the last one will be valid.
The six commands of MOO,MO1, M02, M30, M98 and M99 are used as auxiliary commands for sptiific objectives
and so they cannot be used as general auxiliary commands. This therefore leaves 94 miscellantxms functions which
are usable as such commands. Reference should be made to the instructions issued by the machine builder for the
actual correspondence between the functions and numerical values.
When the MOO, MO1, M02 and M30 functions are used, the next block is not read into the pre-read buffer due
to prtwwad inhibiting.
AXIM function can be specifkd together with other commands in the same block, and wheri such a functicm is
specified together with a movement command in the same block, there are two posisl%lesequences in which the
commands are executed:
(a) The M function is executed after the movement comrh~nd.
(b) The M function is executed at the same time as the movement command.
Which of these sequences actually applies depends on the machine specifications.
Processing and completion sequencas are required in each case for all M commands except M98 and M99. “
The 6 M functions used for specific purposes will now be descriied.
(1) Program stop MOO
When the tape reader has read this tinction, it stops reading the next block. As far as the NC system’s
functions are concerned, only the tape reading is stopped. Whether such machine functions as the
spindle rotation and coolant supply are stopped or not differs according to the machine in question.
Restart is enabled by pressing the automatic start button on the machine operation board,
Whether resetting can be initiated by Mm depends on the machine specifications,
(2) OptiorIal stop MM
If the tape reader reads the MO1 command when the optional stop switch on the machirm opeiation
board is ON, it will stop and the same effect as with the MOOfunction will appIy.
If the optional stop switch is OFF, the MO1 command is ignored.
@ample)

r Optional stop switch status and operation

N1O GOOX1OOO; Stops at Nll when switch is ON
Nll MO1 ; Next command (N12) is executed without
stopping at NH when switch is OFF
N12 GO1 X2MfJ 23000 F600 ;
$

-89-
9.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
9.2.MN$CELJL4_NE0U” FUNCTIONS {M8-DIGITS)

(3) l%ogram end: M02 or M30

This eornmand is normally used in the final block for completing the machining, and so it is primarily used
for tape rewinding. Whether the tape is actualIy rewound or not depends on the machine specifications.
Depending on the machine specifications, the NC system is rcsel by the M02 or IWO command upon
completion of tape rewinding and any other commands issued in the same block. . ..
(Although the contents of the command position display counter are not cleared by this reset action, the
modal eomraands and compensation amounts are eaneelhxl,)
T.heNC system stops when the rewinding operation is eompkted (the in-automatic operation lamp goes off).
TO restart the unit, the automatic start button must be pressed or similar steps must be taken.

NOTE 1: Independent signals are also output rcapeetively for the MOO, MOI, M02 and M30
commands and these outputs are each resel by pressing the reset kq.
2 M02 or M30 ean be assigned by manual data input (MDI). At this timq eoxnmancis em be
issued simultaneously with other commands just as with the tape.
(4) Subprogram eallkompletion: M98, M99
These commands are used as the Teturn instructions from branch destination subprograms and branches to
subprograms.
M98 and M99 are processed inside the NC system and so M code signals and strobe signals are not output.
(5) NC internal processing with MOO/MOl/M02/M30 commands.
NC internal processing suspends pre-reading when the MOO, MO1, M02 or M30 command has been read.
Other tape rewinding operations and the initialization of medals by resetting differ according the machine
builder.

9.2.
These functions are assignwl with an 8digit (O– 99999999) number following the address M, and up to 4 groups
can be assigned in one block. However, the number of commands which em be assigned in one block depends on
the machine specifications.
@ample) GOOXi Mml Mmz Mm, Mm, ;
When five or more groups have been assigned in a block, the last four will be valid.
Parameters are used to sekxt whether BCD output or binary output is to apply for the M8-digit
commands.
The output si~ak are 8digit BCD code and start signgals or 32-bit binary data with sign and start
signals.
As with the M2-digit functions, the MOO,MO1, M02, M30, M98 and M99 cocks are rmerved for special
applications. Processing and completion sequenees are required for all M eomraands except for M98
and M99.
 ,,
II,,,
9. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS’
9.3.SECONDARY MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS {A$l/B8/C8-
.DIGITSJ

9.3. SECONDARY MIS CELLANEOIJS FUNCTIONS (A8/J38/C8- DIGlIR3)

These serve to assign the indexing table positioning and other such functions. In this particular MELDAS NC
system, they are assigned by an 8-digit number from O to 99999999 following address A B or C. The machine
specifications determine which codes correspond to which positions. . ..
The output siguals are command value BCD signals and start signals.
Tlm & B and C functions ean be assigned simultaneously with any other commands but when they are in the same
block as movement commands, there are 2 sequences in which the commands are executed, as below.
a. The& II or C function is txecuted after the movement command.
b. The ~ H or C function is exeeuttxl shmdtaneously with the movement command.
The machine specifications determine which sequence applies.
Processing and completion sequences are required for all secondary miscellaneous functions.
The table below gives the various address combinations. It is not possl%le to use an addrem which is the same for
the imis name of an additional axis and secondary miscellaneous function.

~ Additional axis name A B c

Secondary miscellaneous function —
A x Cl o
B o x o
c o 0 x

NOTE When A has been assigned as the secondary miscellaneous function address, the following
commands cannot be used.
1) Linear tuq$e commands
2) Geometric commands

,,
10.SPINDLE FUNCTIONS
10.1.SPINDLE FUNCTIONS (S2-DIGITS.BCD)

10. SPINDLE FUNCIXONS

10.1. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS (S2-DIGITS BCD)
The spindle functions are also known simply as S functions and they assign the spindle speed. ~n this particuhir
MELDAS NC system, they are assigned with a 2- digit number following the address S ranging from Oto 99, and
100 commands can be sp=”fied. In actual fact, however, it depends on the machine specifications as to how many
of these 100 functions are used and which numbers correspond to which functions, and thus reference should be
made to the instmctions issued by the machine builder. When a number exceeding 2 digits is assigned, tha last 2
digits will be valid.
The S functions can be assigned simultaneously with any other commands but when they are in the same block
as movement commands, there are 2 sequences in which the commands are ewcnted, as below:
a. The S function is executed after the movement command.
b. The S function is executed simultaneously with the movement command.
The machine spedications determine which sequence applies.
Processing and completion sequenees are required for ali S commands from S00 through S99.

10.2. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS (S5-DIGITS ANALOG)

When the S5digit functions are added, these functions can. be assigned from SO through S99999, and the other
functions are based on the S2digit codes.
S command bina~ outputs must be selected at this time,
By assigning a 5digit number following the S codq these functions enable the appropriate gear signals, voltagm
corresponding to the eammanded spindle speed (rpm) and start signals to be output.
Procdng and completion seqmmees are required for all S commands.
The analog signal specifkations are given below.
(1) Output voltage .... 0 to IOV or -SV to + 8V
(2) Resolution .... 1/4095 (2 to the power of -12)
(3) Load conditions .... 10k ohms
(4) Output impedance .,..220 ohms
If the parameters for up to 4 gear stages are set in advaneq the gear stage corresponding to the S command will
be selected by the NC system and the gear signal will be output. The analog voltage is calculated in accordance
with the input gear signal,
(1) Parameters ccuxesponding to indtiidual gears .... Limit speed, maximum speed, gear shift speed and
maximum speed during tapping
(2) Parameters corresponding to all gears .... Orient spwxl, minimum speed

10.3. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS (S8-DIGITS)

These functions are assigned with an 8digit @ – 99999999) number following the address S, and cme group can
be assigned in one block. The output for S8-digit functions can be either 13CD or binary, and this can be selectwl
by parameter.
The output signals are 8-digit BCD code and start signals or 32-bit binary data with sign and start signals.
Processing and completion sequences are required for all S commands.

-92”’-
 10.SPINDLE FUNCTIONS
10.4.CONST~T PERIPHERAL SPEED CONTROL {G96,G97)

10.4. CONSTANT PERIPHERAL SPEED CONTROL (G96, G97)

These commands automatically control the spindle speed in line with the changes in the coordinate values as
cutting proceeds in the diametrical direction, and they serve to keq the cutting point speed constant during the
cutting. . ..
G96SS ; Constant peripheral speed ON
k Assignment of constant peripheral speed control axis
L Peripheral speed
G97 ; Constant peripherid speed cancel
Detailed description
1) The constant peripheral speed control axis is set by parameter (basic 4’G96 ax” machine parameter)
O Fixed at Ist axis (P cmmnand invalid)
1: 1st axis
2 2nd axis
3 3rd axis
2) When the abovementioned parameter is not zero, the constant peripheral sped control axis can be
assigned by address P.
Examplti With G96 ax (1)
Program Constant peripheral speed control axis
G96 S1OO; ~ 1st axis
G96 S1OOI?3 ; + 3rd axis
3) ~ample of selection program and operation .

G90G96G01X50. Z1OO.S200 ; The spindle speed is controlled so that the

$ peripheral speed is 200 mhn.in.
G97G01X50. Z1OO.3?300. S500 ; The spindle speed is contTolkd to 500 rpm.
5
J1
M02 ; The modal returns to the initial setting.

NOTE The initial value of the modal can be selected by parameter.

10.5. SPINDLE CLAMP SPEED SETTING (G92)

The maximum clamp speed of the spindle can be assigned by address S following G92 and the minimum’ clamp
speed by addrtxs Q.
G92SS ;

+!5 Maximum clamp speed

Minimum clamp speed
TO accommodate gear selection between the spindle and spindle motor, parameters can be used to set the
rotational sped range up to 4 stages in 1 rpm units.
The lowest upper limit and highest lower limit are valid among the rotational speed ranges based on the
parameters and based on G92 Ss Qq ;.
Note: This function is valid ordy during the constant peripheral speed control.

-93-
10.SPINDLEFUNCTIONS
10.6.
SPIIJDLE
FUNCIYON (MULTJ-SPI.LM

10.6 SPINDLE FUNCTION (MULTI-SPINDLE)

10.6.1 OUTLINE
IrI addition to the spindle (lst spindle), the multi-spindle function can be used.
The S command is used to designate the spindle speed, but the SO = xxxxx command is used for assigning the multi-
spindles. The S command can be assigned from any of the machiig program systems.
With the 2nd spindIe control function, cutting in synchronization with the 2nd spindle is possible.

3rd spindIe ~
(Rotary tooI 1)
c~~l
Tool rest

b-
2nd spindle

E
Spindle L

-—. —.—- —.—- —- —-—. —-—- —-—.

3 3- -

r-fl
Tool rest 2

+/ u
(Rota~ tool 2)
4th spindle
 10.SPINDLEFUNCTIONS
10.6.
SPINDLEFUNCTION (MULTLSPINDLE)

10.6.2 MULTI-SPINDLE COMMAND

A command that is classiiled from each main s~indle
. can be assizned with the SO=***** command i.n addition
to the S*****command.
(1) Command format
The command format is shown below.

SO=***** S 5-digit analog

SO= *** *** **S 8-digit bmary/BCD

o : One numeral (1 -9)

*...*: Speed or cycle speed command

(2) Detailed description

1) The commands for each spindle are classified with the details in O. 0 is selected with a numeral from 1
to 9 in the parameter (sname) setting.

ExamdelL,

Parameter
sname 1 2“ 3 4

G9T
S1 = 3500 ; 1st spindle 3500rpm command
S2 = 1500 ; 2nd spindle 1500rpm command
S3 = 2000 ; 3rd spindle 2000rpm command
S4 = 2500 ; 4th spindle 2500rpm command

2) Commands for multiple spindles can be assigned simultaneoudy in 1 block.

3) When there are more than two commands for the same spindle in 1 block, the last command will be valid.
Ex. S1 =3500 S1 =3600 S1 =3700; S1 =3700 will be valid.
4) The S***** command and SO***** command can be used together.
The S** *** command will be for the 1st spindle. When the 2nd spindle command turns ON (G44), thk
wilI change to a 2nd spindle command. The S***** command cannot be assigned for the 3rd or 4th
spindle. Use the SO= * * * * * command.
5) The command for each spindle can be assigned from any system program, and the details of the last S
command wilI rotate each spindle. (Refer to Fig. on next page.)
At the same time, if the S command is assigned in multiple systems, the S command in the system with the
larger system No, will be valid.
10.SPIN”LEFUNCTIONS
10.6.
SPINDLEFU.CTI’N (MULTPSPIADLE)

The constant peripheral speed control is valid on.Iywith the Ist or 2nd spindle. The speed k constantly
set for the 3rd and 4th sphdle commands. -

=Peripheral speed Constant peripheral speed control

Spindle \ Durin~~3 I DuriI%G44
I 1st I Possible I Not ~ossible ~ G43: 2nd spindle control OFF
I 2nd I Not nossible I Possible I G4-4 2nd spindle control ON

I 3rd ) Not possible I Not possible I

4th Not possible Not possible

System 1 program ~ System 2 program System 3 program System4 program System 5 program
$“3

Fig. Spindle command and system program

 20.SPINDLEFUNCTIONS “‘
10.6.
SPINDLEFUNCTKW (MULTI-SPINDLE)

10.6.3 2ND SPIIWXE CONTROL FUNCTION

(1) Function and purpose
This function controls the 1st and 2nd spindle and determines which spindle rotation to cut in synchronization
with.
This function is necessary when switching the workpiece from the No.1 spindle to the 2nd spindle and
machining the back side, or when cutting two workplaces with two spindles and two tool rests.

Rx=l

G43
/ 2nd spindle

‘>
\
1st spindle Work- Work-
(main spindle) (Sub spindle),
piece 1 piece 2
E

Tool rest 2 ,
0
h

(2) Command format

G43: 2nd spindle control OFF (No.1 spindle control)

GM 2nd spindle control ON

(3) Detailed description

1) G43 and G44 are modal G codes.
2) Select whether G43 or G44 is to be the initial code when the power is turned ON or reset using the
parameter (SseIect). Each system has a parameter.
3) When G43 and G44 are assigned in the same block as a S command, the spindle to which the S command
is applied wiIl depend on the order of the G43, G44 and S conunand.
If the S command is frost, the spindle will depend on the previous G43 and G44 modes.
If the S command is later, the spindle will depend on the G43 and G44 modes in the same block.

-97-
10,SPINDLEFUNCTIONS
10.6.
SPINDLEFUNCITQN (MULTI-SPINDLE)

4) The G43 and G44 commaud can be assigned from any system.
5) The control function switched after the G43 and G44 command is as follows.
@Per-rotation feed (synchronous feed)
The feed rate command in the G95 mode, will be the feed per rotation of the No.1 spindle in the G43
mode, and the 2nd spindle in the G44 mode.
@S command (S*****, SO = ** * **), constant peripheral speed con~ol

l?unction G43 mode (344 mode

S commmd in G97/G96 Command control Command COlltrOI
Constant peripheral speed control for 1st spindle for 2nd spindle
Upper/iower limit speed command in constant
peripheral speed control
(G92 S_Q_)

Note: The command for the 2nd spindle in the G43 mode, or the command for the 1st spindle in the
G44 mode can be assigned with the SO = ***** command. However, this will be a speed setting
in the G96 mode.

,,,

-98-
 10.SPINDLEFUNCTIONS ‘“‘
10.6.
SPINDLEPUl?CTION(MULTI-SP~LE)

Example 1 S1: Spindle S2: 2nd spindle

Speed
G43 : 1st spimle 2nd spindle

G97 S 1000 (OrG97SI =1 Ooo.) +

SIOOOr pm Orpm

s 2 =2000;

S2000rpm
I

G96S1OO;
S 100m/m i n
I

S2500rprn

. .. .. .. .. .. .. -----------

G44S200;
Note 1 S200m/m 1 n

s 1 =3000;
S3iWlr~m
/“

G97S4000 ; .,

S4000rpxn
I

Notw In the G44 command, the constant peripheral speed controI will switch to the 2nd spindle, so the 1st spindle
will remain the speed set in G44S200. The speed wi.11change to 3000rpm with S1 = 3000;.

-99-
11. TOOL FUNCTIONS
11.1.TOOL FUNCTIONS (T4-DIGITS)

11. TOOL FUNCTIONS

11.1. TOOL FUNCTIONS (T4-DIGITS)
The tool functions are ako known simply as T functions and they assign the tool numbers and tool offset numbers.
They are assigned with a 3- or 4-digit number following the address T, and the first two digits designate the tcm]
number, One group of cmmmamds can be assigned in one block, but reference should be made to the instructions
issued by the machine builder since the number of T commands which can be used differs according to the
individual machine.
Parameter setting is used to determine whether a T command is to be used with 3 or 4 digits.
T***;
~T*o] affs~ numbs
L Tool number
T****;
~ TOO1offset number
L- Tool number
Reference should be made to the instructions issued by the machine builder for the correspondence between the
actual tools and the tool numbers commandwl in the program.
BCD codes and start signals are output.
The T functions can be assigned simultaneously with any other commands but when they are in the same block
as movermmt commands, there are 2 sequences in which the commands are executed, as below:
a. The T function is executed after the movement command.
b. The T function is mxmted simultaneously with the movement command.
The machine specifications determine which sequence applies.
Processing and completion sequexmesare required for all T commands.

11.2. TOOL FUNCTIONS (T8-DIGITS)

These functions are assigmxl with an 8digit (O — 99999999) number following the address T with the first 6 ar
7 digits used as the tool number tmd the last 2 digits or 1 digit used as the tool offset number.
Parameters are set to determine how many digits are used. Reference should be made to the instructions issued by
the machine builder since the numbw of T commands which can be used differs according to the individual
machine. One group of T commands can be assigned in a block.

Reference should be made to the instructions issued by the machine builder for the correspondence between thfi
actual tooIs and the tool numbers commanded in the program.
6-digit (or 7-digit) 13CD signals and start signals or binary data and start signals are output. The BCD or binary
output can be selected by parameter. Processing and completion sequences are required for all T commands.

-1oo-’
 12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS “‘
12.1.TOOL OFFSET

12. TOOL OH?S~ FUNCTIONS

12.1. TOOL OFFSET
Tool offset is performed by the T functions which are commanded with the 3-, 4- or 8-digit guiiiber following
address T. There are two types of tool offset: tool length offset and tool nose wear offset. There are two ways to
issue the emnmamk the tool length offset and tool nose wear offset are dmignated by the last 1 or 2 digits of the
T command cmthe tool wear offset is assigned by the last 1 or 2 digits of theT command and the tool kmgth offset
by the tool number. Parameter setting is used to switch between them. A parameter is also used to select the last
1 or 2 digits for the offset,
One group of T cmmnand ean be assigned in a block.

12.1.1 TOOL OFFSET’ NUMBER DESIGNATION

(1) When designating the tool Iength and tool nose wear offset number using the last 1 or 2 digits of the T
command.

L TOO1length offset + tool nose wear offset

‘~ToolnUber

~ TOO] length offset + tool nose wear offset

‘& Too~number
T **$#*$11$0*
*
1 Tool length offset + tool nose Wear Offset
Tool number

T ******Y Tool length offset + tool nose wear offset

Tool number
(2) When differentiating between the tool length offset number and tool nose wear offset number

Tool ~OSeW= OffSet

‘& Tool number + tool length offset

T *****$?* *

I ZTOO1 nose wear offset

Tool number + tool length offset
IT **$+$***
**
z TOO1nose Www OffSti
Tool number -f- tool length offset
.

-101-
 ,,’
12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.1.TOOL OFFSET

12.1.2 TOOL OFFSET START

There are two ways to execute tool offset and these can be seIected by parametec executing offset when the T
command is exeeuted and executing offset in the block with a movement command without performing offset
when the T eornmand is executed. . ..
(1) Offset with T command execution

f -1

N&::, yml,m; ~

Tool length offset and tool nose wear offset axe conducted simultaneously.

FfOTXk 1. The movement applying to offset with the T command execution is rapid traverse in a GOII
modal and cutting feed with other medals.
2. When performing offset with T command exeeution, the path is offset as a linmr movement
in an arc modal.
3. When performing offset with T command txecution, offset will not function until the arrival
of any G command except those listed below when the T command has been assigned in the
same block as the G commands listed below.
GM Dwd
G1O Program tool offset input/data setting
Glk Data setting mode camel
G65 User macro simple call

f-
G92 Coordinate system setting
(2) Offset with movement command

Tool path after

1>
offset
N2 ,/’-offs* ~()~t

- Programmed
machining path NITOlOl ;
?.r* N2 X1OO. 2200. ;
Tool length offset and tool nose wear offset are conducted simultaneously,

NOTE 1: When performing offket with a movement command, offset is applied if the offset amount is
lower than the “arc error” parameter when offset is performed for the first time with an arc
command. If the amount is higher, the “P70” (ARC ERROR) results. (This also applies
when the arc command and T command are in the same block for offsetting with T
,
command execution.)
 12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.2.TOOL LENGTH OFFSET

12.2. TOOL LENGTH OFFSET

12.2.1 TOQL LENGTH OFFSET AMOUNT SETTING

..-
This function offsets the tool length with respect to the programmed reference position. TMqosition may
generally be set to either the center position of the tool rest or the tool nose position of the reference tool.
<1) Center position of tool rest

-dir
Referenee position
(reference point)
X-axis tool length
offset amount
x
4
%axis tool length
offset amount 4 “

(2) Tool nose position of referenm tool

I
I I
- Referen~ tool
Reference . point
I
4)
Tool used for
\ machining
X-axis tool hmgth
offset amount +
m x
Z-axis tool length Ij
offset amount l.- 2

12.2.2 TOOL ?.J13NGTH OFFSET NUMBER CHANGE

When tool numbers are changed, the tool length offset corresponding to the new tool numbers are added to the
movement amounts in the machining program.

I Offset tool path

. .
I

N2 Offset amount
“i,
(new) . ~~ TO1OO;
y
Offsel F12G1 X1O.O 2510.0 F1OO ;
samnnnt
w-- . ... \ I-43G1 X13.O 215.0 F20.O ;

I
\
(nTdl
,---, %mur;mmi=rl
...&. —--
machining path
—------- .
N4 T0200 ;
N5 G1 X13,0 220.0 F25.O ;
\ J

In this exampl% the tool length is offset with the tool number and offset is performed in the block with the
movement command.

-103-
 ,,
1,
,’:
12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.2.TO(2L LENGTH (M?FSET

12.2.3 TOOL LEtNGTH OFFSET CANCEL

(1) When an offset number of zero has been assigned
Offset is canceled when 0 has been assigned as the tool length offset number by the T command.
.

Tool offset path

N1

N1 X1O.O Z1O.O F1O ;

N2 TOOOO;
Offset amount N3 G1 XIO.O 2320.0; .

Progra~nwd machining path In this cas~ offset is performed by the

block with the movement command.
(2) When the assigned eorupensation amount is zero
Commnsation is canceled when the amount of eomnensation
. in the tool length offset number assigned by
the ~ command is zero.

TOOIoffset path

N1
M G1 XIO.O ZIO.O F1O ;
N2 TOlOO ;
Offset amount N3 G1 XIO.O 22!0.0 ;

Programmed machining path In this ~ offset is performed by the

Mock with the movement command.

NQTE 1: When G28, G29 or G30 is commanded, the machine moves to th position where the offset
was cancded and the offset amount is stored in the ruenmrv. This means that with the rmxt
movement comman d the machine will move to the offset &ition.
2 Even if the offset amount of the offset number currently selected by MD1 is changed during
automatic operation, the changed offset amount will not be valid unless a T command with
the same number is executed again.
3: The tool length offset and tool nose war offset amounts are cleared by resetting and by
emergency stop. They can be retained by parameters.

-104-
 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.
12.3.TOOL NCWE WEAR OFFSET

12.3. TOOL NOSE WEAR OFFSET

123.1 TOOL NOSE WEAR OFFSET AMOUNT SETTING

The wear sustained by the tool being used can be offset. . ..

K-axis tool
lose wear offset
imount I

h--’
Z.-axis tool nose wear offset amount

12.3.2 TOOL NfOSE WEAR OFFSET CANCEL

Tool nose wear offset is canceled when O has been assigned as the offset number.
f \

NI
Nl G1 XIO.O ZIO.O F1O ;
N2 TOIOO;
N3 G1 X10.O 220.0;

In this ca.s~ offset is performed in the block

\ / with the movement command.

Ncrriz 1: When G28, G29 or G30 is eommandcd, the machine moves to the positicm wherfi tha offset
was eancekxl and the offset amount is stored in the memory. This means that with the next
movement command the machine wili move to the offset position.
2 Even if the offset amount of the offset number currently seleeted by MDI is changed during
automatic operation, the changed offset amount will not be valid urdeas a T command with
the same number is executed again.
3: The tool length offset and tool nose wear offset amounts are cleared by resetting and by ‘
emergeney stop. They em be retained by parameters.

-105-
 ,,

,,1 ‘,

12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS

12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G4Q,G41,G42,G46)

12.4. TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40, G41, G42, G46)

12.4.1 OUTLINE
The tool nose is generally rounded and so a hypothetical tool nose point is treated as Lhe.tool nose for
programming purposes. When this is don% an error caused by the tool nose rounding arises during taper cutting
or circular cutting between the actually programmed shape and the cutting shape. Tool nose radius ccimpensation
is a function for automatically calculating and offsetting this error by setting the tool nose radius value.
The comxumd wales enable the offset direction to be fixed or automatically identified.

Actual m

Mac

Hypothetical tooI nose point

Functions and cmmnand formats

Code Function Command format “

(340 TOOInose radius compensation mode G40 @@U -W Ii Kk) ;
cancel
G41 Tool nose radius compensation left G41 @&/t.hl -W);
mode ON
G42 Tool nose radius compensation right G42 &x~u &~W) ;
mode ON
G46 Tool nose radius compensation G46 &&~U fi~W) ;
automatic direction identification mode
ON . .

NOTE 1: By means of the preset hypothetical tool nose point and movement commands in the
machining program, the G46 tool nose radius compensation function automatically
identifies the immpensation direction and provides nose radius offset.
2: G40 serves to cancel the tool nose radius compensation mode.

-106-
 12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.2120L NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G4U.G41,G42.G46j

x axis
Automatic identification
t in G46 mode . ..

Left compensation
M mnpal- —
Sationfxlxl
in041 mde \
— Right wnnpensatior

Right compensation
fixed in G42 mode

Tool nose radius compensation prweads the data in the foilowing two movement command blocks (up to 5 blocks
when there are no movement commands) and controls the tool nose radius center path by the intersection point
eakmlation method so that it is offset from the programmed path by an amount equivalent to the nose radius.

( -’l

Prior to the N1 bkmk execution,

the next movement command bIock
— is preread and the cxmrdimites at
the intersection point are
edculat ed.

\
N1 block “1
I
FmfIE 3 In the above figur% “r” is the tool nose radius compensation amount (nose radius).
4: The tool nose radius compensation amount corresponds to the tool length number and it is
preset along with the tool nose point.
5: If there are 4 or more blocks without movement amounts among 5 continuous blocks,
overcutting or undercutting wiII result.
Blocks in which optional block skip is valid are ignored.
6: Tool nose radius eornpensation is also valid for canned cycles (G77 – G79) and for rough
turning cycles (G70, G71, G72, G73).
However, in the rough turning cycl~ the finishing shape with the nose radius compensation
applied will be turned with the compensation canceled and, upon completion of th~ turning,
operation will automatically return to the compensation mode.
-2 With thread cutting commands, compensation is temporarily carded 1 block before.
$: A tool nose radius compensation (G41 or G42) command em be assigned during tool nose
radius compensation (G46). There is no need to caned the G40 data compensation.
9 The compensation plan% movement axes and next advance direction vector follow the plane
selection command designated by G17, G18 or G19.
G17 ..... XY pkm~ & Y, I, J
G18 ...<. ZX plan% ~ ~ K, I
G19 ..... YZ plan% Y, &J, K

-107-
 ,, “ ~“

12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS

12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS ,COMFENSAT..ON {G+fi?, G41, G42, G46)

12.4.2 TOOL NOSE POINT AND CQMPENSATION DIRECTIONS

(1] Tool nose point
Since the tool nose is generally rounded, the programmed tool nose position is aligned with point P shown
in the examules of the fimmes below.
With tool n&e radius mwmpensation, one point among those in the figures below indieatiiig the position
relationship is seleeted for each tool length number and preset. (Selection from points 1 thrbugh 8 in the G46
mode and 0 through 9 in the G4VG42 mode.)

‘~~@~TOOnQs&or9~~D~a

+Z Correapondenee between hypothetical tool

nose numbers and tool nose po ints

(2) Tool rinse point and compensation operation

1) When the nose R center has been aligned with the machining start position

Machining completion position

+x Machining’
start position
I
Nose R center path with nose R compensation

*.
“..%%.—. ~“
Machini [ g shape with no Programmed path or machining
nose . R compensation shape with nose R compensation
.
/ 1

2) When the tool nose point has been aligned with the machining start position
-1
Machining completion position
. .
+x
Machining,
t G40 start position’
#
%0 Machining shape with no nose R compensation
#
# f- -,
, , ~e-,”.,
. / .-, ~ 0-%
\ ,4 \
t ,@ 1 k)
‘1.. A -1:-... --- 4 [“- >’ “G42 Or G46
<.>’.. “---~ %.. /
+\/*..Q “--- w. --- ~ 2

Now R center path with Programmed path or machining

- +2
nose R compensation shape with nose R compensation
.
—.

-108-
 ,1,“
,:, ,
12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G4Q,G41,(342,
G46)

(~) C~pena@ion directions

The compensation d-tion of the G41/G42 commands is determined by the G41/G42 calm. The directionin a G46cotnmandis
automatically determined in accordance with the foUowingtable from the rdationship betwem the too] nosepoints and the commanded
movement vectom.
When nose R compensation has been started and the inhial movementvector fjncludlng GO)cOrr@SpOndS to an “X’’-mark in the table,
the compensation direction cannot be sperit%f and so it is determined by the next movementvector.Whenthe directioncannotbe
determined even after reading 5 blocks ahea~ program error “P156” tmdts.
When an attempt is made to rwerse the compenstitiond=tion during noseR compensation, program error “P1S7” msuks mcept
when the reversal is done in the G(XIMock. liken if the dimctiortadiffer before and after the G2& G30 or G53 block, an error will not
red since compensation is tem~raxily carded. Using a parameter, the ttml cartalso be moved unchanged in the same compensation
dinxtion.
When the compensation direction during nose R compensation coincides with an “X” in the table below, th~ direction complies with
the previous compensation dimxtion.
Determining the compmaation direction by the movement vectors and tool rick%. lmint in command C+% -

D@oir of Compensation
toolnose cll~~f
\ advance Tool nose pointa /

c:t
u R 1 ! w
Right Rf@t Left Left Rfghf I#ft .
T
Right Left Right Right
I 1X1 M II t~ft I U! I

fovmreat Movement
ector “0.+..
K3.31
nose
Ofnts
- 4)

i I / Y v \

/’ Left Right Rfghf Left ~ Wt :%.

-1 .

~ J--@
M@ ~ft W@ Wht
I
\ Right Left : RightRight Left Left
r .~’

~0~ 1: An “X” mark in the table indicates that the compensation direction is not determined fmm the movememtvmtor
(ted nose points). . .
2: The” # “ mark denotes a movementvector in the 45 direction. @e other movement vectom are baaed on this.)
3: The “ ~“ mark denotes a movement vmtor with a range larger than 45 Qand smaller thatr 1350 me other
movement vectors are based on this.)
I&ample W~thtool nose point 3, movement vector in the Zsxis (-) dimctiort [with * movement vector)

As shown in the figarwort the left,’the worlipitce

is on the X-axis (-) side from the tool nose
X-axis + position and tool movemesttdirection. (%naequ.
Tool nose point P erttly, the right side compensation of tho
f B workpicce in the dirtxtion of the tool’s advance
—’
Tool movement .direztion serves as the compensation direction.
I

t “’’’’’’’’’’’’”A
‘mis
I A

-109-
 ‘,

12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS

12.4. TOOL NOSE .R2WIUS COMPENSATION (G40, G41, G42, G46]

12.4.3 TOOL NOSE R COMPENSATION OPERATIONS

Q) Tool nose R compensation cancel mode
The tool nose radius compensation cancel mode is established by any of the following conditions,
1) After the power has been switched on ..
2) After the reset button on the setting and display unit has been pressed
3) After the M02 or M03 command with reset function has been executed
4) After the cutter compensation caned command (G40) has been ewmuted
5) After tool number O has been selected (?WI has been executed)
The offset vectors are zeto in the mmpensation cancel mod% and the tooI nose point path coincides
with the programmed path.
Programs including tool nose radius compensation must be terminated in the compensation cancel .
mode.
(2) Tool nose radius compensation start (start-up)
Tool nose radius compensation starts when all the following conditions are mti in the compensation cancel
mode,
1) The G41, G42 or G46 cmnmand has been issued.
2) The movement command is any command except a circular command.
At the start of compensation, the operation is executed after at least 2 to 5 blocks have been read continuously
for intersection po~t calculation r~ardless of single block operation. ~o blocks are preread if moveme~t
commands are present; 5 blocks are preread if such commands are not present.)
During compensation, 5 blocks are pre-read and the compensation is arithmetically processed.
\
~ntrol mode transition diagram

. .

There are two ways of starting the compensation operation: type A and type B.
The type can be sekcted or de-selected by the control parameter (tool nose compensation type B).
This type is used in common with the compensation cancel type.
In tha following explanatory figur~ “S’ denotes the single block stop point.

-110-
 12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40,G41,G42,G46)

(3) Start operation for tool nose R compensation

1) Machining an inner wall

Linear~linear Linear4circular
..

e Programmed path e —.— -—. —

= tool nose R radius

>———————— TOOInose pat
R center path

Start point Start point 4

Center of arc

2) Machining an outer wall (obtuse angle) (type A or B ean be seleeted by parameter)

[90”s$3 <180”]
\
Linear41inear (type A) Linear-%rcular (type A)

Tool nose R center path

s --——— s
--- --%
/ /4 \\
/ r = too] nose R radius ~ / r
G41/’
/
/ Programmed pat
/ /
/

Start point Start point

Center of arc

Linear~linear (type B) Linear+=eireular (type B)

Point of intersection
Point of intersection
s —--- ----- S
Tool nose R center path
j,l r
.
/
G 4 1// Programmed path
/’
/

Start point Start point Center of&c Programmed path

-111-’

—
12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION {G@ G41,G42,G46)

3) Machining an outer wall (obtuse angle) ~pe A or B can be selected by parameter) [0 <90 O]

Linear-wircular (type A)
..
f center }
s —-—— —.—— .—e : of arc
: Tcmlno&R
. centerpath
●
Tool nose R center path ●

\
Programmed path r \ path
.—. —
\
\ \
\
\
Start point

Start point

Linearelinear (type B) Linear-circular (type B)

center of arc
-.-—- ——. - --

TOOInose R center path

Ii
+
?%, Programmed path
path
\
\
\

\
\
start point

Start point

NOTE 1. Where is no axis movement eomm~d in the same block, compensation is performed
perpendicularly to the next block direction.

-112-
 TOOL 12. OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION {G40,G41.G42.G46j

(4) Operations in compensation mode

Compensation is valid both for positioning and for interpolation commands such as circular and linear
interpolation.
Even if the same compensation command (G41, G42, G46) is issued in a nose R compensation (G41, G42,
G46) modq the command wiIl be ignored. . ..
When 4 or more blocks not accompanying movement are commanded continuously in the compensation
mode, overcuttmg or undercutting will result.
When the MOOcmmuand has besn issued during tool nose R compensation, pro-reading is prohibited.
1) Machining an outer wall
{ \
Linear-1inear (90 o ~ @< 1800~ Linear+ linear (O0< d <90 O)

path

k,
\
\
\ Porgrammed path
\
\ I
->~ -——— .—— -
Point of intersection Tool nose R center path.

‘\
Linear+=circukar (90 o SO< 180 “) Linear4circular (O0<0< W,O)

-——- — —— --
/ Tool nose R center path
s
%,
0 Programmed path
~ ~-- . ..”
. ..
#’- ,’
r
s
.-— — ----
-.. . \
.“ Tool nose R center path .-
.
Centw=of arc j
i’ J
Center of arc

x’
Circukr~Iinear (90” = d< 1800, . . Circular+ linear (O0<0<900,

Center of arc
●
I

Y
Pmq&med path
\
\ / \
\ :e
\
\ : Ii \
\ \
\ “ ‘-- // \
\\r r
/ Yr
/
of arc
Tool nose R +“ Tool nose R\~
center path s center path Y& ,
Point of intersection SW

-113-
12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION iG40.0’41.
G42.G46)

\
Circular~circular (90 0=0< 180 O) Circular~circular (OoC @<90 O)

Center of arc
● . ..
Programmed path x 1! Programmed path

ii
--- r -—. =
‘\ 0- \
/“ \r
-e ~ ‘Tool nose R center path \
.’
----
.“’“ Point of intersection .-. ”
●“ +
Center of arc Cent&f arc Center of arc

2) Machining an inner wall

Linear-1inear (obtuse angle) Linear-4inear (obtuse amde)

r Programmed path

———— .—. - -—.—. --

Tool nose
/
.-
0
0
/

Linear~circular (obtuse angle) Linear-circular (obtuse angle)

o
Programnu%l path

/“”
// /“
intersection -~ -
~ section i
Center of arc

Circukr~linear (obtuse angle) Circular-1inear (obtuse angle)

‘– Programmed path -------------+ Center of arc

Programmed path -

. . Tool nose R center path

-’ ---
Tool nose R center

Center of arc

-114-
 12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40,G41,G42,G46)

Circular-circular (obtuse angle) Circular+circular (acute angle)

P~int of intersection
_ _ -Tool nose R center path
e Center of arc...
0
//--
s b’
. ?.
,*’ }
/0 4 I
/ \ *
\ .’ /1
t’ \ ,“ /
:“ center of arc /’
Prograr&md path ~ . “’t -.. =.0 ,/
P e. ---*
1’
.. . .:.%--

u
k Point ‘1%--- ~T;ol pose R
of inter-~, center path
section
~---~
r

3) When the arc end point is not on the arc

If the error applying after compensation is within the “arc error” parameter, the area from the arc start
point to the end point is interpolated as a spiral arc.

1 ~
Imaginmy circle
.—. -.
\. To& nose R center path
./---
‘/ Programmed pti>. ~. : =d point of arc

4) When the inner intersection point does not exist

In an instance such as that shown in the figure below, the intersection point of arcs A and B may cease
to exist due to the offset amount. In such cases, program error “P152” appears and the tool stops at
the end point of the previous block.

Program error stop

Tool nose R center path ~

__— ———-

Programmed path
A /-

Line inte&cting arcs ~ B

-115-
12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION {G40.ml. G42. G46j

(5) Tool nose radius compensation cancel

If either of the following conditions is met in the tool nose radius compensation modq the compensation will
be canceled. Howawr, the movement command must be a command which is not a circular command.
If the compensation is canceled by a circular command, program error “P151” results.
1) The G40 command has been executed. . ..
2) The TOOtool number has besn executed.
The cancel mode is established once the wmpensation cancel mmmand has been read, 5-bIock pre-
reading is suspended and l-block pre-reading is made operational.
(6) Tool nose radius compensation cancel operation
1) Machining an inner wall

Linear~linear Circular-1inear
[

e Programmed path ~ -—.—. —.—

Programmed path
= tool nose R radius
———— ——. Tool nose R center
path

End point s

Centef of arc
L
2) Machining an outer wall (obtuse angle) (type A or B can be selected by parameter)

Linear-1inear (type Al Circular4inmr (type A)

s —-—— —— . . . s
Tool nose R center path
/’ r“ = tool nose R radius Tool nose R
G40,/
/
/
/ /’
/ /

End point

Linmr~linear (type B) Circular~lin~r (type B)

. .

Point of intersection Point of intersection

.4;Ys::::~:F
/
/
/
/ e
/
/’
:
:
;;
‘1
\
End point Programmed path
End point Center of ’&c

-116-
 12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION tG40,G41.G42.G46J

3) Machining an outside wall (obtuse angle) (type A or B can be selected by parameter.)

Linear~linear (type A) . Circular-1inear dvue A’)

Center . ..

s-—-—
—..———. ~ of arc
1
/

F
rl
Tool nose R center path ~ Tool n<se R
~ center path

Programmed path
Programmed path
—.— .—

&d point

Ehd point

~ Linear~linear (type B) Circular~l&ar (type B)

--–—--—–––
,/ Tool nose R center path

Programmed path
path

G 4 O\\\

Enl point

-117-
12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40,G41,G42,G46)

12.4.4 OTHER OPERATIONS DURING NOSE R COMPENSATION

(1) Changing the compensation direction during tool nose radius compensation
The compensation direction is determined by the tool nose radius compensation commands (G41, G42).
. .-
G code Compensation direction
G41 Left-hand compensation
G42 Right-hand compensation

The compensation direction can be changed by changing the compensation command in the
compensation mode without the compensation having to be frost canceled. However, no change is
possible in the compensation start block and the following block.

Lkmar~linear

~“ Programmed path
G41
---------
G41
-
G42

\
/r
/
/
/

‘x

Linear-4circular

G41 G42 G41G41 G42

,.. ,
.-- —- y
1
i
\ Programmed path
\
\
\

Tool nose R center path

-118-
 12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSAITON (G40,G41,G42,G46)

Circular-+eircular
. ..
Tool nose R center path
Center of arc
/ <
0
/

Programmed path G41 G42

G41

\“ /

G41 G41 G42

Linear return

Tool nose center G41

path -----
----—— ---—-
----- . . a
G42
r
I
Programmed path Jl

Arc exeeeding 3600 due to compensation

In the cases below, it is possible that the arc

may exceed 360”.
I -,- a. With offset direction selection based on
G4Z --------
G411G42
b. With I, J, K commanded in G40

In cases like this, compensation is provided as

Cent er
shown in the figure on the left and a section
Datl
. 1
will be left uncut.

G42’ -“\“- /
.-. -, -. 0“
I Seztion left uncut

-119-
 .

12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS

12.4.TOOL NOSE RAVIUS COMPENSATION (G40,G41=G42,G46)

(2) Tool nose R compensation of path closed by G46/G41/G42

. ..

.—.— .— .

GOI (G411
1

G41
command

“/
/’ \.
5

“El
Y
~ igh’t)
./”
1

a) G46 command o~eration b) G42+G41 command operation

GO1(G02) 1

/fYJY1/////

/
/ 1“
/
/ GO1
/ (G42)

c) G42+G41 command operation

-120-’
 12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40,G41,G42,G46)

(3) Command for eliminating offset vectors temporarily

When the following command is issued in the compensation modq the offset vectors are temporarily
eliminated and a return is then made automatically to the compensation mode. -.
In this casq the compensation is not canceled, and the tool goes directly from the intersection point
vector to the point without vectors or, in other words, to the programmed command point. When a
return is made to the wmpensation mod% it goes directly to the intersection point.
1) Reference point relum command
\
x

1-
s
s
0
/ “A z 0
/ \ 0
/ 0
0 \ /
,0
/

N5 N6 N7 N8 ‘
- t- -

(G41) i
N5 GO1 U+30. W-f-60. ;
N6 G28 U –40. W +50. : ~ T-porarily no compensation vectors at
intermediate point
N7 u-m. W+30. ; (Reference point when there is no intermediate
N8 U+40. W+70. : point)
1

NOTE 1. The offset vectors do not change with the coordinate system setting (G92) command.

2) G33 thread cutting wmmand

Tool nose radius compensation does not apply to the G33 block.

G33 . . Point of
Tool nose R
,’ ,~ ///////1///
-——. . .’0 ———— —..

Programmed path

3) Multiple repetitive canned cycles

When a multiple repetitive canned cycle I command (G70, G71, G72, G73) is assigned, the tool nose
R wmpensation is temporarily canceled, the finishing shape to which tool nose R wmpensation has
been applied is turned with the compensation canceled and, upon completion, a return is automatically
made to the wmpensation mode.

-121-
12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G@, ml, G42,G46)

(4) Blocks without movement

The foIlowing blocks are known as blocks without movement.
a. M03 ,- ............................................................ M cmnmand
b. S12 ,. ............................................................. S command . ..
c. TO1O1 > . ........................ .................................. T command
d. G04XSO0 ., .................................................... Dwell No movement
e. G1OPO1R5O ,. ................................................ Offset amount setting
f. G92 X600. 2S00. > ‘ ........................................ Coordinate system
setting
!3 Y40. “
, ............................................................ Movement but not on
offset plane
h. GOO ., ............................................................ G code only
i. UO ., ............................................................... Zero movement ... Movement
amount amount is zero

1) When commanded at compensation start

Offset is performed perpendicularly at the next movement block.

N2
//.
\
\\N3
N1 IJ60, W30. TO1O1: Ii
\
W! G41 ; e Block without N1/’
movement
N3 u –50. W20. ; x II ‘k. N4
/’ --.
N4 u –20. W50. ; 1 A
1 -%

When 4 or more blocks without movement follow in sucaxion, the offset vectors will not be cn%ted.

NJ U60. W30. TO1OI : N2, 3, 4, 5, 6

N2
N3 G4 X1OOO;
Block without
N4 F 100’; N1
movement
N5 S500;
I
N6 M3 ; )
N7 u –50. W20, ;
N8 u –20. W50. ;

-122-
 12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATIO.N {G40,G41,G42,G46J

N1 TO1O1: N3-N6
N2 G41 U60. W30. ; . ..
N3 G4 X1OOO;
N4

~6
N7
F1OO;
JN5 s 500 ;
M3;
U –50.
IW20. ;
,
Block without
movement

N8 U –20. W50. :
d
-. . . . . . . . . .
z) when command IS assigned III the compensation mode

When 4 or more blocks without movement follow in succession in the compensation modq the
intersection point veetors will be created as usual.

)
N6 U200. Wloo. ; N? N8
Block without
N7 G04X P1OOO; .....-...’.. movaat
N8 W200. ; ----------
N6

is executed here.

When 4 or more blocks without movement follow in succession, the offsel vectors are mated
perpendicularly at the end point of the previous block.

Nll
N 6 u200. Wloo. ;
N 7 G4 XiOOO;
N8 F1oo; N6
Block without
N9 S500;
movement
N10 M4 ;
1
NH W1OO. ;
In this casq a cut results.

.123.
12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION {G40,G41,G42,G46)

3) When commanded together with compensation cancel

Only the offset vectors are canceled when a block without movement is commanded together with
the G40 eornmand.
....
$x

L
N 6 U200 W1OO. ;
N7 G40 Go4P1OOO;
N 8 U50. W1OO. ;

(5) When ~ J, K are commanded in G40

1) When the last movement umnmand block among the 4 blocks before the G40 block is in the G41 or
G42 modq it is considered to be commanded in the vector I, J and K direction from the end point of
the last movement command, and compensation is canceled after interpolation up to the intersection
point with the eorrmponding hypothetical tool nose eater path. There is no change in the
compensation direetion.
f >
Hypothetical tool nose R center path

N1 (G41) GIZ_;
Tool nose R center path
N2G40XaZb I iKk;
G41
N1

Programmed path
L J

In this eas~ care is required since the intersection point must be sought even when the command
vector is inrxxmet, as in the figure below, regardless of the compensation direction.
/ \
(a, b)
. .

When the I, K signs are

TOOI nose R center path incorrect in the above
program example
G41
N1
Programmed path ,,+0 ~
,
*.*
.’
(i,{) ‘
/-
/“
Hypothetical tool nose R center path
\ )

-124-
 12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4. TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G4Q G41, G42, G46)

When the intersection uoint calculation and offset vectors cannot be sought, perpendicular vectors are
created in the block b~fore G40.
\
(
. ..
x

L z

—.— .—.
G41

(i,
—
e -. --- -----
k)
. —-
r
‘-‘“—” — Hypothetical tool nose
R center path
,
2) Care should be taken with the G40 command after an arc command since there is a danger of a section
being left uncut when the arc mxeds 3600 due to the contents of I, J and K.

~..
+- r ~, Section left uncut

A
0’ \\/
/
\ ,.
//

W150. I 100, K-1OO. ;

(6) Corner movement

When a multiple number of offset vectors are created at the joins between movement command blocks, the
tool wti move in a straight line between those vectors. This action is called comer movement.
When the vectors do not coincidq the tool moves in order to machine the comer although this movement
is part and parcel of the join block. Consequently, operation in the singk block mode will execute the
previous block + amer movement as a single block and the remaining joining movement + following
block will be executed as a single block in the following operation.

~-
\
\ N2
\
\
\
\
Tool nose R center pa~l~ ~
This movement and feed rate \
fail under block N2.

. .
Stop point with single block

-125 -
12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40, WI, G42, G46)

12.4.5 G411G42 COMMANDS AND I, J, K DESIGNATION

The compensation direetion ean be intentionally changed by issuing the G41fG42 command and I, J, K in the
same block.
(1) Command format .

G18 (ZX plane) G41/G42 X_ Z_ L K_ ;

Assign a linear command (GOO,GO1) in a movement mode.
(2) 1, K type vectors (G18 XZ plane seketion)
The new I, K type vector (G18 plane) created by this command is now described. (Similar descriptions
apply to vector ~ J for the G17 plane and to J, K for the G19 plane.)
As shown in the figures beJow, the vectors with a size equivalent to t~e offset amount are made to
serve as the 1, K type compensation vector perpendicularly to the direetion designated by 1, K without
the intersection point of the programmed path being calculated. The I, K veetor ean be commanded
even in the mode (G41/G42 mode in the bIock before) and even at the compensation start (G40 mode
in the block before).
1) When I, K is commanded at compensation start

NIIO (G40)
N120
N 130 1
x N140 N 150
>
~100 G41 U1OO. W1OO. K 15O.TO1O1;

L NIOO NIIO G04 XIOOO;

z N120 GOI F1OOO;
N130 S500 ;
N 140 ?4103;
— Tool nose R N150 z150. ;
center path i
/

When there are no movement commands at the compensation start

x (G40)

L
N3
* 1
NI G41 K150. TO1O1 ;
z
N2 .N2 Uloo. Wloo. ;
N3 W150. ;

DI N
I t

-126-
 12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIOiVS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40,G41,G42,G46)

2) When I, K has been commanded in the mode (G18 plane)

. ..
i
---— —-
(G18 G41”)
Nltm N100 G41 Goow150. I 50. ;
—
(N120)
0 NIIO G02 W1OO,I 50. ;
N120 GOO X–150. ;

x t

l_- Z
— Programrn&l path ~ K type vector
Tool nose R center path @ Intersection point calculation
------ Path for intersection point ealculation~pe ‘@or

‘ When I, K has been commanded in a block without movement

N3 N4

NI ,G41 TO1O1GO1 F1OOO;

N2
N2 u100, W1OO. ;
N3 G41 K50. ;
N4 W150. ;
N5 G40 ;
NI
DL
\

-127 -
12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION {G4#’,
G41,G42,G46]

(3) Direction of offset vectors

1) In G41 mode
Direetion produced by rotating the direction eomrnanded by I, K through 900 to the left from the
forward direetion of the Y axis (axis 3) as seen from the zero point
@ample 1) With K1OU. @ample 2) With K -100.
(O, -1(KI IK direction)
Offset vector direetion
4
l-l

@, 100 IK direetion) Offset veetor direetion

2) In G42 mode
Direction produced by rotating the direction commanded by I, K through 900 to the right from the
forward direction of the Y axis (axis 3) as seen from the zero point
(Example 1) With K1OO. (&ample 2) With K -100.
(0, 100 IK direetion) Offset vector direction
>
l-’
<J

Offset vector direetion (O, -1(X) IK direction)

(4) Selection of offset modal

The G41 or G42 modal ean be selected at any time.

x NI G28 XOZO;
N2 G41 TO1O1 F1OOO;
!
kz N 3 GOI U1OO. W1OO. ;
(1, K] N4 G42 W1OO.i–100. K1OO.
N4
N3 TO1O2 ;
N 5 U–1OO. WIOO. ;
N2
N5 N6 G40;
Ill
\v
N7 M02;
%

-123 -
 12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40,G41,G42,G46)

(5) Offset amount for offset vectors

The offset amounts are determined by the offset number (modal) in the block with the I, K
designation.

<I%ample 1>
.--— --—- -.
(G41 TO1O1)
TI
)
x NIOO N1OO G41 W150. K 50. ;
NI1O N11o U–1OO. WKN. ;
L z i.

Vector (A) is the offset amount entered in tool offset number modal 1 in the N1OObIock.
/ -1
~Example “2>
_ .-
----
(G41 TO1O1)
@ T2
T1 1
N200 G41 W150. K50. TO1O2 ;
x N200
N21o u –100. W 100. ;
N21o
z t
\L
J

Veetor (B) is the offset amount entered in tool offset number modal 2 in the N200 block.

(6) Checkpoints
1) Issue the ~ K type veetor in a linear mode (GO, Gl). If it is issued in an arc mode at the start of
compensation, program error “P151” (G2, 3 CMP. ERR ) will result.
Au IK designation in an arc mode functions as an arc center designation in the offset mode.
2) When the~ K type vector has been designated, it is not deleted (avoidance of interference) men if there
is interference. Consequently, overcutting may arise in such a case.

lx

IL z
N1
N 2
N3
G28
G41
W1OO. ;
XOZO;
TO1O1 F1OOO;

N 4 G41 U–1OO. JvIOO. K1O. ;

N 5 U1OO, W1OO. ;
N6 G40;
N7 M02;

-129-
12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40,G41,G42,G46)

(7) Supplementary notes

1) Refer to the following table for the offset methods based on the presence andlor absence of the G41
and G42 commands and I, K (J) command.
..
G41/G42 I, K (J) Offset method
No No Intersection po int calculation typ e vector
No Yes Intersection point calculation typ e vector
Yes No Intersection po int calculation typ e vector
Yes Yes I, K type vector
No insertion block

-130-!
 12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40,G41,G42,G46j

12.4.6 INTERRUPTS DURING TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

(1) MDI interrupt
TOOInose radius compensation is valid in any automatic operation mode—whether tape, memo~ or
MDI operation. . ..
~ interrupt based on MDI will give the result as in the figure below after block stop during tape or
memory operation.
1) Interrupt without movement (tool path does not change)
f N1G41 3’0101: S (Stop position with
N2U50. W20. ; MDI interrupt
i
N3G3 U -40. w~~l S 10!0 M3 : /’

Ii
x /1

L z (.%

2) Interrupt with movement

The offset veetors are automatically re-ealeulatixl at the movement block after interrupt.

With linear interrupt

NIG41 TO1O1;
N2U50. W20. ; MDI intexrupt
t
N3G3 u –40. w40.’-ii7iF7 u -30. W50.

LU50. W30.

With circular interrupt

N1G41 TO1O1;
N2U50. W20. ; ; MDI interrupt
N3G3 X -40. Y40. R70. ; G2 U –4o. W40. R70.
G1 W40. ; ‘
l-’ ,/’
/

[
~-

-131-
12.TOOL. OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (GW, G41,G42,G46J

(2) Manual interrupt

Tool path after i~rrupt
-“1)Interrupt wi& manual abso- #—-----*._——_ __
lute OFF. ,/’
1
The tool path is shifted by mi
amount equivalent to the in- hterrupt Toolpath - )
/---
terrupt amount. after eompemation ,<
(
.
b/
/#’

2) Interrupt with manual abso-

lute ON.
In the incremental value ,
modq the same operation
results as with manual abso- ●

lute OFF.
✼

In the abscdute value modq

however, the tool returns to
its original path at the end
point of the block following
the interrupted block, as ✼
shown in the figure. ✼

\
\ l\
~ Interrupt

-132-
 12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ~G40,G41,G42,G46)

12.4.7 GENERAL CHECKPOINTS FOR TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

(1) Assigning the offset amounts
The offset amount is normally assigned by designating the number of the offset amount by the last
1 or 2 digits of the T code. Depending on the machine specifications, the first digits may be used. The
T code will remain valid once designated until another T code is subsequently commanded.

Besides being used to designate the offset amounts for tool nose radius compensation, the T codes are
also used to designate the offset amounts for tool position offset.
(2) Changing the offset amounts
Offset amounts are normally changed when a different tool has been seleeted in the compensation
caned mode. Howwer, when an amount is changed in the compensation modej the vectors at the end
point of the block are calculated using the offset amount designated in that block. .
(3) Errors during tool nose R compensation
1) #m error results when any of the following mmmands are programmed during tool nose R
compensation.
G17, 18, 19 ~Pl12° when a plane differing from that applying during the compensation has bem
commanded)
G31 (“P608”)
G74, 75,76 (“P155”)
G81–G89 (“P155”)
2) A error (“P158”) results when a tool nose point other than 1 through 8 has been designated in theG46
mode.
3) An error (“P156”) results when the offset direetion is not determined by the movement veetor of the
initial cutting command even when the tool nose R compensation operation has started in the G46
mode and 5 blocks have been pro-read.
4) ti error (“P151”) results when an arc command is issued in the first or last block of the tool nose R
compensation.
5) A program error (“P157”) results when the offset direction is reversoil in the G46 mods
A parameter can be set to move the tool in the same compensation direction. (Chtrol parameter #37
“G46 revered error avoidance”)
6) A program error (“P152”) results during tool nose R compensation when the intersection point is not
determined with single block skip in the interference block processing.
7) A program error results when there is an error in one of the prtmmd blocks during tool nose R
compensation.
8) A program error (“P153”) results when interference arises under no interference avoidance conditions
during tool nose R compensation.
9) A program error ~P150”) results when a tool nose R compensation command is issued even though
the tool nose R compensation specification has not been provided.

. .

!’

-133 -
12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40,G41,G42. G46)

12.4-8 INTERFERENCE CHECK

(1) Outline
A tool, whose nose radius has been compensated under the tool nose R compensation function by the
usual 2-block prwead, may sometimes cut into the workpiece. This is known as interference, and
interferenw check is the function which prevents this from occurring.
There are two types of interference chczk, as indicated below, and each can be selected for use by
parameter.

Function Parameter @ration

Interference check alarm Interference check avoid- A program error results before the
function ante OFF execution of the block in which the
cut arises, and operation stops.
Interference check avoid- Interference check avoid-” The tool path is chang~ so that
ante function ante ON workpiece is not cut into.
~ample)

1) With alazm function

The alarm occurs before N1 is executed and so, using the buffer correction function, N1 can be
changed as below and machining can be continued:
. .
N1 G1 X–1OO. Z-20. ;
2) With avoidance function
The intersection point of N1 and N3 is calculated and the interference avoidance vectors are
created.

-134-
 . .

12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS

22.4. TOOL NOSE l@$DIUS COMPENSATION (G40, G41, G42, G46)

Operation during interference avoidance

Solid line vecto~ valid

Broken line vector: invalid
Tool nose R center path “‘-
when interference is avoided
Tool n&e R ~nter path without
interference check
\
\

N1

Tool nose R center path when

interference is avoided

interferen~ check
~4
+!.
●
Programmed path

{
/,
///// .-’/ //O-/- ~.~/// /
N1 r Center of arc

In the ease of the figure below, the groove wilI be left uncut.

Interference avoidance nath

/4 ‘--m. +

Tool nose R center

-135-
12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40,G41,G42,G46)

(3) Interference check alarm

The interference check alarm oc-
curs under the following condi-
tions.
* When the interference check
alarm function has been
sekcted
1) When all the vectors at the
end block of its own block
have been deleted
When, as shown in the figure
on the right, vectors 1
through 4 at the end point of
the N1 block have all been
deleted, program error
“P153” results prior to N1
exeation.

When the interference check avoidance function has been selected

2; When there are valid vectors
at the endpoint of the follow-
ing block even when all the
vectors at the end point of its
own block have been deleted
a. When, in the figure on the
right, the N2 interference
chekk is conducted, the N2
end point vectors are all
deletal but the N3 end point
vectors are regarded as valid. N
Program error “PM3” now
occurs at the NI end point.
4

b. In a case such as that shown

in the figure on the right, the
tool will move in the reverse
direction at N2.
Program error “P153” now
occurs prioy to N1 execution.

N1

-136 -
 TOOL. OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.
12.4.TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G4Q,G41,G42,G46)

3) When avoidance veetors cannot

be created - Alarm stop
a. Even when, as in the figure on
the right, the conditions for
erwting the avoidance vectors ....
/
are met, it may still be impos-
N1
sible:0 create these v~tors or
the interference veetors may
interfere with N3. As a result,

k
program error “P153° will Oc- N2
cur at the N1 end point when the
vector intersecting angle is more
than 90 “. N4 .

N3

N1

N2

b. Avoidance veetors cannot be

created whcm pre-read prohl%it
blocks are interfered with and so (G4D
program error “P153” occurs.
{
N1OGO1Z Z 1 ;
N20 N20X X , ;
N30M02 ;
Pre-read
.—-— —-. .:
I

-1.37 -
12.TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.5.PROGRAMMED TOOL OFFSET INP~ tGlOJ

4) When the program advance direction and the advance direction after compensation are reversed ,
liI the following ease, interferer is still regarded as occurring even when there is actually no
interference.
When grooves which are narrower than the tool nose R diameter or which have para.llel or
widening walls are programmed
t Y

Programmed path Tool nose center path

----
1 /“ \
I /
I
I
———. . . .

12.5. PROGRAMMED TOOL OFFSET INPUT (GIO)

(1) Outline
The amount of tool offset and work offset can be set or changed by the G1O command. When
commanded with absolute values & z R), the commanded offset amounts serve as the new amount~
when commanded with incremental values (U, W, C), the new offset amounts are equivalent to the
commanded amounts plus the current offset amount settings.
(2) Command format
1) ~:c)k&f~ input @)

mags===~
2) Tool length offset input (L1O)
G1O L1O P7 L@q) (W) R(c)Q;
Hypothetical tool nose point
Tool nose R t.mmpensation amount
(incremental)
Tool nose R compensation amount
(absolute)
;K Z-axis offset amount (inerernental)
Zkixis offset amount (absolute)
X-axis offset amount (incremental)
X-axis offset amount (absolute)
Offset number

-138-
 12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.5.PROGRAMMED TOOL OFFSET INPUT {GlOj

3) Tool nose wear offset input (L1l)

‘(W’ )R (C )Q ;
~Hypoth&iml tool nose point
Tool nose R compensation amount
(inerernental) ~--
Tool nose R compensation amount
(absolute)
L %axis offset amount (incremental)
Zaxis offset amount (absolutel

4) When there is no L command with tool length offset input (L1O) or tool nose wear offset input (L1l)
Tool length offset input command: P = 10000 + offset number
TOOIno~e wear offw-t input: P = offset number
(3) Detailed dexription
1) The following table shows the offset numbers and the setting ranges of the hypothetical tool nose
points.
Add- Signifieanee of Setting range
rem address L2 L1O Lll
O fiternal work When L ~mmand is
offset presenfi 1 — Max. When L command
1: G54 work offset “ number of offset sets is/is not presenfi
P Offset number 2 G55 work offset 1 – Max. number of
3: G56 work offset When L command is offset sets
4: G57 work offset not present:
5: G58 work offset 10001 – 1000O +
6: G59 work offset Max. number of of-
fset sets
Hypothetical .
Q o–9
tool nose point

NOTE The maximum number of offset sets for P (offset number) with tool offset input (L1O or Lll) is
20 under the standard specifkations and up to a total of 80 with the addition of options.
2) The setting range for the offset amount is given below.
Program error “P35” oeeurs for any value not Iisted in the table after command unit eonversion.
With an incremental value command, the setting range for the offset amount is the sum of the present
setting and command value.
Input Tool length offset amount Tool wear offsel amount
unit Metric system Inch system Metric system Inch system
* 999999.99 & 99999.999 2999999.99 k 99999.999
IS-A (mm (inch)
(mm) (inch)
* 99999.999 & 9999.9999 & 99999.999 * 9999.9999
IS-B mm (inch) (mm) (inch)
* 9999.9999 k 999.99999 * 9999.9999 *999.99999
IS-C mm) (inch)
mm (inch)

3) Offset amount setting range check

The maximum value of the wear offset data and the maximum additional value for the wear offset
input check respectively take precedence for a single-time offset amount in the maximum vaIue and
incremental vaIue command of the wear offset amount, and when an amount greater than these
values has been commanded, program error “P35” redts.
4) G1O is an unmodal command and is valid only in the commanded biock.

-139-
12. TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12.5.PROGRAMMED TOOL OFFSET INPUT (GlO]

5) offset input can be performed similarly for the third axis but even when the C axis has been designated
as the third axis, address C is treated as an incremental command value of the tool nose rad~us in the
L1O or Lll command.
6) If an ilkqyd L number or P number is commanded, program error “P172” or “P170” will result,
respectively. . ..
7) Program error “P170” occurs when the P command is omitted.
8) Program error “P35” results when the offset amount exceeds the setting range.
9) & Z and U, W are input together in a single block but when an address that commands the same offset
input ~ U or ~ W) is commanded, the address which is input last is valid.
10) Offset will be input if even one address following G1O L(2/10/11) P- is commanded. Program error
“P33” results when not even a single command has been assigned.
13ample G1O L1O P3 Z50. ;

m.putasperlef
11) Decimal points are valid for offiet amounts.
12) Program error “P171” occurs when this command is input even though the corresponding specifica-
tions have not been provided.
13) G40 – G42 are ignored when they have been coinmanded in the same block as G1O.
14) Do not command G1O in the same block as canned cycles and subprogram cdl commands.
This will cause malfunctioning and program errors.
15) When a T command hasbeen issued in the same block as G1O with Tmove (machine offset operation)
as zero, the offset will be accomplished in the following block. (Basic specifications parametedmachine
parameter 1.)

. .

-140-’
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.1.CAN..ED CYCLES FOR TURNING

13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS

13.1. CANNED CYCLES FOR TURNING
When performing rough turning and other such operations during turning, these functions enabl~ shapes normally
cmu.manded in several blocks to be commanded in a single block. In other words, they simphfi the machining
program. The following types of canned cycles for turning are available.

G code Function
G77 Longitudinal turning cycle
G78 Thread cutting cycle
G79 Face turning cycle

(1) The program format is as follows.

G77X/U. Z/TV_ R_ F_ ;
(Same for G78, G79)
(2) Canned cycIe commands are modal G codes and so they are valid until another command in the same modal
group or a cancel command is issued.
The following G code cancel commands are availabIe.
GOO, GO1, G02, G03
G07
G09
GIO, Gll
G27, G28, G29, G30
G31
G33, G34
G37
G92
G52, G53
G65
(3) There are two canned cycle cali types, movement command block calI and block-by-block call. These are
selected by a control parametti setting.
A movement command block call saves to call the canned cycle macro subprogram only when there-is an
axial movement command in the canned cycle mode. The block-by-block call serves to call the canned cycle
macro subprogram in each block in the canned cycle mode. Both types are executed until the canned cycle
is canceled.
(4) A manual interrupt can be appIied while a turning canned cycle (G77 – G79) is being rsmcuted. Upon
completion of the interrupt, howtwer, the tool must be returmxl to the position where the manual interrupt
was applied and then the turning canned cycle should be resumed.
If it is resumed without the tool having been returned, all subsequent operations will deviate by an amount
equivalent to the manual interrupt.

,.

-141-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.1.C~NED CYCLES FOR TURNING

13.1.1 LONGITUDINAL CUTTING CYCLE (G77)

(1) Straight cutting
This function enables continuous straight cutting in the longitudinal direction using the following command.
G77 Xfu. Z/W. F_ ; ..-.

‘s&
z w
f’:”
x
Z axis

+
[

(2) Taper cutting

This function enables continuous taper cutting in the longitudinal direction using the following command.
G77 XfU_ ZfW_ R_ F_ ;

(R) Rapid traverse

X axis
b, 4 (R) (F} cutting feed
)t
u
3 (F) 1 (R)
2 (F) ,,T

-—z axis

. .
I

R: Taper depth (radial designation, incremental value, sign required)

With a single block, the tool stops at the end points of operations 1,2,3 and 4.

-142-
 13.PI?OGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.1.CANNED CYCLES FOR TURNING

/
Depending on the U, W and R signs, the following shapes are created,

~ U<O, W<O, R<O @ U<O, W<O, R>O

w
F w

I{
4
4 1
u ~ 1 u ~
T
x 2
.— . R
2 I ‘> -— . J ‘
R

x X

z z
L~ 1 l.-

3) U> O* W<O, R<o @ U> O, W<O, R>O

(x x

1- 2
t-
Z

- —- 2
L R

U
u 3
1
z

1 / 4

Program error “P191” (TAPER LENG ERR) results with shapes (2) and (3) unless the following condition is
satisfied.
lu/21Zlrl

-143-
13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.L CANNED CYCLES FOR TURNING

13.1.2 THREAD CUTTING CYCLE (G78)

(1) Straight thread cutting
This function enables straight thread cutting using the following command.
G78 XIU. 2VW_ l?/lL ; . ..
\

X axis

U (RJ Rapid traverse

-.. . .—-. --

---. — -———.

(2) Taper thread cutting

This function enables taper thread cutting using the following command.
G78 X/U Z/W. R_ F/E_ ;

x axis 4 (R)
J
?
(R] Rapid traverse
(F} Thrmd cutting

-— Zaxis

I
R: Taper depth (radial designation, incremental valuq sign required)

Details for chamfering

f \ a: Chamfering amount of thread

If the thread lead is assumed to be L,
then the parameter can be set in O.lL

b
units from O to 12.7L.
0
& Chamfering angle of thread ‘
The parameter can be set in 1° units
from O to 89°.
a
L /

With a single block, the tool stops at the end points of operations the 1, 3 and 4.

-144 -
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.1.CANNED CYCLES FOR TURNING

When the feed hold function is applied during a thread cutting eyclq automatic operation will stop if no thread
is then being cut. If thread cutting is proceeding, operation stops at the next movement completion position
(completion of operation 3) of the thread cutting.
The dry run valid/invalid status does not change during thread cutting. . ..
Depending on the U, W and R signs, the following shapes are created.

D u<o, WCO, R<O @ UCO, ?VCO, R>O

w I
w I
F
F
4

I‘< ;
1
u
u
1
T 3
.—
2-
R

x
x .. ,.~

z z
1- L-

9 U>o, w<o, R<o @ U>O, W<O, R>O

x x
2
z t-
L

2 R
.— -

u
z
. I:
u
T 3
4
w
1

:
Program error “P191° &APER LENG ERR) results with shapes (2) and (3) unless the following condition is
satisfied.
lu/2]=lrl

-145-
13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.1.CANNED CYCLES FOR TURNING

13.1.3 FACE CUTTING CYCLE (G79)

(1) Straight cutting
This function enables continuous straight cutting in the face direction using the following command.
G79 X/U_ Z/W. F_ ; . ..

ixis
L/
)-
1 (R)
(R): Rapid traverse
4 (R)
~ (1?) Cutting feed

,:1

z w
1 I I
-—

J
)--- - - Zaxis

(2) Taper cutting

T
This fnnetion enables continuous taper thread cutting using the following command.
G79 X/U_ 27W. R_ F_ ;

l-%
~ (RI Rapid traverse
2 (F) Cutting feed

. -— Zaxis

R: Taper depth (radial designation, incremental valu% sign required)

With a single block, the tool stops at the end points of operations 1, 2, 3 and 4.

-146 -
 PROGRAM
13. SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.1.CANNED CYCLES FOR TURNING

Depending on the U, W and R signs, the following shapes are created.

~ U< O, W<O, RcO @ U<O, W<O, R>O

r
R

l(R)

+’
,{\:i : ,[ /’ 2(F) ‘=
4(R)

I
3(F)
x

z w 1
z

B U>o, W<O* IWO @ U>O. W<04 R>(I

Program error “P191” (TAPER LENG ERR) results with shapes (2) and (3) unless the following condition is
satisfied.
lwl~lrl

-147-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLES

13.2. MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLES

These functions enable preprepared canned cycles to be executed by commanding the corresponding program in
a block.
The types of canned cycles are listed below. . ..

G code Function
G70 Finishing cycle
G71 Longitudinal rough turning cycle (finished shape Multiple repetitive
chamfering) canned cycles I
G72 Face rough turning eycle (finished shape chamfering)
G73 Stock removal in rough machining cycle
G74 Face cut-off cycle Multiple repetitive
G75 Longitudinal cut-off cycle canned rjckx II
G76 Multiple repetitive thread cutting cycle
(1)
. . If, with any of the above functions for the multiple repetitive canned cycks I (G70 – G73), the finished
shape program has not been entered in the mem&y, the function cannot be w&L
(2) The program formats are as follows.

G70 & P_ Q_ ;
G71 U_ R_ ;
G71 L P_ Q_ U. W. F_ S_ T_ ~
G72 W_ R_ ;
G72 & P_ Q_ U_ W.- F. S. T_ ;
G73 U_ W. R_ ;
G73 A_ P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_;
G74 R_ ;
G74 X(U)_ Z(W)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_;
(Same for G75)
G76 P_R_;
G76 X(U).-Z(W )- P-Q-R-F-;
(3) The ~ P and Q cmmmands of the multiple repetitive canned eycks I are described below.
1) When the A command is not present, P and Q in the program now being executed are ealkxl.
When the A command is present and the P command is not present, the head block of the program
designated by the A ecmuuand is treated as the P command.
2) When the Q command is not present, operation continues until the M99 command is located.
When both the Q and M99 commands are not present, operation tmntinues until the final block in the
finished shape program.
(4) ‘llvo pre-read blocks or more are required when creating a ftished shape program.
.—
.

-14s -
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLES

13.2.1 LONGITUDINAL ROUGH TURNING CYCLE I (G71)

This function calls the finished shape program and, while automatically calculating the tool path, performs rough
turning in the longitudinal direction.
The machining program commands are issued as follows. . ..
G71 Ud Re:
G71 AZ F@q -- Uu WY Ff.- !% T~ ;

(Cycle command point)

—
1

1 d” Cut amount

Detail of retract operation\

x (R)
(F)
~~o e /
l+
(F)
z
u/2
Finishing allowanm
* +-

Ud: Cut amount “d” (cut amount without P, Q commands) (modal) ... Variable parameter valid
Rtx Retract amount “e” (modal) ... Variable parameter valid
AZ Finished shape program number @ogram being executed when omitted)
Pp: Finished shape start sequence number (program head when omitted)
Qq: Finished shape end sequence number (up to end of program when omitted)
Up to M99 command when M99 comes first even if Q command is present
Uu X-axis direction fiishing allowance (diametrical or radial designation)
Ww: Zaxis direction finishing allowance
Ffi Cutting feed rate
Ss: Spindle speed
TE Tool command
The F, S and T commands in the finished shape program are ignored and the value in the rough
turning cycle command or previous value is yalid.

NOTE 1: A “variable parameter” is a parameter which can use a parameter setting without the issue of
a program command or a parameter which is that parameter rewritten by the program
command.

NOTE 2: The U mmmand applies to the finishing allowance when it is in the same block as the A, P
and Q commands.

-149-
13.PROGRAM’ SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLES

(1) Cutting shape

It must be ensured that the finished shape changea monotonically (increase or decrease only) in both the X-
and %axis directions. Program error “P203” (CONF. ERR) occurs with the following shapes.
(a) When there is movement away from (b)
. . When there is no Z axis movement ..
the Z axis in the second block
f
E ●S

r-
d

No Z-axis movement

(c) When finished shape X axis depth is smaller than cut amount d

....................-..
t

El__-lld
............................................................J.....
Note: In the following shape, a program error will not occur. Rough turning cycle will be executed to
the 1st block X coordinates, and the finishing amount will follow the assigned shape.

1st block X coordinate

(2) Configuration of a cycle

A cycle is composed as shown below.

4 (R)

)~
3(F)

~
y
1 (R/F)
Based on shape program
cammand
2(F)

R Rapid traverse
F: Cutting feed

-150-
 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.
13.2.MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLES

.
(3) cut amount
The cut amount is designated by “d.” However, it is possible to change the cut amount with each cutting pass
by setting the cut change amount (Ad) using a parameter.
Program error “P204” (C-FORMAT ERR) results whtm “d” is less than “Ad.”

1 d+Ad
1st cutting pass d+Ad
2 d
2nd cutting pass d
3 d–Ad
3rd cutting pass d–Ad
4 d+Ad
“i’: ;1 ‘.
4th cutting pass d+Ad 1 J d,
: {d-Ad,
I
I
d, d–Ad, d+ Ad are
1( repeated (

Final cutting pass Remainder

) A (U:nder

(4) Tool nose R compensation

When this cycle is commanded with the tool nose R compensation mode still in forcq tool nose R
compensation is applied to the finished shape program covered by this cycle and the cycle is executed for this
shape.
Howtwer, when this cycle is commanded with the tool nose R compensation mode still in -fOrce, the mode
is temporarily canceled immediately before the cycle and it starts up with the finished shape program, the end
bIock of this program serves as the pre-read prohibit block, and then compensation is applied to the shape
and executed.

( >
Temporary c.ancelation ~‘
\“
\
\ Shape with tool nose
\ i
R compensation applied { G71A_u_w_”.. ;
‘) f Command point
~/ I I
I I
i
L .- . i
-\ I

Finished shape program

[ 4

-151-
13.PR0GRAi14SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.
MULTIPLE REPET- i2MNNEDCYCLES

(5) Others
1) After the cutting, the remainder is made the cut amount. However, if this amount is less than the value
set by parameter, finishing rough turning is executed and the workpiece is not cut.
2) Finishing allowance dinxtion
The finishing allowance direction is determined by the shape as follows. A+B-C apply for the
finishing program.

z
I
BQ 913

111
U(–)w(–)
U(–)w(–)

AO ‘c co 6A

-152-
 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.
13.2.
MULTl??LEREPElT7?lZE
G4NNED CYCLES

13.2.2 FACE ROUGH TURNING CYCLE I (G72)

This function calls the finished shape program and, while automaticdy calculating the tool path, performs rough
turning in the faeo direetion. The machining program commands are issued as follows.
G72 Wd Re; . ..
G72 Ad?p-Qq
--- Uu--- Ww Ff Ss. Tt. ;

Cn I 1[ — A.-4– --...—..–>
uycm commana pomr
.-. .

42 l\

E 1 Finishing
allowance
w -1
- /

Wd: Cut amount “d” (cut amount without P, Q commands) (modal) ... Variable parameter vatid
Re Retract amount “e” (modal) ... Variable parameter valid
h Finished shape program number (program being txeeuted when omitted)
Pp: Finished shape start sequence number @rogram head when omitted)
Qq: Finished shape end sequenee number (up to end of program when omitted)
Up to M99 command when M99 comes first even if Q command is present
UU X-axis direetion finishing allowance (diametrical or radial designation)
Ww: Z-axis direction finishing allowance
Ffi Cutting feed rate
Ss Spindle sped
Tt: Tool command
The F, S and T commands in the finished shape program are ignored and the value in the rough
turning cycle cmmnand or previous value is valid.

NOTE A “variable parameter” is a parameter which ean use a parameter setting without the issue
of a program command or a parameter which is that parameter rewritten by the program
command.

NOTE The W command applies to the finishing allowance when it is in the same block as the & P
and Q commands.

-153 -
 /

13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS

13.2.
MULTIPLE REPETm CANNED CYCLES

(1) Cutting shape

It must be ensured that the finished shape changes monotonically (increase or deerease only) in both the X.
and Zkxis directions. Program error “P203” (CONF. ERR) occurs with the following shapes.
(a) ~~ th~w is movement away from (b) When there is no X axis movement
...-
in the second block

/7s
No X-axis
k

movement

LE- Movement
awav from
X &is
E

(c) When finished shape Z axis depth is smaller than cut amount d
,d:

●S

,,

-
E
Note: In the following shape, a program error wfil not occur. Rough turning cycle will be executed to
the Ist block Z coordinates, and the finishing amount will follow the assigned shape.
— —
Ist block Z coordinate ~
—
-i

-154-
 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
23.
13.2.
MULTIPLE REPET~WE C4.NNEDCYCLES

(2) Configuration of a cycle

A cycle is composed as below.

1 (R/F) ‘Based on shape program command

&

1 4 (R)
R: Rapid traverse
F: Cutting feed

v
2(F)

3(F)

(3) Cut amount

The cut amount is designated by “d.” However, it is possl%le to change the cut amount with each cutting pass
by setting the cut change amount (Ad) using a parameter.

1st cutting pass d -!-Ad

2nd cutting pass d
3rd cutting pass d - Ad
4th cutting pass d -t A d

d, d-Ad, d +Ad are

H repeated )
Final cutting Remainder
pass

(4) Tool nose R commmsation

When this cycle is commanded with the tool nose R compensation mode still in for% tool nose R
compensation is applied to the finished shape program covered by this cycle and the cycle is executed for this
shape.
However, when this cycle is commanded with the tool nose R compensation mode still in fore% the mode
is temporarily canceled immediately before the cycle and it starts up with the finished shape program, the end
block of this program serves as the pre-read prohibit block, and then compensation is applied to the shape
and executed.
f )
. .
I
..— ..— —— .—— —.— ——.
I

i Shape with tool nose

1 R compensation applied
I_—-
7

L
-155-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.
MULTIFLE REPETL!?J?E
CANNED CYCLES

(5) Others
1) After the cutting the remainder is made the eut amount. Howmwr, if this amount is less than the value
set by parameter, this cycle is not executed.
2) Finishing alIowance direction
1 e finishinz allowance direction is determined bv the shane as follows.
A BX B A

IT. U(+)w(–) I U(i-)w(+)

o
co
c
I z
co Oc

HI U(–)w(-)
m U(–)w(+)

o o
A B B .4

-156-
 PROGRAM
13. SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CXNNED CYCLES

13.2.3 STOCK REMOVAL IN ROUGH MACHINING CYCLE (G73)

This calls the finished shape program, automatically calculates the path and performs rough machining while
turning the workpicces into the fiiished shape. The machining program commands are as follows.
G73Ui WkRd; . ..
G73A%P~Q~U
——— uWw
—— FfSs
——. Tt ;

i +u/2

UT

A u/2
-1
-H-’
,
Ui: X-axis direction cutting allowance i Cutting
● allowances when P, Q commands are not
present
Wk: Z-axis direction cutting allowance k * Modal dat~ variable parameters are valid
Rd: Number of divisions d1 o Sign is ignored
o Radial designation applies to the cutting allowance.
Aa: Finished shape program number (program being emmted when omitted)
Pp: Finished shape start sequence number (program head when omitted)
Qq Finished shape end sequence number (up to end of program when omitted)
Up to M99 command when M99 comes first even if Qq command is present
Uu X-axis direction finishing allowance u ● Finishing ahowance whe~P, Q mmmands are present
Ww: Z-axis direction fiiishing allowanm w} * Sign is ignored.
Diametrical/radial designation changm in amordance
with the parameters.
The shift direction is determined by the shape. For
details, reference should be made to the “finishing
allowan~ direction” for G71.
Cutting feed rate (F function)

1
The F, S and T commands in the finished shape program are
Spindle speed (S function) ignored and the value in the rough turning cycle command or
Tool selection ~ function) previous value is valid.

NOTE 1: A “variable parameter” is a parameter which can use a parameter setting without the issue
of a program command or a parameter which is that parameter rewritten by the program
command.

NOTE 2: With a single block, operation stops” at the end point of each block.

-157 -
13.PR OGRA.M SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLES

(1) Finished shape

In the program, S + A + E in the above program are commanded.
The section between A and E must be a shape with monotonous changes in both the X-axis and Zaxis
directions.
. ..
(2) 1 cycle configuration
A cycle is configured as shown below.
/ \

2 (R) Operation 1: Based on shape program

with shape profiling
Operation 2 Rapid travq-se on return

A
\ J

(3) Cut amount

The cut amount is the value produced by dividing the cutting allowances (i, k) by the number of divisions
(d-l).
X-axis direction i/(d-1)
Z+xis direction ld(d-1)
When divisions cannot be madq chamfering is performed and adjustment is made at the final pass.

(4) Tool nose R compensation

When this cycle is commanded with the tool nose R compensation mode still in force, tool nose R
compensation is applied to the finished shape program covered by this cycle and the cycle is executo3 for this
shape.
However, when this cycle is commanded with the tool nose R compensation mode still in forcq the
compensation is temporarily canceled immediately before this cycle and started at the head block of the
finished shape program.

-158-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.MULTIPLE REPET1TIW3 CANNED CYCLES

(5) Program example

G28XZ :
GO X80.” 250. : I
G73U1O. W1O. R 3 : I
G73P1OQ2OU2. W2. F1OO. :
N1OG 1 X20. Z50. F150. :
G1 X20. Z30. :
G 1 X40. z20. :
G 1 X40. Z1O. :
N20G 1 X50. z 5. :
M02 :

ODeration
x

80.

--(
50. z

(6) Others
1) Cutting direction
The shift direction for the cutting is determined by the shape in the finishing program, as shown in the table below.
I
I 2 3 4

Draw-
ing
=-%,
s
%,
S,S

JE E

Initial + +
“-” direction
X axis I
Overall
-1- +
Z axis “-” direction I
X-axis +
“ -t-” direction
cutting I
&axis . +
cutting “+” direction

-159-’
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.MULTPLE REPETITIVE C~NED CYCLES
(2) 1 cycle configuration
The tool moves at rapid traverse for operations (l), (2), (5) and (6) in the cycle and at the cutting feed based
on the F designation for operations (3) and {4).
>

(-i)

\
a“ ‘ Ad for 1st
cutting pass
1
2nd
cutting pass
k
Ad~~
nth cutting pass
~~ Ad~fi
T Finishing allowance d
(cutting redts for “m”
number of passes)

-160-
 13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLES

13.2.4 FINISHINGCYCLE (G70)

After rough machining arid cutting have been carried out by the G71 – G73 commands, finishing cutting can be
performed by the following command. The machining program command is as below.
G70 A_ P_ Q_ ; . ..
A: Finished shape program number (program being executed when omitted)
P: Finished shape start sequence number (program head when omitted)
Q: Finished shape end sequence number (up to end of program when omitted)
UP to M99 command when M99 comes f~st even if Q command is Present
1) The F, S and T commands in the finished shape program ar; valid during the finishing qcle.
2) When the G70 cycle is completed, the tool returns to the start point by rapid traverse and the nmt
block is read.
(@ample 1) When a sequence number is designated

(
Nloo G70 P200 Q300 ;~OO ..” ;
N11O $
N300 ““” ;
\
N 120
$
N200
\ Finished shape program
N300 I

N31O
i

(Example 2) When a program number is designated

f \
t
N1OO G70 A1OO ,
N11O -“” ;
Nl~O +“” ;
GO1 X1OO 250 FO.5 ;

If the lWM cyc~e is executed in either Example 1 or Example 2, the N11O block is executed next.
.

-161-’
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.
MULTIPLE lWPETfl~ CANNED CYCLES

13.2.5 FACE CUT-OFF CYCLE (G74)

The G74 canned cycle automatically enters a groove in the face direction of the workpiece by commanding the
coordinates of the groove end point, cut amount, cutter shift amount and cutter escape at the bottom of the cut.
The machining program commands are as follows.
. ..
G74Re — ;

G74X/(U)~Z(w)~Pi Qk Rd
——— Ff— ;

z w J (start
. Operation (9) as well as operation (12)
@ point)
immediately before the final cycle are
f I s executed with the remainder amount.

. Operations (2), (4), (6), (8); (10), (11)

and (12) are executed at the rapid
traverse rate. “
/2

I& Return amount (no X/U, P commands) (modal) ... Variable parameter valid
X/ux: B point X coordinate (absolute/incremental value)
Zfwx B point Z coordinate (absolutc#incremental value)
Pi: Tool shift amount (radial designation, incremental vahq sign not required)
Qk: Cut amount (radial designation, incremental valuq sign not required)
Rd Escape at the bottom of the cut
Ff: Feed rate
(1) Single block stop
Operation stops at each block from (1) through (12).

(2) Others
1) “e” can also be sti by parameter. (It is rewritten by the Program command.)
2) When X/U and P ar~ &rdtted or when the valu~ o~ “x” &d-”i” are zero, operation will apply to the
Z axis only.
3) A case where the X/U or Z/W command is not,preaent is trmted as the assignment of a parameter
setting command (G74 Re). If 12e as weIl as the X/U or Z/W command is not present, no processing
results.
4) When the value of cut amount “k” is higher than hole depth “w:’ the command is executed with “k”
equal to %.”
5) A program error results in the following cases. (P204 C-FORMAT ERR)
a) When “i” is zero or P has not been commanded even though X/U has been commanded
b) When tool shift amount “i” is greater than the “x” movement amount
c) When the escape amount “d” is greater than the shift amount “i”
d) When the return amount “e” is greater than the cut amount “k”

-162-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.
MULTDLE REPEZlllVECANNED CYCLES

13.2.6 LC)NGITUI)XNAL CUT-OFF CYCLE (G75)

The G75 canntil cycle automatically enters a groove in the face direction of the workpiece by commanding the
coordinates of the groove end point, cut amount, cutter shift amount and cutter escape at the bottom of the cut.
The machining program commands are as folIows. . ..
G75 R& ;

G75W(U)X
. ,_ Z/(w)z
.,— Pi— Ok
-——Rd Ff. :.

* Operation (9) as well as operation (12)

immediately before the final cycle are
----- . executed with the remainder. amount.
i
e * Operations (2), (4J (6), (8), (10), (11)
: and (12) are emzuted at the rapid
i
traverse rate.
------ --
i /2

i
~

------- - [
B
c
-i

RG Return amount (no XJU, P commands) (modaI) ... Variable parameter valid
XfUx: B point X coordinate (absolute@xemental value)
Z/Wz B point Z coordinate (absolutdincremental value)
Pi: Cut amount (radial designation, incremental valuq sign not required)
Qk: Tool shitl amount (radial designation, incremental valuq sign not required)
Rd: Escape at the bottom of the cut
Ffi Feed rate
(1) Single block stop
Operation stops at each block from (1) through (12).
(2) Others
1) %.” can also be set by parameter. (.R is rewritten by the program command.)
2) When VW and Q are omitted or when the values of “z” and “k” are zero, operation (groove cutting)
will apply to the X axis only.
3) A case where both the X/U and 2YW commands are not present is treated as the assignment of a
parameter setting command (G75 Re). If Re as w’ellas the X/U and 27W commands is not present, no
processing results.
4) When the vrdue of cut amount “i” is higher than hole depth “u/2J’ the command is executed with “i”
equal to “u/2.”
5) A program emor results in the following cases. (P204 C-FORMAT ERR)
a) When “k” is zero or Q has not been commanded men though WW has been commanded
b) When tool shift amount “k” is greater than the “z” movement amount
c) When the escape amount “d” is greater than the shift amount “k”
d) When the return amount “e” is greater than the cut amount ‘(i”

-163-
13. PROGRAM
SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.
MULTIPLE REPEIYIWl?iMNiVEDCYCLES

13.2.7 MULTIPLE REPETPHVE THREAD CUTTING CYCLE (G76)

The G76 canned cycle enables the workpiece to be cut at the desired angle by designating the thread cutting start
point and end point, and it automatically cuts so that the cutting cross section (cutting torque) per cutting pass
is constant.
Various longitudinal direction thrmds can be cut by bearing in mind the commands for the tli&ad end point
coordinate and taper height component.
(1) Command format
G76Pmra
—— QAdmin R~;
G76X/U_ ZNV. RiPk—.— QAd F&;
m. Number of cutting passes for finishing 00 – 99 (modal)
K Chamfering amourk 00 – 99 (modal)
The chamfering width based on thread lead “t’” is designated by a 2digit integer wi~hout decimal
point from 0.0 f to 9.9{.
& Tool nose angle (thread height angle] 00 – 99 (modal)
The angle from O” to 99” is assigned in 10 units.
“m,” “ r“ and “a” are canmanded in succession in address P.
(Example)
When m=5, r= 1.5 and a =0° P is 051500 or P0515~ and the leading and trailing zeroes cannot be omitted.
Ad rnim Minimum cut amount (modal)
This is the clamping value for guaranteeing the cut depth of a single cutting pass and it is valid
only for rough machining. Finishing is performed by the cutting allowance designated separately.
When the calculated value for the cut amount of a single cutting pass is less than Ad rein, the
ckunping is performed at Ad min.
d: Finishing allowance (modaI)
X/u X-axis end point coordinate of thread ... The X coordinate of the end point for the thread is
commanded by an absolute or incremental value.
m 2hxis end point coordinate of thread ... The Z coordinate of the end point for the thread is
commanded by an absolute or incremental value.
“.
1. Taper height component (radial value) for thread ... straight thread when “i” is zero
k: Thread height ... This is commanded by a positive radial value.
Ad: cut amount ... The cut amount of the fiist cutting pass is commanded by a positive radial valu~
& Thread lead

NOTE 1: The two above G76 commands cannot be placed in the same block.
The data commanded by P, Q and R are automatically identified aumrding to the presence
or absence of the X/U and Z/W axis addresses.

-NOTE 2: Parameter settings can be used for the above “~” “r,” “a:’ “Ad rein” and “d” modal data
but these parameter settings are rewritten by the program commands.

NOTE 3: The chamfering amount designation is valid even for thread cutting cycles.

NOTE 4 Program error “P204” (C-FORMAT ERR) results in the following cases.
a) When “a” is outside the rating
b) When both the X and Z mmmands have not been issued or when the start and end point
coordinates are the same for either the X or Z command.
c) When the thread height is greater than the movement of the X axis at the thread bottom

NOTE 5: The checkpoints for the thread cutting command (G33) and thread cutting cycle (G78)
should be observed.

-164-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.MULTIPLE REPETITIW? CANNED CYCLES

(2) Example of program

X ‘&is II ..-

The tool moves at rapid

I ~i — traverse over the thick line
sections and at the cutting
feed based on the F
designation over the threa<
I cutting sections.

Y ‘-T-r--t-- -—-===-t- I ‘“

I 24. () I 4(? (1 I

G76 ~ P021560 QO.1 RO.2 ;

G76 U -40.0 W -46.0 R9.O P6.O Q3.5 F4.O ;
(4) Interrupt operation
1) When the feed hold button is pressed while G76 is being executed, automatic operation will stop upon
completion of a block without thread cutting if thread cutting is ongoing. @he feed hold lamp lights
immtxliately in the feed hold mode and it goes off when automatic operation stops.) If thread cutting
is not ongoing, the feed hold lamp lights and the feed hold status is established.
2) The tool stops upon completion of operations (l), (4) and (5) when the mode is switched to another
automatic mode during the G76 command execution, when automatic operation is changed to manual
operations or when single block operation is conducted.
3) The dry run valid/invalid status during G76 execution does not change during thread cutting.

,
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLES

13.2.8 CHECKPOINTS FOR MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLES

(G70 – G76)
(1) Except for the parameters which have been preset on the setting and display unit, command all the required
parameters in the blocks containing the multiple repetitive canned cycle commands.
(2) Providtzl that the finished shape program has been entered in the memory, multiple repgtiifie canned cycle
I commands can be executed in the memory, MDI or tape operation mode.
(3) When executing a G70 – G73 Wmmand, ensure that the sequence number of the finished shape program
which is stop with P and Q is not duplicated in that program.
(4) The finished shape program specified by P and Q in the G71 — G73 blocks should be prepared so that the
maximum number of blocks is 50 for all the commands for comer chamfering coma rounding and other
commands including the automatic insertion blocks based on tool nose R compensation. If this number is
exceeded, program error “P202” (BLOCK OVR (MRC)) results.
(5) The finished shape program which is designated by the G71 — ‘G73 blocks should be a program with
monotonous changes (iicreasea or reductions only) for both the X and Z axes.
(6) Blocks without movement in the finished shape program are ignored.
(7) N, F, S, M and T commands in the finished shape program are ignored.
@) When any of the following commands are present in a finished shape program, program error “P201”
@ROG. ERR (MRC>) results.
o Commands r~lated ~o reference point return (G27, G28, G29, G30)
o Thrmd cutting (G33)
o Canncxl cycles
o Skip functions (G31)
(9) If subprogram call or macro calI commands are pr~nt in the finished shape program, these commands will
alm be executed.
However, these wilI not be executed if there is a subprogram call in the final block of the finished shape
program.
(lo) Except for thread cutting qcles, operation stops at the end (start) point of each block in the single block
mode.
(11) Remembw that, depending on whether the sequence or program number is designated, the next block upon
completion of the G71, G72 or G73 command will differ.
1) When the sequence number is designated 2) When the program number is designated
The next block is the next block designated The next block is the next block of the cycle
by Q. command.

\ \
N1OO G71P200 Q500 U ——
W “-- : N 100 G71A1OO T.J_W_””- ; \
N200 N200 ~

1
d
N300 N300
N400 Finished shape program N400
100
N500 Nloxloo. 250. ;
N600
N20 {
:. .

Operation moves to the N600 block upon Operation moves to the N2Ml block upon
m-mpktion of the cycle. completion of the cycle.

-166-
 13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.2.MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLES

(12) The next block applying upon completion of the G70 command is the next block of the command block.
K

$
. ..
Nloo ““”... :

pJ~(jo ., .... .
N300 “..”””;
N400 “..””. :
N500 --- ;
\
N1ooOG7OP2OO Q500 ; (or G70A100 ;)
NI1OO.””-. :
{
\ J

Operation moves to the N11OOblock upon completion of the G70 command.

<13) It is possible to apply a manual interrupt while a multiple repetitive canned cycle command’ (G70 – G76)
is being executed. However, upon completion of the interrupt, the tool must first be returned to the position
where the interrupt was applied and then the multiple repetitive canned cycle must be rcatarted.
If it is restarted without the tool having been returned, all subsequent movements will deviate by an amount
equivalent to the manual interrupt amount.
(14) Multiple repetitive canned cycle commands are unmodal commands and so they must be issued every time
thq are requirtxl.
(15) Program error “P203” (COIJF. ERR) results with the G71 and G72 commands even when, because of tool
nose R compensation, there is no further movement of the Z axis in the second block or the Z axis has moved
in the opposite direction.
(16) The settings of the common variables in the G70 to G73 ftished shape program are ignored, and the settings
before the rough turning cycle will become valid.
(1V If there is a circukir command in the fust movement block of the ftished shape program, the program error
“P201 PROG.EllR (MRC)” will occur.

-167-’
13.P.ROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.3.HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLES lG80 – G89)

13.3. HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLES (G80 — G89)

(1) Function and objective
These canned cycles are used for predetermined sequences of machining operations such as normal
positioning, hole machining, drilling and tapping which are specified in a block. The various sequences
ava.ilable using the-se functions are listed in the table below.

Hole
Hole machining Operation at hole
G code ruachin- I&turn operation Application
start bottom
ing axis
G80 – — — — Cancel
Cutting feed, Deep hole drilling
G83 z Dwell Rapid traverse
intermittent feed cycle
Dwell, spindle
G84 z cutting feed Cutting fed Tapping cycle
reverse rotation
G85 z cutting fed Dwell Cutting feed Boring cycle
Cutting fed, Deep hole drilling
G87 x Dwell Rapid traverse
intermittent feed cycle
Dwell, spindle
G88 x cutting feed Cutting feed Tapping cycle
reverse rotation
G89 x Cutting fed Dwell Cutting fed Boring cycle

A canned cycle mode is canceled when the G80 or any G command in the 01 group is issued. The various data
will also be- cleared simultaneously to zero.
(2) Command format
1) Face hole machining

] G~~x/Lc/H
~
z/w_R_Q_P_F
1301eposition-
ing data L
K_;
~Number
Hole machining data
of repetitions

I ~ Hole machining mode (G83, GM, G&l)

2) Longitudinal hole machining

~
G&DZ/w_C /H_X/U_R_Q_p_F Kw. ;

1-1301eposition-
1- ing data L Number of repetitions
Hole machining data
Hole machining mode (G87, G88, G89)

3) camel
G80 ;

-168-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.3.HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLES {G80 – G/J9)

4) Data outline and corresponding addresses

a. Hole machining modes These are the canned cycle modes for drilling (G83, G87), tapping (G84,
G88) and boring (G85, G89).
These am modal mmmands and once they have been issyd, they wiIl
remain valid until another hole machining mode command, the cancel
command for the hole machining mmned cycle or a G command in the 01
group is issued.
b. Hole positioning datm These are for the positioning of the X @) and C axes.
These are unmodal data, and they are commanded block by block when the
same hole machining mode is to be tviecuted continuously.
c. HoIe machining data These are the actual machining mode.
Ikept for Q, they are modal. Q in the G83 or G87 command is unmodal
and is commanded block by block as required.
d. Number of repetitions: This number is designated for machining holes at equal intervals when the
same cycle is to be repeated.
The setting range is from O through 99W, the decimal point is not valid,
The number is unmodal and is valid only in the block in which it has been
assigned.
When this number is not designated, it is treated as K1. When KO is
designated, the hole machining data are stored in the memoq but no holes
will be machined.

Address Significance
Selection of hole machining cycle sequence
G
(G80, G83, G84, G85, G87, G88, G89)
X/u (22-W)*, cm Designation of hole position initial point
(absolute/incremental value)
ZIW (X/Uy Designation of hole bottom position
(absolutdincremental value from reference point)
Ikignation of reference point position
R
(incremental value from initial po int) (sign ignored)
Designation of cut amount for each cutting pass with
Q G83 (G87} always incremental valuq radial value (sign
ignored)
Designation of dwell time at hole bottom point; relation-
P ship between time and designated value is same as for
G04 designation
F Designation of fed rate for cutting feed
Designation of number of repetitions, O — 9999
K
{standard = 1’I

* Addresses in parentheses apply for commands G87, G88 and G89.

-169-
—
 OGRAM SUPPORT
13. PI? FUNCTIONS
13.3.HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLES (G80 — G89]

(3) Outline drawing

The hole machining axes for the hole machining canned cycle and the positioning are shown in the outline
drawing below.

During the hole machining eyclq the C axis (spindle) is clamped

so that it does not move.

“\
?
24 c

Rotary tool for X axis

/ 1+,
+x
Rotary tool for Z

Commands M03, M04 and M05 (forward rotation, reverse rotation

and stop) apply to the rotary tools.

-170-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.3.HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLES (G80 – G89)

(4) Operations
There are 7 actual operations which are each described in turn below.
F \ Operation 1: This denotes theposition-
ing (by rapid traverse) of
the tool to the X (Z) and
operation 1 Operation 2~ C axis initial point.
Initial point
Operation 2 This is output provided
that the M code for C axis
Operation 3 Operation 7 clamping is issued.
R point Operation 3 The tool is positioned as
far as the R point by rapid
traverse. .
Operation 4 Operation 6
Operation 4 Hole mach~ing is
conducted by cutting
~1, Operation 5 fed.
L Operation 5: This operation takes place
at the hole bottom
position and it differs ac-
cording to the canned
cycle mode. Possible ac-
tions include spindle
reverse rotation (M&l),
spindle forward rotation
(M03) and dwell.
Operation 6 The tool is retracted as far
as the R point.
Operation % The tool is returned as far
as the initial point at the
rapid traveme rate.
(Operations 6 and 7 may be a singIe operation depending on the canned cycle ruode.)
Whether the canned cycle is to be completed at operation 6 “or 7 can be selected by the following G commands.
G98 .... Initial hwel return
G99 .,.. R point level return
These G commands are modal. Onq for instanq G98 is designated, the G98 mode will remain valid until the
G99 command is issued. The G98 mode is established in the initialized state when the NC unit is rmdy to operate.

. .

-171-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.3.HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLES (G80 – G89)

13.3.1 G83 FACE DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE 1 (G87 LONGITUDINAL

DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE 1)
(1) When the Q command is present (deep hole drilling)
G83(G87)X (Z) C Z(x) Rr Qq PpFf KkMm ;
-. -—— —.— _ ..

9 TYP~ A and B an be selwt~ by the control parameter (G83/87 high speed).

* Return amount “d” is set by the preparatory parameter ((383 return). The tool returns at rapid traverse.
* (Ma): The M ~de (Mm) is output when there is a C axis clamping M code command @fro).
* ~~): The C-~IS ~clampmg M code (C-axis clamp M code + I = Mm+ 1) is output when there is a C axis
clamping M code command (Mm).
0 &’) Dwell is perforrn~ for the<d~ration equivalent to the time designated by P.
* ~)’: Aft~r the C-~lS unclamping M code (Mm+ 1) has been output, dwell is performed for the duration
eqmvalent to the time set by the machine parameter (cImp_ D).

-172-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.3.HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLES {G80 — G$9)

(2) When the Q command is not present (drilling)

G83 (G87) X (Z). C. Z (X)_ R_ P_ F_ K. M_ ;

G98 mode G99 mode “‘“

Initial point % ‘itia’pOint

(Ma;
( (Mf91*@’
(Ma)

(
Referenee point
Reference point (MB)-
0’

H z point @ k Z poin@

. See (1) for details on Ma, M& (P) and (P)’.

133.2 G84 FACE TAPPING CYCLE (G88 LONGITUDINAL TAPPING CYCLE)
G84 (G88) X (Z)_ C_ Z (X)_.R_ l?. F_ K_ M. ;

G98 mode G99 mode

-- Rotary tool * Rotary tool

Initial point U~ MM point
(Ma}
‘T t
I&femme point
Referenee point
(hl B ) (M8)
>owGiJrotation
o
l&var?~otation o
rotary tool rotary tool
Reverse rotation of Reverse rotation of
rotary tool —i Z point @ rotary tool ~ Z point @

— .

See (1) in Seetion 13.3.1 for details on Ma. M13. 0?) and (IV.
Whi~e’G84 (G88) is being executed, theovernde &&~el sta&~ is established and 100% override is automatically
applied. Dry run is also ignored.
When feed hold is applied while G84 (G88) is being rxecuted, the rdum operation is first completed and then
block stop results.
The in-tapping signal is output in a G84 (G88) modal operation.
The tool stops at the reference point before moving on and the rotary tool forward rotation signal is output.
The rotation of the rotary tool is reversed at the hole bottom and tap return is performed.
Before the rotary tool reverse (M&l) or forward rotation (M03) signal is output, the earmed cycle subprograms
should be edited if the rotary tool stop (NK)5) command is required..4-

-173-
13.PR 0GRAh4 SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.3.HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLES ~G80 – G89]

13.3.3 G85 FACE BORING CYCLE (G89 LONGITUDINAL BORING CYCLE)

G85 (G89) X (Z)_.C_ Z (X). R_ P_ F. K. M– ;

7/5,t
~$,$
G98 mode G99 mode --

. See (1) in Section 13.3.1 for details on Ma, M& (P) and (P)’.
. The tool returns to the reference point at a cutting feed rate which is double the designated feed rate
command. However, it does not aced the maximum cutting feed rate.

133.4 G80 HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE CANCEL

This cummand cancels the hole machining canned cycles (G83, G84, G85, G87, G88, G89). The hole machining
mode and hole machining data are also c&celed. “ -

13.3.5 CHECKPOINTS FOR USING HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLES

1) When the GM and G88 canned cycle commands are issued, the rotary tool must be rotated in the
prmcriied direction beforehand using a miscellaneous function (M3, M4).
2) If the basic axis, additional axis and R data are present in the block, hole machining is performed in
a canned cycle modq it will not be performed if the data are not present.
Even if the X-axis data are present, hole machining will not result if a dwell (G04) time command is
present in the block.
3) The hole machining data (Q, P) data should be commanded in the block @lock including the basic axis,
additional axis and R data) in which the holes are machimxl.
The modal data will not be updated even if these data are commanded in a non- hole machining block.
4) When resetting is applied during the mecution of the G85 (G89) command, the F medals may change.

-174-
 13. PR OGR”AM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.3.HOLE MACHLNING C~NED CYCLES {G80 – G89]

5) The hole machining canned cycles are also canceled by any G code in the 01 group except G80. If it
is commanded in the same block as the canned cycl~ the canned cycle wfll be ignored.
= 01 group cod% n = hole machining canned cycle code
(a) Gm G~aX (z). C_ Z (x)._, & Q_ P_ K_a
-1--1 Memorized .-.

II ~ Ignored
IZmcuted
\R_ Q_ P_ K.,
Memorized

~~giii
Emmules:
. G01G83 XIOO. C30. 2250.R–10. Q1O. P1 F1OO. :
G&$GOl X1OO.C30. Z50. R–10. Q1O. P1 F1OO. ;
In both cases, GO1 X1OO.C30. Z50. F1OO. is exemted.
6) When a miscellaneous command is issued in the same block as the canned cycle command, it is output
at the same time as the initial positioning.
However, if the C-axis clamping M code which has been set by parameler (machine parameter basic
2—16 clmp_ M) is commanded in the same block, the M code will be output after positioning
(operation 2).
After the holes have been machined, the tool returns to the return point (initial point in G98 modq
referenee point in G99 mode). Then the C-axis unclamping M code (clamp M + 1) is output and dwell
is performed for the duration of time set by the parameter (machine parameter basic 2—11 clmp_ D).
When the number of cutting passes has been designated, the above control is exercised for the initial
pass only ezcept for the C-axis clamping M code. In the case of the C-axis clamping/unclamping M
commands, operation is modal and the code is output with each cutting pass until the operation is
canceled by the canned cycle cancel command.
7) When a tool length offset command ~ function) is issued in a hole machining canned cycle modq
execution will follow the tool kngth offset function.
8) When a hole machining canned cycle command is issued during tool nose R campensatioq program
error “P155” (J?-CYC ERR(CC)) results.
9) Operation is fixed to initial point level return with the G code system 1. It is not possible to change the
return level using G98/G99. It should be borne in mind that if G98 or G99 is commanded, a different
function will be extxxted.

-175 -i
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.4.DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE 2 tG83.2j

13.4. DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE 2 (G83.2)

(1) Function
The deep hole drilling cycle 2 drills deep holes in the X-axis or Zaxis direction by commanding the X or Z
coordinates of the end point and the cut amount with cutting feed. . ..
(2) Command format
G83.2 W/ZfU/X_ R_ L K_& Q_ J_ F_;

Addrtm Significance
WIZJUIX Incremental value from hole machining start point/coordinates of hole bottom
(with sign)
R Incremental value (no sign) from present position up to hole machining start
I point, always radial value with incremental value
1 Cut amount of first cutting pass (no sign), always radial value with incremental

l--
I
K

A
value.
Cut amount of second and subsequent cutting passes (no sign), always radial
value with incremental value.
Drill stop safety distance for second and subsequent cutting passes (no sign]
always radial value with incremental value.
I
Dwell time at cut point (no sign, decimal point invalid)
DwelI time at return point (no sign, decimal point invalid)
Cutting fed rate

Gperation

(For Z-axis direction)

—.. .
lf21— c n I Dwell J

-176-
 OGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13. PI/
13.4.DEEP HOLE DRLLLING CYCLE 2 CG83.2j

(3) Example of program (when deep hole drilling cycle 2 is used as a modal command)

G28 XZ ;
GO XO. ZO. ; ...(1) . ..
G83.2 Zl10. R20. 130. K20. A5. Q1OOO
J500 F300. ; ...(2)
Xloo. ; ...(3)
X50. ; ...(4)
M02 ;

tieration
x

100. ---- 4 Q %iniig

3
pi
1
Movement ,
as far as “b Movement as far as X50.
Xloo. !l

I
i
I
I
I
I

Hole
~--yo ~; ;0
z. ll&@ “chin?

-177-
 1,

13.4. DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE 2 (G83.2)

(4)
., Detailed description
1) When th~drill stop safety distance (address “A”) command is not given, the preparato~ “G83 return
amount” parameter setting is used.
2) The deep hole drilling cycle 2 is a modal command and so it will remain valid until a command in the
same modal group or the cancel command (G80) is issued. . ..
3) If the command either for the cut amount (addres “1”) of the first cutting pass or the cut amount
(address “K”) for the second and subsequent passes is not present (including a command value of
zero), the value of the command which is present will be used and the operation will be executed with
both I and K equal to the command value.
If both commands are not present, hole machining is conducted once as far as the hole bottom.
4) When the axis address of the hole machining axes has been commanded a multiple number of times in
a block, the address commanded last is valid.
5) The hole machining canned cycle 2 is also canceled. by. any G code
-------in the 01 group except G80. If it is
commanded in the same block as the canned cycle, the canned cycle will be ignored. .
m= 01 group cod% n = hole machining canned cycle code

AX (z)_ C_ Z (x).-, & I- K- L Q_ J./F. ;,

Memorized
Ignored
Executed ,
Ignored
Em2cllted

R_ I- K. & Q- J-,’F.~
Memorized
Ignored
Executed
Ignored

=amp]=
. G01G83.2 250. R-10. 18. K1O. A3. Q1OOO3500 F1OO. ;
G83.2G01 Z50. R-10. 18. K1O, A3. Q1OOOJ500 FIOO. ;
In both cas~ GO1 2?50. F1OO. is ezecutcd.

6) When a miscellaneous command is issued in the same block as the deq hole drilling cyc~e2 command,
it is output at the same time as the initial positioning.
7) When a tool length offset command (T function) is issued in the deep hole drilling cycle 2 &odq
execution will follow the tool length offset function.
8) If the basic axis, additional axis or R data are in the block during the deep hole drilling cycle 2 mod%
hole machining is performed; if the data are not present, no holes are machined.
Even if the X-axis data are present, no hoks will be machined if the dwell (G04) time command is
present in the block.
9) Command the hole machining data (~ I, K, Q, J) in the block (iicluding the basic axis, additional axis
or R data) in which the hole machining operation is conducted.
Even if they are cmnrnanded in a block with no hole machining operation, the modal data will not be
updated.
10) A program error redts with the following comfiands.
(a) When both the X hole machining axis (command address X or U) and the Z hole machining axis
(command address Z or W) have been commanded (“P33” FORMAT ERROR)
(b) When any axis mcept X or Z (any command address except X, U, Z and W) has been commanded
(“P33” FORMAT ERROR)
11) When the fed hold button is pressed while the deep hole drilling cycle 2 is being ezecuted, feed hold
results at that point, and when automatic operation is restarted, the remainder is emxutcd.
12) When an interrupt based on manual operation is performed during the feed hold (manual absolute
switch ON), the operation in the deep hole drilling cycle 2 modal is shifted from the automatic
operation restart by an amount equivalent to the movement caused by the interrupt.
13) With single block operation, block stop results upon completion of the deep hole drilling cycle 2
command.

-178-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.5.SUBPROGUM CONTROL (M98, M99)

13.5. SUBPROGRAM CONTROL (M98, M99)

(1) Function and objective
Fixed sequences or repeatedly used patterns can be stored in the memory as subprograms which can then be
called from the main program when required. M98 sewes to call subprograms and M99 serves to return
operation from the subprogram to the main program. Furthermor~ it is possible to call othei”subprograms
from particular subprograms and the nesting depth can include as many as 8 levels.

Main program Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram

FKFM513 (Level 1)
+
(Level 2)
Nesting depth
(Level 3) (f-eve] 8)

The table below shows the functions which can be executed by adding and combining the tape storing and editing
functions, subprogram control functions and canned cycle functions.

Case 1 case 2 Case 3 Case 4

1. Tape storing and editing Yes Yes Yes Yes
2. Subprogram control No Yes Yea No
3. Canned cycles No No Yea Yes
Function
L Memo~ operation o 0 0 0
2. Tape editing (main memory) o 0 0 0
3. Subprogram call x o 0 x
4. Subprogram variable designation (Note 2) x o 0 x
5. Subprogram nesting level call (Note 3) x o 0 x
6. Canned wcles x x o 0
7. Canned cycle subprogram editing x x o 0

. .
N07X2 1: “O” denotes a function which can be used and “X” a function which cannot be used.

NOTE 2 Variabl= cannot be transferrwl with the M98 command but variable commands in
subprograms can be used provided that the variable command option is available.

NOTE 3: A maximum of 8 nesting levels form the nesting depth.

-179-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.5.SUBPROGM CONTROL [M98, M99)

(2) Command format

Subprogram call

Number of subprogram repetitions (L1 if omitted)

“8 ‘L= Sequence number in subprogram to be ealkxl (imd block if omitted)
Program number of subprogram to be called (own program if omitted)
P can only be omitted during memory operation and MDI operation.
Return to main program from subprogram
“99 P_ L_ :
Sequence number of return destination (returned to block following block to be
~.11.ifomitt.)
~ Number of tim& after repetition number has been changed .
(3) Creating and entering subprograms
Subprograms have the same format as machining programs for normal memory opexation except that the
subprogram completion instruction M99 (J?_ L_ ) is entered as an independent block at the last block.
OAAAAAAAA Probram number as subprogram
.............................
. ............................
Main body of subprogram

.............................
M99 ; Subprogram return command
% (EOR) Entry completion code (% with ISO code and EOR with EIA code)
The above program is entered by editing operations at the setting and display unit. For further details, refer to the
section on program editing in the Control Instructions.
Only those_&bprograms n~mbers ranging from 1 through 99999999 designated by the optional specifications can
be used. When there are no program numbers on the tapq they are entered as the setting number for “program
input.” Up to 8 nesting levels can be used for calling programs from subprograms, and program error “P230”
results if this number is exceaded.
No distinction between main programs and subprograms is made since they are entered in the sequence in which
they were read. This means that main programs and subprograms should not be given the same numbers. (If they
arq error “EII” appears during entry.)

.................... .
*
. I
Subprogram A
“’99 ;
%
Y J
 ,’

13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS

13.5.SUBPROGRAM CONTROL {M98, M99)

OAAAA
....................
.
;
;
1 Subprogram B
M“99 ;
%
.
7
J

1
Oclclcn ;
.................... ;
.
Subprogram C
M“99 ;
%
.
9

NOTE 1: Main programs can be entered during memo~, tape or MDI operation but subprograms
must be entered in the memory.

NOTE 2: Besides the M98 command, subprogram nesting is subject to the following commandx
. G&l Macro call
“ G&i Modal call
. G66.1: Modal Cd
- G code call
. Miscelkmeous function call (M, S, T, elc.)
“ MDI interrupt
o Macro interrupt

NOTE 3: Subprogram nesting is not subject to the following commands which can be called even
beyond the 8th nesting leved.
“ Canned cycles
“ Pattern cycles

. .

-181-1
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.5.SUBPROGRAM CONTROL {M98, M99)

(4) Subprogram execution

M98: Subprogram call command
M99: Subprogram return command
. ..
Command format
M98 P PI H hl L II ;

Subprogram number Sequence number No. of repetitions

Where P = Subprogram number to be called by the numerical value of pl with up to 8 digits
H. = Any sequence number within the subprogram to be called by the numerical value of hl with up to 5
digits
L = N&aber of repetitions from 1 to 9999 with numerical value of II up 104 digits; if L is omitted, the
function is executed oncq with LO, there is no execution.
For instance
M98 PI L3 ; is equivalent to the following
M98 P1 ;
M98 PI ;
M98 PI ;
@ample 1) When there are 3 subprogram calls (known as 3 nesting levels)

Main program Subprogram 1 Subprogram 2 Subprogram 3

M98P1 ; M9$P10~

)K’” ~ *\\K’ ~ ,s’ J*

M02 : M99 ; M99 : M99 ;

For nesting, the M98 and M99 commands should always be,paired off on a 1:1 basis (1)’ for (l), (2)’ for (2), etc.
Modal information can be rewritten according to the execution sequence without distinction between main
programs and subprograms. This means that after calling a subprogram, attention must be paid to the modal data
status when programming.

-182-
 PROGRAM
13. SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.5.SUBPROGRAM CONTROL {M98, M99]

(Example 2) The M98H ; M99P- ; commands designate the sequence numbers in a .-

program with a call
instruction.
\
hi98H_ ; M99P_ :
0123: -“-

E,
NlCO_
M98H 3 :
M98 P 123::
N!330_:
) NWl_ :
N3_: N4W_ ;
~: <‘ ,)
) M99P1(X): -
M99 : ~ Search

(Example 3) Main program M98 P2;

01;
.
Subprogram 1
M$9 ; )
%
02;

N2m ; Subprogram 2

Mb9 ;
1
%
03 ;

N200 ;
. Subprogram 3
. 1
M99 ;
% .J

NOTEk 1: When the 02 N200 block is searched with the memory search function, the modal data from
02 through N200 are updated.

NOTEI 2: The same sequence number can be used with different subprograms.

NOTTl 3: When the subprogram is to be repeatedly used, it wiIl be repeatedly executed for II times
provided that M98 Pp, --- Ll, ---
; is programmed.
(5)
., Other cautions -
1) Program error “P232” results when the designat&l program number (P) is not located.
2) Single block stop does not occur with the M98P_ ; M99 ; block. If any address except 0, N, P, ,L or
His used, single block stop can be executed. (With X1OO.M98 P1OO;, operation branches to O1OOafter
X1OO.is executed.)
3) When M99 is commanded by the main program, operation returns to the head. (This is same for MDI.)
4) Operation can branch from tape or BTR operation to a subprogram by M98P_ but the sequence
number of the return destination cannot be designated with M99P_ ;. (P_ is ignored.)
5) Bear in mind that the search operation will take time when the sequence number is designated by
M99P_ ;.

-183-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.6.VARIABLE COMMANDS

13.6. VARIABLE COMMANDS

(1) Function and objective
Programming ean be endowed with flexibility and general-purpose capabilities by designating variables,
instead of giving direct numerical values to particular addresses in a program, and by assigning the values
of those variables as required when executing a program.

(2) Command format

#A AA= OOOOOOOO or#AAA= [formula]

(3) Detailed description

a. Variable expressions tiample
1) #m ... m = value consisting of O—9 # 100
2) #fill
-- ... f = one of the following in the formula # [--?$1201 “
Numerieal value m - 123 -
Variable # 543
Formula Operator Formula #no + # 119
- (minus) formula -#120
~orsmda] [# 119]
Function [formula] Sm [# 110]

NOTE 1: The 4 standard operators are +, -, * and/.

NOTE 2: Functions cannot be used unless the user macro specifications are available.

NOTE 3 Error “P241” results when a variable number is negative.

NOTE 4 fiamplea of incm-reet variable expressions are given below.

Incorrect correct
# 6/2 4 # [6/2]
#54-. # [-[-51
#+#l] + #[- #1]
b. Types of variables
The following table gives the types of variables.

Type of Number Function Remarks

variabIe
Common 100-149, Can be used in common throughout main, Type A
variables 500-549 sub and macro programs. 100 sets
Local variablea 1–32 Can be used for local variables in macro User macro
programs. specifications
required
System looo– Application is fixed by system. User macro
variables . . specifications
required
Canned cycle 1–32 Local variables in canned cycle programs User macro
variables specifications
required

NOTE 1: All common variables are retained even when the power is switched off.

NOTE 2: The common variabks for the 330HL system are divided into the following two types.
Common variables 1: 500–549, variabkx which can be used in common through all
systems
Common variables 2:100-149, variables which can be used in common in the programs
of the system

-184-
 13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.6.I?ARL4-BLECOMMANDS

c. VanabIe quotations
Variables can be used for all addresses except O, N and / (slash).
1) When the variable value is used directly:
x#l ................................. VaIue of #1 is used as the X vzdue. . ..
2) When the complement of the variable value is used:
X42 ................................ Value with the #’2 sign changed is used as the X value.
3) When defining variabkw
“#3=#5 .......................... Variable #3 uses the equivalent value of variable #5,
#1 = 1000 ....................... Variable #1 uses the equivalent value 1000 (which is treated as 1000.),
4) When defiiing the variable arithmetic formula%
#l = * + #2 -100 ...... The value of the arithmetic result of #3 + #2 -100. is used as the #1
value.
x [#l + #3 -i- 1000] ......... The value of the arithmetic result of #l + #3 + 1000. is used as the X
value.

NOTE 1: A variable cannot be defkmd in the same block as an address. It must be defined in a semrate
.
block.
Irlwrrect CQrrect
x#l=#3+ loo; +#1=#3+ loo ;
Xif$l;

NOTE Z Up to five sets of square parentheses [ ] may be used.

# 543 = ~ [ [ [ [# 1201/2+15.~3 - # 100] /#520 + #125 i- #128] ”#130+ #132];

NOTE 3: There are no restrictions on the numb&of characters and number of variables for variable
definition.

NOTE 4 The variable valuca should be within a range ~rom O to &99999999.

If this range is exceeded, the arithmetic operations may not be wnducted properly.

NOTE 5: The variable definitions are valid from the moment that the variables are actually defined.
#l= loo” 9 ...................................... #l = 100
#1 = m #2 = #l+200 ; ............ #l = 200, #2=400
#3=#l+3Kl “> ....................... ......... #=500

NOTE 6 Variable quotations are always regarded as having a decimal point at the end.
when #loo = 10,
then X#100; is treated as X1O.

-185-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7.USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

13.7. USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

13.7.1 USER MACRO COMMANDS (G65, G66, G66.1, G67)

By combining the user macros with variable commands, it is posible to use macro program .wI1, arithmetic
operation, data input/output with PLC, control, decision, branch and many other instructions for measurement
z&clother such applications.

o Macro program
..... . ,
●

M99:

Macro programs use variables, arithmetic instructions and control instructions to create subprograms which
function to provide special-purpose control.
These special-purpose control functions (macro programs) are called by the macro call instructions exactly when
required from the main program.
Detailed description
1) When the G66 or G66.1 command is entered, the specified user macro subprogram will be called’ after
each block has been executed or after the movement command in the block with the movement
commands has been executed until the G67 (cancel) czmunand is entered.
2) The G66 (G66.1) and G67 commands must be paired in the same program.
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7.USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

13.7.2 MACRO CALL INSTRUCTION

Included among the macro call commands are the simple calls which apply only to the instructed block and also
modal calls (types A and B) which apply to each block in the call modal.
(1) Simple macro calls . ..

Main program Subprogram (O ~ ~)

-GE
To main program

M99 is used to conclude the user macro subprogram.

f \
Format ; G65 P L— ‘<argument> ;
L No. of repetitions

.L Program no.

\ J

Wheu the <argument> must be transferred as a local variable to a user macro subprogram, the actual value
should be designated after the address.
Regrwdless of the address, a sign and decimal point can be used in the argument. There are 2 ways in which
arguments are designated.
a. Argument dcdgnation I
Format: A_ B. C_ ... X- Y. Z_
Detailed description
1) Arguments can be designated using any address except G, L, N, O and P.
2) IZo%pt for I, J and K, there is no nwd for designation in alphabetical order.
3) I, J &d K must be designated in alphabetical order,
I- J_ K- ... Correct
3- I_ K. ... Incorrect
4) Addresses which do not need to be designated can be omitted.
5) The following table shows the correspondence between the addresses which can be designated by
argument designation I and the variable numbers in the user macro main body.

-187-
13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

Address and variable number correspondence Call instructions and usable address
Argument designation I Variable in macro G65, G66 G66.1
address ....
A #l o 0
B #2 o 0
c 4!3 o 0
D #7 o 0
E #8 o 0
F w o 0
G #lo x -X*
H #11 o 0
I * o 0
J * o 0
K % o o“
L #12 x x*
M #13 o 0
N #14 x X*
o #15 ~ x x
P #16 x x*
Q #17 o 0
R #18 o 0
s #19 o 0
T #20 o 0
L1 4!21 o 0
v ,j#22 o 0
w #23 o 0
x #24 o 0
Y #25 o o“
z #26 o 0

0: Can be used.
~. Cannot be US~.
*: Can be used while G66.1 emn.mand is modal.

-188-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7.USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

b. Argument designation II
Format: A_ B_ C_ I_ 3. K_ I_ J_ K. ...
Detailed description
1) In addition to addresses A B and C, up to 10 groups of arguments with 1, J, K serving ~ 1 group can
be designated. K1O (#%3) of the tenth group, however, is ignored.
2) When ~he same address is duplicated, desi~ate the addresses in the speeified order.
3) Addresses which do not need to be designated can be omitted.
4) The following table shows the correspondence between the addresses which ean be designated by
argument designation II and the variable numbers in the user macro main body.

Argument designation Variable within Argument daignation Variable within

II address macro II address macro
A #1 J5 #17
?3 4!2 K5 #18
c & 16 #19
11 #4 J6 #20
J1 #5 K6 $4!21
K1 #6 17 #22
E! #7 J7 #23
J2 #8 K7 #24
K2 4$. 18 . #25
B #lo J8 #26
J3 #11 K8 #27
K3 #12 19 #28
14 #13 J9 #29
J4 #14 K9 #o
K4 #15 110 #31
15 #16 J1O *2

NOTE 1: The numbers 1 through 10 accompanying L J and K denote the sequen= of the ~m.ma’nd~
groups and they are not required for the actual instructions.
c. Using arguments designations I and II together
If addressea eorreaponding to the same variable are commanded when both types
.- 1 and II are used to
desi~ate argumen~~ the iatter address is valid.
(Example 1)

Call instruction G65A1. f B-2.2 D3.3 14.4 17.7;

In the above examplq the last 17.7 argument is valid when both arguments D3.3 and 17.7 are commanded
for the #7 variable.

-189-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(2) ModaI call A (movement command call)

Main program

!
G68PP1L!1 ca,r~ment>; To subprogram

-><=C
.
:* To main program
~
G67:
To subprogram
(

When the block with a movement command is commanded between G66 and G67, the movement command is fiist
executed and then the dmignated user macro subprogram is tzwcuted. The number of times the subprogram is
executedis /?1 times with each ml].
The <argument > is the same as for a simple call.
t
Format : G66P_ L_ <argument > ; )

“k :;::? . ~

\ J

Detailed description
1) When the G66 command is entenxl, the specified user macro subprogram will be called aftqr the
movement immmand in the block with the movement commands has been ~ecuted until the the G67
(caned) cammand is entered.
2) The G66 and G67 ccmmmnds must be paired in the same program.
A program error will result when G67 is issued without the G66 command.

. .

-190-
 13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7. USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(3) Modal call 13(for each block)

The spmifid user macro subprogram is called unconditionally for each command block which is assign~
between G66.1 and G67 and the subprogram is executed 11 times.
i-
>

Format ; G66. 1 P L

Lr;i:::’y . ‘-

Detailed description
1) In the G66.1 modq everything except the O, N and G codes in the various command blocks which are
read are handled as the argument without being executed. Any G code designated last or any N code
commanded after anything exeept O and N will function as the argument.
2) The same applies as when G65P_ is assigned at the head of a block for all significant blocks in the
G66.1 mode.
(Example 1)
N1OO GO1 G90 X1OO.2200. F400 R1OOO;
in the G66.1 PIOOO; mode is the same ars.
N1OOG65 P1OOOGO1 G90 XIOO. Z2Q0. F400 R1OOO;

NOTE 1: The c-all is performed even in the G66.1 command block in the G66.1 mode and the
correspondence between the argument address and the variable number is the same as for
G65 (simple cdl).
3) The range of the G and N command values which can be used anmv as variables in the G66.1 mode
is subjeet to the restrictions applying to values as normal NC command values.
4) O, sequence numbers N and modaI G codes are updated as modal information.

(4) G code macro call

User macro subprograms with prescribed program numbers can be called merely by issuing the G code
command.

I Format : GXX
~
cargument> ;
G code for macro call I
Detailed description
1) The above instruction functions in the same way as the instructions below, and parameters are set for
each G code to determine the correspondence with the instructions.
a: M98PAAAA ;
b. G65PAAAAA <argument> ;
c. G66PAAAAA <argument> ;
d. G66SPAAAAA c argument> ;
When the parameters corresponding to c and d above are set, issue the cancel command (G67) either in the user
macro or after the caI1 code has been commanded so as to cancel the modal call.

-191-’
 I
13.PI?OGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

2) The correspondence between the “XX” which conducts the macro call and the program number
PAAAA of the macro to be called is set by parameter.
3) Up to 10 G codes from GOOto G255 can be used with this instruction. (Those G codes, such as GOO,
GO1 and G02, which have already been clearly defined for specific applications under EL4 standards
..
cannot be used.)
4) These commands cannot be issued during a user macro subprogram which has been calkd by a G
codri
(5) Miscellaneous command macro cdl (for M, S, T, B code macro call)
The user macro subprogram of the specified program number can be called merely by issuing an M (or S,
T, 33)code. (Only entered codes appIy for M but all S, T and B codes apply.)

I
Format : Mm ; (or Ss;, Tt ;, Bb ;)
. M code for macro call (or S, T, B code)

Detailed description
1) Th{above instruction functions in the same way as the instructions below, and pmamti~s are set for.
each M code to determine the correspondence with the instructions. (Same for S, T and B codes)
a M98P AAAA ;
M98, Mm are not output
b. G65PAAA.A Mm ; }
c. G66PAAAA Mm; -
d. G66.lPAAAA Mm ;
When the parameters corresponding to c and d above are set, issue the cancel command (G67)
either in the user macro or after the call mde has been commanded so as to cancel the modal cd,
2) The correspondence between the “Mm” which conducts the macro call and the program number
P&l&i of the macro to be called is set by parameler. Up to 10 M codes from MOOto M95 can be
entered.
Any code except the codes basically required by the machine and the MO, Ml, M2, M30 and M96–
M99 males can be entered.
3) As with M98, the display appears on the CRT screeu of the setting and display unit but the M codes
and MF are not output.
4) Even if the midlammus command entered above is issued during a user macro subprogram called by
the M cad% macro cdl will not result and it will be handkxl as an ordina~ miscellaneous command,
5) All S, T and B codes call the subprograms in thepreacribed program numbers of the corresponding S,
T and B functions.

(6)
. . Differences betwwm M98 and G65 commands
1) The argument em be designated for G65 but not for M98.
2) The sequence number can be designated for M98 but not for G65, G66 and G66.L
3) M98 executes a subprogram after all the commands excqt M, P, H and L in the M98 block have been
exeeuted, but G65 branches to the subprogram without any further operation.
4) When any address except O, N, P, H or L is included in the M98 block, single block stop results. This
is not the case with G65.
5) The level of the M98 local variables is f~ed but it can be varied in accordance with the nesting depth
for G65. (#1, for instancq has the same significance either before or after M98 but a different
significance in each ease with G65.)
6) The M98 nesting depth extends up to 8 levels in combination with G65, G66 and G66.1. The G65
nesting depth extends up to only 4 levels in combination with G66 and G66.1.

-192-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7.USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(7) Macro call command nesting depth

Up to 4 nesting hwels are available for macro subprogram calls basti on simple call or modal call.
The argument with a macro call instruction is valid only on the called macro level. Since the nesting depth
for macro calls extends up to 4 levels, the argument can be used as a local variable for the program with each
respective macro call. ..-

NCYIE 1: When a G65, G66, G66.1 G code macro call or ruiscdlaaeous command macro call is
conducted, this is regarded as nesting level 1 and the level of the local variables is also
incremented by one.

NOTE 2 The designated user macro subprogram is called every time the movement command is
executed with modal call A. However, when the G66 command has been duplicated, the next
user macro subprogram is called every time an axis is moved even with movement commands
in the macro.
User macro subprograms are called in sequence from the subprogram comm&ded last,
(13mrnple 1)

Main ‘program
User macro orxzration
G66Pp,
Zzl

G66Ppg
ZZ2

G67 ;

ZZ3 :
After 23 executio
G67 ; (pI cancel)

ZZ4 :\
ZZ5 ;:

. .

-193-’
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7.USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

13.7.3 VARIABLES
Both the variable specifications and user macro specifications are required for the variabks which are used with
the user macros.
The offset amounts of the local, common and system variables among the variables for this MELDAS NC system
are retained awn when the unit’s power is switched off.
(1) Use of multiple variables
When the user macro specifications apply, variable numbers carI be turned into variables (multiple use
of variables) or replaced by <formulae>. Only one of the four basic arithmetic rule (+, -, x, + )
operations can be conducted with <formulae>.

@mmple 1) Multiple use of variables

#l=lo #l(J=20#20=30 ; #[# [#l] ]= # [#IO] from #1 = 101
#$S=#[#[#l] ]; # [#IO]= #20 from #10=200
}
Thereforq M= #20 or W =30.
#l=lo#lo=20 #20=30 #5=1000; #[# [#l] ]= # [#IO] from #1 = 10.
fi~#l]]= * ; # [#IO]= +$20from #10=20.
}
Thereforq #20= #5 or #20=1000.

(Example 2) Replacing variable numbers with <formulae>

#lo=5 ;
# [#lo+ l]=looo ; In which cas~ #6=1000.
# [#lo-1] =-looo ; In which cas~ #4=-1000.
# [#lo*3]= 100; In which case #15=100.
# [#lo/2] =-loo; In which cas~ #3=-100, (Rounding up)
(2) Undefiied variables
Variables applying with the user macro specifications such as variables which have not been used even once
after the power was switchd on or local variables not quoted by the G65, G66 or G66.1 commands can be
used as <vacant>. Also, variables can forciily be set to <vacant>. Variable Ml is always
. used as the
<vacant > variable and nothing can be defined in the left-side member.
11 Arithmetic exmessions I
‘ #1= #l : ......1..... #1 = <vacant> I It should be home in mind that <vacant>
i?%!=m+l; ....,..#2=1 in an arithmetic expression is handled in
#3=l+#o; ..... ..*=l the same way as O.
*=#a*lo ; ....... #4=o <Vacant> + <Vacant> = O
#=#l)+#Q ; .....#t5=o < Vacant> + <Constant> = Constant
<Constant > -t <Vacant> = Constant
2) Variable quotations
When undefined variabks only are quoted, they ‘are ignored up to the address.
When #l = <Vacant>
GO X#l ZJOOO; ............. . Equivalent to GO Z1OOO;
GO X#l -I- 10 Z1OOO; .... Equivalent to GO X1O Z1OOO;

-194-
 13. PROGRAM S UPPQRT FUNCTIONS
13.7. USER MACRO SPEC.lFICATl’ONS

3) Conditional expressions
e Vacant> and O are not equivalent for EQ and NE only. (#O is <vacant >.)

When #101 = <Vacant> I when #lol = 0 ...

#lol m w #lol m 443
<Vacant > = <Vacant > established o = <Vacant> not established
#101 NE O #101 NE O
<Vacant > ~ O established 040 not established
#101 GE #O #101 GE #o
<Vacant > z < Vacant> established O ~ < Vacant> ~tab~ish~
#Nil GT O #101 GT O
e Vacant> >0 not established 0>0 not established.
#101 LE #O #101 LE #3
<Vacant > ~ <vacant> established O ~ <vacant> established
#101 GTO #101 LTO
<Vacant > < 0 not established 0<0 riot established

. .

-195-’
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

13.7.4 TYPES OF VARIABLES

{1) Common variables (#100 to #149 and #500 to 4549)
These variables are used in common from any position.
For detail% refer to the section on the variable commands. ..
(2) Local variables (#1
.. to #32)
These can be defhed as an <argument> when a macro subprogram is called or used locdy within main
programs and subprograms. They can be duplicated regardless of the relationship existing between macros
(up to 4 Iwds).

I G65 Ppl IX* < argurtlent

> ; 1

Where p = Program number

= Number of repetitions
The < &ument > is assumed to be Aal Bbl Ccl ... Zzl.
The following table shows the correspondents between the addresses designated
— by <argument> and the local
variable numbers used in the user macro main bodies.

Call
cmmmand

G65
G66
G66.1
Argument
address
Local
variable
number
n G65
I 010
G66

o
o
call
command

I
G66.1

0
0
1
!
Argument
address

Q
R
s
I

I
!
LQcal
variable
number

#17
#18
#19
o 0 D 9$7 010 ! I
I T #-20
0 0 E ?$%
o 0 F #9
x X* G #lo
o 0 H #11
o 0 I #l o 0 Y
o 0 J * o 0 z 44?6
I 010
X*
K #6 I
x L #12 ?4!28
o 0 M #13 #29
. #30
#31
#32

“X” in the above table denotes an argument address which cannot be used. However, provided that the G66.1
mode has been established, an argument address denoted by the asterisk can be added for use.
“-” denotes that a corresponding address is not available.

-196-’
 13.PROGRAM S UPPOR.? FUNCTIONS
13.7.USER MACRO SPECIFICATIO_iVS

1) Local variables in subprograms ean be defined by means of the <argument> designation during
macro call. (bed variables ean be used freely in those subprograms.)

Main program Subprogram (9900) . ..

To subprogram *S=*401O;
G91colx [*19* cosf*lll
C6SP9900A60. SIOO. F800; 1 Y[*19*S 1?J[*1]]F*9:

M02: M99;

Referto the localv riablesand control

the movemen~ =c.
f------- ----- -.
Local variables -1
w by argument [ A(*l)= 60.000
“L r ‘
1“

Local variable! ‘ ‘S’)= 800 !

I
data table ,
I
I S(*19)=1OO. 000 I
L ----- -———— -— . . . J

2) Lmal variables am be used independently on each of the macro calls levels (4 levels).
Local variables are also provided independently for the main program (macro lsvel O).
&guments cannot be used for the level O local variables.

Main (hwel 0) 01 (macro kxel 1) 010 (macro lewel 2) 0100 (macro level 3)
#l=o,l #2=o.2 #3=o.3;
\ \ (
G&i P1ALB2. C3.; G&iP1OA1O,
B20.C&J.; G65PI03A1LX).
Bm. ;
! { < \
\
Mm, M99 ; M99; M93:
L I

.
Local variables (o) J.meal variables (1) Local variables (2) Lacal variables (3)
*1 0.100 A(#l) 1. 000 A(*l) 10. 000 A(*1)1OO.OOO
*2 0.200
3(*2) 2. 000 B<*2) 20. 000 3“’(* 2)200.000
*3 0.300
C (*3)3.000 C(*3) 306 000 c (#3)
.
D (*7) D (#7)
/ / )
Z(a 26) Z (#26) Z (*26)
) ) ) )
*32 *32 *32 *32

The statuses of the local variables appear on the setting and display unit.
For details, refer to the Operating Instructions as well as to the sections covering the operation of the setting and
display unit and the local variables.

-197-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(3) Macro interfaee inputs (#1000-#1035)

The status of the interface input signals ean be ascertained by reading out the values of variable numbers
1000 through 1035. A variable value which has been read out can be only one of 2 values 1 or O (1: contact
closed, o contact opm). ~1 the input signals from .#1000 through #1031 can be read at once by reading out
the value of variable number 1032. Variable numbers #1000 through #1035 are for readout only, . . and
nothing cm be placed in the left side member of their arithmetic for.&ulae.

System No, of System No. of

Interface input signal Interface input signal
variable points variable points
#looo 1 Register R72 bit O #1016 1 Register R73 bit O
#lool 1 Register R72 bit 1 #lo17 1 Register R73 bit 1
#loo2 1 Register R72 bit 2 #1018 1 Register R73 bit 2
#loo3 1 Register R72 bit 3 #lo19 1 Register R73 bit 3
#loo4 1 Register R72 bit 4 #lo20 1 Register R73 bit 4
#loo5 1 Register R72 bit 5 #lo21 1 Register R73 bit 5
#1006 1 Register R72 bit 6 #lo22 1 Register R73 bit 6
#loo7 1 Register R72 bit 7 #1023 1 Register R73 bit 7
#1008 1 Register R72 bit 8 #1024 1 Register R73 bit 8
#loo9 1 Register R72 bit 9 . #1025 1 Register R73 bit 9
#lolo 1 Register R72 bit 10 #1026 1 Register R73 bit 10
#loll 1 Register R72 bit 11 #lo27 1 Register R73 bit 11
#lo12 1 Re@ster R72 bit 12 #1028 1 Register R73 bit 12
#lo13 1 Register R72 bit 13 #1029 1 Register R73 bit 13
#lc)14 1 Register R72 bit 14 #lo30 1 Register R73 bit 14
#lo15 1 Register R72 bit 15 #lo31 1 Register R73 bit 15

r
system No. of
Interfaee input signal
variable points
#1032 32 Register R72, R73
#1033 32 Register R74, R75
#lo34 32 Register R76, R77
#lo35 32 Reg&ter R78, R79

-198-
 ,1 ‘jl’~

13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS

13.7.USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(4) Macro interfaee outputs (#1100-#1135)

The interfaee output signaIs em be sent by substituting values in variable numbers 1100 through 1135. &
output signal ean be only O or 1.
AI] the output signals born #1100 through #1131 ean be sent at omw by substituting a value in variable
number 1132. (2° —231) . ..
The status of the writing and output signals ean be read in order to offset the #1100 through #1135 output
signals,

system No. of System No. of

Interfaee output signal Interfaee output signal
variable points variable points
#lloo 1 Register IU72 bit O #1116 1 Register R173 bit O
#llol 1 Register R172 bit 1 #1117 1 Registez R173 bit 1
#llo2 1 Register R172 bit 2 #1118 1 Register R173 bit 2
#llo3 1 Register R172 bit 3 #m9 1 Register R173 bit 3
#llo4 1 Register R172 bit 4 #l120 1 Register R173 bit 4
#llo5 1 Register R172 bit 5 #1121 1 Register R173 bit 5
#1106 1 Registex R172 bit 6 #1122 1 Register R173 bit 6
#llo7 1 Register R172 bit 7 #1123 1 Register R173 bit 7
#llo8 1 Register R172 bit 8 #1124 1 Register R173 bit 8
#llo9 1 Re@ster R172 bit 9 #1125 1 Register R173 bit 9
#lllo 1 Register R172 bit 10 #1126 1 Register R173 bit 10
#lIll 1 Register R172 bit 11 #1127 1 Register R173 bit 11
#1112 1 Register R172 bit 12 #1128 1 Register R173 bit 12
#1113 1 Register R172 bit 13 #1129 1 Register R173 bit 13
#1114 1 Register R172 bit 14 #l130 1 Register R173 bit 14
#1115 1 Register R172 bit 15 #1131 1 Register R173 bit 15

#1132 32 Register IU72, R173

#1133 32 Register R174, R175
#1134 32 Register R176, R177
#1135 32 Register R178, R179

. .
NOTE 1: l%e last values of the system variables. #1100 through #1135 sent are retained as 1 or O.
(I’hey are not cleared even with resetting.)

NOTE 2 The following applies when any number except 1 or Ois substituted into #1100 through #1131.
< Vacant> is treated as O.
Any number except O and <vacant> is trmted as 1.
Any value less than O.00000001 is indefinite.

-199-
13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(R7.2. R73)# 1032 i$l132{R172. R173) Output signal

F-----7 . ..

--il--

--11---

-it--

!-Eel
] i
t‘“d””
--+-
*.
I I* 1

Macro
instruc-
tions
-1”1-
--lt-

ECt -H-

l=
L----- .
-H-

(R74. R75) I!R174. R175)

#llm
_
-1HsL.1 l%%

. .

-200-:
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7.USER MACRO SPECIFICATION’S

(5) Tool OffSet

Standard suecification~ 20 sets
Optional s&cifkationx 40 sets
(Tncluding standard)
. ..
Variable number range Contents”
#10001– #lOMIO-l-n #2001 -#2000 +n 1st axis tool length offset
#llOU1– #11000- l-n #2701 -#2700 +n 1st axis wear offset
#12001– #120W +n — 3rd axis tool Iength offset
#13001– #13000 +n — 3rd axis wear offset
#14001– #14000-1-n #2101 -#21m +n 2nd axis tool length offset
#15001– #15000-f-n #2801 -#2800 +n 2nd axis wear offset -
#16001– #16000 +n #2201 -#2200 +n Nose R compensation
#17001– #17000-1- n #2901 -#WOO +n Nose R wear compensation
#18001– #18000 +-n #2301 -#2300 +n Tool nose point

Tool data can be read and values substituted using the variable numbers.
Either the numbers in the #10000 order or #20C41order can be used.
The last 3 digits of the variable numbers cmrespond to the tool offset number:
The tool offset data are configured as data with a decimal point in the same way as for other variables.
Consequently, this decimal point must be commanded when data below the decimaI point is to be entered.

Programming example Common variables Tool offset data

(Ex. 1) Calculation and tool offset data selting

G28X0 TO1O1 ; I Zero point return

M06 ; Tool change (TO1O1)
I
#l=#5001; Start point storage
I
GOO X-200. ; Rapid traverse to
safe position
G31 X–50, F1OO ;
Skip mymsuring
#loool=#5061–#1 ; v
Measurement distance m
\ II calculation and tool
offset data sqting

NOTE In this exampl~ no consideration is given to the delay k the skip sensor signal.
4$5001 is th; X~axis start point pos~tion and #50G1- is the X-&is skip tiordinates, and
indicated is the position at which the skip signal is input while G31 is being executed.

-201-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(6) Work coordinate system offset

By using variable nmnbers 5201 through 5323, it is possible to read out the work coordinate system offset
data or ~o substitute vahms.

IWITIZ The number of axes which e-an be controlled differs according to the NC specifications.
The last digit in the variable number corresponds to the control axis number.

Axis no. Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Remarks

Axis name
External work *ml #5202 45203 EMemal workpiece offse$
offset specifications are required.
G54 *221 #5222 *223
G55 45241 #5242 45243
Work coordinate system
G56 #5261 #5262 #5263
specifkations are’required.
G57 #5281 #5282 #5283
G58 #5301 #5302 #5303
! G59 #5321 4%322 I #5323 I
?
(

.@xample 1)
F41 GZ8 XO 20: +x).
i42 ?z5’221-- 20. S5223--2O .:
N3 COO G54 XO 20:

KIO 4S221--10.8S 223-- 90. :

Nll GOO G.54 %020: G.%work I
cprxdiite
systemdefined
bv N1O I
5
M02: m

i- —--—- ----- —---— ---- -1 --1

@ample 2) I Basic machine coordinate system i“
I
! External workpiece offset ~

_.--@a-“

Nloo *si=.$221+.52
*5222 =*5222 +* S202;
+

i—_—-______-—---J---
W2 {GS5)

____J

&
r ———A ---- —-—- ---- -—-—
*5241=*5241+*5201:

*S242-*S 242+*5202; I Basic machine wordinate system I

I I
sS201=0 *5202=O; I
Coordirmte ; +.i:y-;~,
systemafter ~
clmnge
5
I

i-_______. _——–L-— L–--– L.-..I

I
\
This is an exarnplewhere the external workpiece offset values are added to the work coordinate (G54, G55) system
offset values without changing the position of the work coordinate systems.

-202-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7.USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(7) NC alarm (#3000)

The NC system can be forciily sel to the alarm state by using variable number 3000.
Command format
. ..
/ \
#3000 =Q(c AL L#PRo GRAMMER#TEL#530);

L Alarm number L Alarm message

( J

Any alarm number from 1 to 9999 can be specified.

The alarm message must be less than 31 characters long.
The “P277” user macro alarm message appears in the <NC alarm> column on diagnosis page 1 while
the alarm number and alarm message 70: (CALL #PROGRAMMER #TEL%530) is indicated in the
<operator message >.

Example of program (alarm when #1 = 0)

/’
<NC ALARM > DL4G 1;
(
lF [#l NE 01 G(YTO 100 : P277: Macro alarm message
X3000=7iJ( C.+LL
#PROGRMfW,R
#TELKIWI):

NKIO stops
with NC <Operator message>
! akrm \ CALLWWMMWiR #TEL#330 70 J

NOTE 1: Warm number O is not displayed and any number exceeding 9999 cannot be indicated.

NOTE 2 The charaetms following the fiit alphabet letter in the right member is treated as the alarm
message. Therefor~ a number earmot be designated as the first character of an alarm
message. It is recommended that the alarm messages be enclosed in round parentheses.

. .

-203-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(8) Integrating (run-out) time (#3001, #3002)

The integrating (run-out) time can be read during automatic operation or automatic start or values can be
substituted by using variable numbers 3001 and 3002.

Type Variable Unit Contents when power Initialization of “‘“ Count

number is switched on contents condition
Integrating At all times
1 msec Same as when power is Value substituted for
(run-out) time 1 ‘1 while power
switched off variable
is ON
Integrating In-automatic
(run-out) time 2 ‘2
start

The integrating run time returns to zero in about 2.44x 1011 seconds (approximately 7.7 years).

:30111
=0 :
To subprogram
\ (allowable time) MILE[#3001LI$201Ml :
G65P9010T msec:
k a !
\ E/m :

hf% :

LQcd variable
Local variable Allowable time portiom DO1-END1 is
‘ T#20 — repeated and when allowable time is
Entered in local variable #20 reached, operations jumps to M99.

(9) Suppression of siugle block stop and miscellaneous function fiiish signal waiting
By substituting the valu~ below in variable number 3003, it is possible to suppress single block stop in the
subsequent blocks or to advanco to the next block without waiting for the miscellaneous function (M, S, T,
El) finish (FIN) signal.

Single block Miscellaneous

#3003 stop function finish
signal
o Not suppressed Awaited ,
1 Suppressed Awaited
2 Not suppressed Not awaited
3 Suppressed Not awaited

NOTEt 1: #3003 is cleared to zero by resetting.

..

-204-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7.USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(10) Feed hold, feed rate override, G09 vaIid/invalid

By substituting tbevalu~ below invariable number 3004, it is possible to make the feed hold, feed rate
override and G09 functions either valid or invalid in the subsequent blocks.

#wo4 Bit O Bit 1 Bit 2

Contents (value) % Feed hold Fed rate override G09 chink
o Valid Valid Valid
1 Invalid Valid Valid
I 2 Valid Invalid Valid
3 Invalid Invalid Valid
4 Valid Valid Invalid
5 Invalid Valid Invalid
6“ Valid Invalid Invalid
7 Invalid Invalid Invalid

NOTE L Variable number #3004 is set to zero by resetting.

NOTE k The functions are valid when the above bits are O and invalid when they are 1.
(11) Message display & stop
By using variable number 3006, the message display is stopped after the previous block has been
executed and, if the message display data have been commanded, then the ecmmponding message will
be indicated.

Command format

I
%3006=1 (TAKl? FIVE) ;
L Message

NOTFL 1. The message should not be longer than 31 characters and it should be enclosed within round
( ) parentheses.
NOTE. 2. The 1 in #3006 = 1 is freed.
(12) Mirror image
By reading variable number 3007, it is possl%le to ascertain the status of mirror image at a particular
point in time for each axis.
The axes correspond to the bits of #3007. When the bits are O,it means that the mirror image function
is not valid; when they are 1, it means that it is yalid.
#3007

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Q
nth axis 3 2 1

-205-;
13.PI?OGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7 USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(13) G cmnmand medals

Usirrz variable numbers 4001 through 4021. it is uossible to read the G modal commands which have been
issu& up to the block immediately ~efore. - -
Similarly, it is possible to read the medals in the block being executed with variable numbers #4201 through
#4221. . .-

Variable number
1 Function
Preread block Execution block
#4001 ?$4201 Interpolation mode GOO: O, GO1 :1,
G02 :2, G03 :3, G33 :33

I #4002
#4003
#wo4
I #4202
#4203
#4204
Plane selection: G17: 17, G18: 18, G19: 19
Absolute/incremental: G90: 90, G91: 91
Barrier check G22: 22, G23: 23
#4005 #4205 Fed designation: G94: 94, G95: 95
#4006 #4206 Inch/metric G20: 20, G21 :21
#oo7 #4207 Tool nose R compensation: G40: 40, G41 :41,
G42 :42
#4008 #4208 2nd spindle control G43 :43, G44 :44
#4009 #4209 Canned cycle: G80: 80, G73–79: 73–79,
G81–G89 : 81–89
I +%4010 I #4210 Return level: G98: 98, G99: 99

H=F== #4014 #?214

Work coordinate system G54–G59: 54–59
Acceleration/deceleration: G61–G62: 61–62,
G64-64
Macro modal ca.lk G66: 66, G66.I :66.1,
G67 :67- -
Facing tool rest mirror image G68 :68, G69 :69

Constant peripheral speed control: G%: %.,

1 G97:97
44018 #4218 Balance cut G14 :14, G15 : M
44019 #4219 MilIinE G12.I :12.1. G13.1 :13.1
#4020 #4220
#4021 #4221

@xampIe)
G28 XO 20 ;
GOOX150. 2200 ;
G65 P300 G02 W-30. K-15. F1OOO;
M02 ;

0300
#1 =#4001; ~ Group (I1 G modal @e-read) #1=2.0
#2= #4201; -+ Group 01 G modal (now being executed) #2=0.0
G#l W#24 ;
M99 ;
%

-206-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7.USER MACRO SPECIF1CATIONS

(14) Other medals

Using variable numbers 4101 through 4120, it is possible to read the modal commands assigned up to tha
block immediately before.
Similarly, it is possible to read the medals in the block being executed with variable numbers #4301 throuph
#43Xi. - - ..

Variable number Modal

Pre-read Execution information
#4101 #4301
#4102 #4302
#4103 #4303 #4113 #4313 Miscellaneous
#4104 #4304 function M ~
#4105 #4305 #4114 #4314 Sequence
number N
#4106 #4306
#4115 #4315 Program number
#4107 #4307 T command n
lower two digits

Feed rate F
(Asynchronous)
#4110 I #4310
I 10
#4120 #4320 I Tool function T

(15) Position information

Using variable numbers 5001 through 5103, it is possible to read the servo deviation amounts, skip
coor~inates, work mordinates, mach~ne coordinates-and end point coordinates in the block imm~iately
before.

End point
coordinate ski.
coordinate servo
of block Machine Work
;;m&iately (Work deviation
coordinate coordinate
coordinate) amount
Axis no. (Program)

1 ?%GQl #5021 #5041 #5061 *101

2 #oo2 445022 #042 ?$.5062 #5102
3 #5003 ?45023 #043 #5063 #5103
Remarks (reading Yes No No Yes Yes
during movement)
.

NOTFx : The number of axes which can be controlled differs according to the NC specifications.
The last digit of the variable number corresponds to the control axis number.

-207-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7.USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

1) The positions of the end point coordin-

ates and skip coordinates are positions
in the work coordinate system,
2) The endpoint coordinates, skip coordin-
ates and servo deviation amounts em be
Basic machine coordinate system M read even during movement. However,
it must fiist be checked that movement
Work coordinate systemw ~
has stopped before reading the machine
coordinates, work coordinates, and the
Q tool position offset position.
3) The position where the skip signal is
turned ON in the G31 block is indicattxl
GO1 for the skip coordinates. The end point
position is indicated when the skip
signal has not been turned ON. (For
further detail% refer to the section on
tool length measurement,)
)
#
I
i @3ndpoint

b-’
J
coordinates]
I
1 8

\
1

Ql w work
_ coordinate”

Work coordinates]

~achine
cr~ I

M
\
system

Machine
coordinate
system
Read
command

b
Skip coordinates &
Gaug~ etc.

coordinates] d’
J
4) The tool nose position where the tool offset and other such factors are not considered is indicated as the
end point position. The tool referenee point position with consideration given to tool offset is indicated
for ~he m;chine coordinates, work co&dinat& and skip coordinates. -

Skip sigmd
i
~ \

&nput coordinates of skip signal] Machine coordinate

M system
. .
4 Machine coordinates]

The position of the skip signal input eoordinatea is the positi- * For “ 0 ,“ check sto~
on in the work coordinate system. The coordinates in variable and then proated
numbers #5061 through #S063 memorize the moments when to read.
the skip input signal during movement wasinput and so they O For “o,” Teading is
can be read at any subsequent time. Forfurther details, refer- possible during
ence should be made to the seet ion on the skip function. movement.

-208-
 13. PI?OGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7.USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(16) Variable name setting and quotation

#my name 6mriable name) ean be given to ccm.mon variables #500 through #519. It must be eomDosed
A
of ~ot mor~ than 7 alphahumeri~ and it must begin with a letter. -
Command format . ..

SE TVNA. [NAME 1, NAME2. .... .. ] ;

~!!’!!z:!z;:ch

VariabIe names are separated by a comma 6).

Detaihxl description
1) On& variable names have been set, they will not be cleared even when the power is switched off.
2) Variables in programs can be quoted by their variable names. In cases like this, the variables should
be enclosed in square parentheses.
(Ekample 1) GOIX [#POINTl] ;
3) The variable numbers, data and variable names appear on the CRT screen of the setting and display
unit.
(Example 2)
Program ... SETVN500 [A234567, KYORI, TOOL25];

[Common variablm]
#500 –12345. 678 A234567
#501 5670.000 KYOR 1
#502 -156,500 TO OL2’5

#5’1 8 10.000 KAISUll

Common variable #(502) DATA (-156.5) NAME (1’00L25)

. .
 ‘,
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7 USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

13.7.5 ARITHMETIC COMMANDS

A variety of arithmetic operations ean be performed betwcxn variables.
#i= <formula >
<Formula > is a combination of constants, variable+ functions and operators. . ..
Constants can be used instead of #j and #k below.
[1) I)a):$~ and substitution of #i=#j Definition, substitution

~) Addition arithmetic #i=#j+#k Addition

*=*”* Subtraction
#i=#j oR#k Logical sum
(at every bit of 32 bits)
#i= #j XOR#k Exclusive OR
(at every bit of 32 bitsj
$) Multiplication arithmetic #i=#j *#k Multiplication
#i=#jl#k Division
#i =.#j MOD#k Remainder
#i=4j AND#k Logical product
(at every bit of 32 bits)
[4) Functions #i= Sm [*] Sine
#i= Cos [*] Cosine
#i= TAN [#k] Tangent (sin/cos used for tan)
#i= ATAN [xl Aretangent
(ATAN or ATN may be used)
#i =ACOS [#j] Arc-cosine
#i =SQRT [#lc] Square root
(SQRT or SQR may be used)
#i =ABs [*J Absolute value
#i= BIN [#k] Conversion from 13CD to BIN
#i=BCD [#k] Conversion from BIN to BCD
#i= ROUND [#k] Rounding off
(ROUND or RFJD may be usdd)
#i =FIX [#k] Discard fractions less than 1
#i= FUP [#k] Add for fractions less than 1
#i= LN [#k] Natural logarithm
#i=ExP [#k] lk~o~t with e (=2.718 ....) as

NOTE 1: A value without a decimal point is basically treated as a value with a decimal point at the end
(1 = 1.000).

ISIO~ 2: Offset amounts from #10001 and work coordinate system offset values from 4!5201 are
handkd as data with a decimal point. Consequently, data with a decimal point will be
produced even when data without a decimal point have bem defined in the variable numbers.
(Example)

Common variables
after execution
*1OI =1000 : #Iol I000.000
*1 OOO1 =$ $101 : *102 1000.000
#lo2 =$ $10001:

NOTE 3: The c formula> after a function must be enclosed in the square parentheses.

-210-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(1) Sequence of arithmetic operations

The sequence of the arithmetic operations (1) through (3) is, respectively, the iimctions followed by the
mukiplieation arithmetic followed in turn by the addition arithmetic.

#lol = #ill + #112 * SIN [#113] . ..

(1) Func$ion
\ / (2) Multiplication arithmetic
L / (3) Addition arithmetic
(2) Designation of arithmetic operation sequence
The part to be given priority in the operation sequence should be enclosed in square parentheses. Up to 5
pairs of such parentheses including those for the functions may be used.

#101 =SQRT [ [ [#ill - #112] * SIN [#113] + [#114] * #115 ;

First pair of parentheses

Sezxmd pair of parenthewxi -1]
1!-’ i of parentheses
Third pair

!,
l“
 .,

13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS

13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(3) ?3mmples of arithmetic commands

(1) Main program G65 P1OOAlO B20. ; #l 10.OOO

and argument #lol = 100.OOO#lo2= 200.000 ; #2 20.000 . ..
designation
#lol 100.OOO
.
#lo2 200.000
(2) Definition and #1= 1000 #1 100U.OOO
substitution #2= 1000. #2 1000.OOO From eomrncm
(=) #3=#lol #3 100.OOO} variabl~
#4= #lo2 #4 200.000
From offket amount
#5 =#5041
(3) Addition and #11 =#1 +1OOO
subtraction (+, -) #~$2= # _ 500 #12 950.000
#13 = #lol + #1 #13 11OO.OOO
#14=#5041 -3. #14 -13.000
#15 =45(M1 + #lo2 #15 190.000
(4) Logical sum (OR) 43=100 #3= 01100100
#4= #30R14 14= Oooo111o
#=ollolllo= 110
(5) Exclusive OR #3= 100 #3 =01100100
(XOR) #4 =#3XOR14 14= Oooo111o
#4=o1101010= 106
(6) Multiplication and 4?21=100”100 #21 1000O.OOO
division (*, /) #22 = IOO.*1OO #22 1000O.OOO
#23 =1OO*1OO m 1000O.OOO
#24= 100.*1OO. #24 100MMOO
#25= 100/100 MOO
#26 = 100./100. 1.000
#27 = 100/100. 4427 MOO
#28 =100./100. Looo
#29 =#5041*#lol *9 -1OOO.OOO
#M= #5041/#N12 -0.050
Remainder (MOD) #31 =#19MoD#20 #19/#20 = 48/9 =5 with 3 over
(7) Lagicid product #9=loo #9= 01100100
(AND) #10= #9AND15 15= Oooollll ‘
#lo =OOOMlloo= 4
. .

-212-’
 13.PROGRAM SUPpOR T FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(8) Sine (MN) #501 =SIN [60]’ *O1

#502= SIN [60.] #502 :%
#503 = 1000*SIN [60] #503 866.@5 . ..
#504= 1000*SIN [60. ] 866.025
%05 = 1000. *SIN [60] 4!S05 866.025
4’506= 1000. *SIN [60. ] #506 866.025
Note SIN [60] is equivalent to SIN
[60. ]
(9) Cosine (COS) *41 = Cos [45] #541 0.707
#542= COS [45. ] 44542 0.707
#543 = 1000*COS [451 707.107
#544= 1000*COS [45. ] E 707.107 -
#545= 10004 *COS [45] #545 707.107
#546= 1000. *COS [45. ] #546 707.107
Note COS [451is equivalent to COS
[45. ]
(10) Tangent ~AN) #551= TAN {60] #551 1.732
#552= TAN [60. ] #552 1.732
#553= 100WTAN [60] 653 1732.051
4554= 1000*TAN [60. ] #554 1732.051
#555= lMIO. *TAN [60] *55 1732.051
44556= 1000. *TAN [60. ] ~ #556 1732.051
Notti TAN [60] is equivalent to
TAN [60. ]
(11) Arctangent #561 =ATAN [173205/10WOO] #561 60.000
(ATAN or ATN) #562=ATAN [173205/100.] #562 60.000
#563 =ATAN [173.205/100WO] #563 @.000
#564 =ATAN [173.205/100.] *64 60.000
#565=ATAN [1.732] #565 59.999
(12) Arc-cosine #521 =ACOS [100./141.421] #521 45.000
(AC(X) #522=ACOS [100./141.421] “*22 45.000
ti23=ACOS [lOW./l4l4.2l3] #S23 45.000
#524 =ACOS [10./14.142] #524 44.999
44525= ACOS [0.7071 #525 45.009
(13) Square root #571 =SQRT [IWO] *71 31.623
(SQR or SQRT) #572=SQRT [1~.] #572 31.623
#573 =SQRT [10. * 10. +20. “20.] #573 22.361
#574= SQRT [#14*#14+#15*#15J #574 190.444
Note In order to increase the ac-
curacy, proceed with the
operation inside parentheses:

-213-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(14) Absolute value ?H76=-1OOO #576 -1OOO.OOO

(ABs) #77=ABs [#7q #577 1000.OOO
+$3=70. #4 =-50. . ..
i#80= ABS [#t--#3] *80 120.000
(15) BIN, BCD #1= 100
#11 =31N [#l] #11 64
#12 = BCD [#l] #12 256
(16) $~um ;) #21 =ROUND [14/3] #21 5
#22= RouND [14./3] #22 5
RND) #23 =ROUND [14/3.] 5
#24= RouND [14./3.] #24
#25 =ROUND [-14/3] #25 ~:
#26 =ROUND [-14./3] #26 .- 5
#27= RouND [-14/3.] #27 -5
#28= RouND [-14. /3.] -5
(17) Discarding fkac- 4$21=FIX [14/3] #21 4.000
tions below #22 =l?Ix [14./3] #22 4.000
decimal point #23 = FIX [14/3.] 4.000
(FIX) #24= FIX [14./3.] #24 4.000
#25 = FIX [-14/3] -4.000
#26= FIX {-14./3] #26 -4.00a
#27= FIX [-14/3.] “ #27 -4.000
#28 =FIX [-14. /3.] 4.000
(18) Adding fractions #21 =FUP [14/3] #21 5.000
k than1 #22 =FUP [14./3] 4$22 5.000
(FUP) #23 =FUP [14/3.] 5.000
#24=FUP [14./3.] #24 5.000
4$25= FUT [-14/3] -5.m
#26=FuP [-14./3] #26 -5.000
+!27=FUP [-14/3.] -5.000
#28=FuP [-14./3.] -5.000
(19) Natural #101 =LN [5j #lol 1.609
logarithms (LN) #lo2=LN [0.q #lo2 -0.693 .
#103= LN [-51 Error “p.-&y
(20) ~ponents (EXl?) #lo4=EXl? [2] #lo4 7.389
#lo5=ExP [1] #lo5 2.718
#106=EXP [-2] #lo6 0.135

-214-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(4) Arithmetic accuracy

As shown in the folIowing tablq errors wiI1be generated when performing arithmetic operations once
and these errors will accumulate by repeating the operations.

Arithmetic format Average error Maximum error TYPe of error

a=b + C 2.33 X 10-10 5.32 X l~l” Min. ~ dbl ,1 .dcl
a= b-c
a=b*c 1.55 x 10-10 4.66 X lCTI* Relative error
a= bic 4.66 X l~l” 1.86 x 10-g
a= b 1.24 X l~g 3.73 x 10-9 I elal
a= SIN ~] 5.0 x 10-9 1.0 x 10-8 Absolute error
a= COS ~] IC[o.
a= ATAN ~/c] 1.8 X 1T6 3.6 X l~d

IW3’lE SIN/COS is calculated for the function TAN.

(5)
., Notes on reduced accuracv
1) Addition and subtra~tion
It should be noted that when absolute values are used subtractively in addition or subtraction, the
relative error cannot be kept below 1(Y8.
For instan~ it is assumed that the real values prodwxd as the arithmetic calculation result of #10 and
#Xl are as follows (these valum cannot be substituted directly>
#10 = 2345678988888.888
#Xl = 2345678901234.567
Performing #10-#20 will not produce #10-#20 = 87654.321. There are 8 significant digits in the
variables and so the values of #10 and #20 will be as follows (strictly speaking, the intemaI values will
differ somewhat from the values below because they are binaty numbers)
#lo = 2345679000000.000
#20 = 2345678900000.000
Consequently, #10-#20 = lm.000 will generate a large error.
2) Logical operations
EQ, N~ GT, LT, GE and LE are basically the same as addition and subtraction and so care should
be taken with errors. For instan~ to de$ermine whether or not #10 and #20 are equal in the above
example
n? [#loEQ#20]
It is not always possllle” to provide proper evaluation because of the above- mentioned error.
Tlwreforq when the error is evaluated as in the following expression:
II? [A3S [#10-#20] LT200000]
and the difference betwexm #10 and 4$20falls within the designated range error, both values should be
considered equal.
3) Trigonometric functions
Absolute errors are guaranteed with trigonometric functions but since the relative error is not under
1F8, care should be taken when dividing or multiplying after having used a trigonometric function.

-215-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

13.7.6 CONTROL COMMANDS

The flow of programs can be controlled by IF-GOTO– and WHILE–DO-.
(1) 13ranching
Formati LF [conditional expression] CK)TO n ; (where n = sequence number in the program)
Whea the cundition is satisfied, control branches to “n” and when it is not satisfied, the next block is
E2Rcllted.
IF [conditional expression] can be omitted and, when it is, control passes to “n” unconditionally.
The following types of [conditional expressions] are available.

#i EQ#j = When #i and #j are equal

#i
#i
#i
NE#j
GT#i
LT#j
# When #i
> When #i
< When #i
and #j are not equal
is eseater than # i
is less than #j
I
#i GE#j ~When # i is #j or more
#i LE#i I ~When #i is # i Or ]ess

“n” of GOTQ n must alw~ys be in the same program. Alarm “P231” wilI result if it is not. A formula or variable
can be used instead of #i, #j and “n.”
h the block with sequence number “n” which will be executed after a GOTO n cummand, the sequence number
must always be at the head of the block. Otherwisq alarm %231” will result.
If “/” is at the head of the block and Nn follows, control can be branched to the sequence number.

Nlo X22=*2O *23=*21: I

IF (*2 EQ1IGOTO1OO:

Il::%:t’’’’!i
Iii
#22=$t 20-*3:

“23”;1”’4’
NIOO
*1=*1+1:
X*22 2*23:
I I

I I To
head

.,
NOTE When the sequence number of the branch d&tination is iearched, the search is conducted up to
the end of the program (% code) from the block following IF ... ; and if it is not found, it is
conducted up to the block before IT .... ;. Thereforq branch searches in the opposite direction
to the program flow will take longer to execute compared with branch searches in the forward
direction.

-216-
 “ ‘,,!,,
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(2) Iteration
Format: WHILE [conditional expression] DOm ; (m= 1, 2, 3 ..., 127)
!
ENDm;
While the conditional expression is established, the bIocks from the fol~owing block to ENDm are repeatedly
tmxmted: when it is not established. execution moves to the block after ENDm. DOm mav mme before WHILE.
WHILE [conditional expression] D’Om and ENDm must be ustxl as a pair. If WHILE [c&ditional expression] is
omitted, these blocks will be repeatedy ad infinitum. The repeating identification numbers range from 1 through
127 (DOl, D02, D03, .... D0127). Up to 27 nesting levels can be used.

~ Same identifier number can be used any @ Any number may be used for the WHILE-DOm
number of times. identifier number.

WHILE-DO I ; m’-
4
Possible ~ WHILE~DO 3 ; ~
t 1 I
u END 1 ; LEND 1
---L. 3 “ .--J
Possible I
r WHILE-D02 : q
if I
WHILE-DO 1 : I
~END2
----- : -.. J
Possible f
r WHILE-D(3I : q
t 1 I
‘u END1 : ~ENDI
---A- “ . --- i

~ Up to 27 nesting lwels for WHILE-DOm. @ The number of WHILE-DOm nesting levels can-
“m” is any number horn 1 to 127 for the not exceed 27.
rdng depth.
— WHILE-DO 1 : —-”-- DO1 — WHILE-DO 1 : +—-
1
WHILE-DC)2 ; -- J
WHILE-DO !2 - ---- DO2 I
, t
. . 1
●
WHILE-DO 3 ;

I ++1I--Not
: . -- f-i -
------ 1 11
DO’2 7
I
~WHILE--DO 28 :~-

1 ~ ,!
111 11;
pos-
s~%le
‘pi” m ---.- II
. LE!!22L.J. -+.+- +.
. !1,
.
END 3 : +’p-k
u“ EN”D2 “: ::’--- . ‘ : - ; ; ~‘
END2 ; II
-- &.l-
t I
END 1 ; -- -4 I
END1 ; - -. L
Not@ With nesting, “m” which has b-n used
once cannot be used.

-217-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

~ ~E–DOm must be designated first @ WHILE-DOm and ENDm must correspond on a

and FNDm last. 1:1 (pairing) basis in the same program.

r- WHILE-DO I ; --1 ‘-”

I .[
r-END 1 -----
7, I I
I I I
I 5 !
Not possible~ . I Blot possible “~- WHILE-DO I ; -‘~
5 ~
IL- WHILE-D() I :-4 I
: \
I~ END1; 1
------ ---

~ Two WHILE-DOm’s must not overlap. @ Branching externally is possible from the WHILE–
DOm range.

Not possible

~:~ .Posle[ti”

L*Nn

@ ~o~anehing is possible inside =E– ~ S~bprograms ean be called by M98, G65 or G66
. between ~E—DOm’s.
[WHILE-DO 1 :[ Main program Subprogram
lF+GOTOn Not I
possible , IF-GOTOn ; ! .WHZLE-DO
I.
I WlilLE-DOO
2:
r WFIILE-DO 1 ; ‘-1 LEND1 ; Possible
Tot I ~ -------J C65
~1 ~o~dp
nssibl 1 *L? 35
~WHIL3?-1)01 q
I END2:
[[ Nn
I ENDI :
! I ‘Fin: I \
1 i M02: M99:
lEf.4Dl: II ~E-Nf: : {
b- .-------d

@ Calls ean be initiated by G65 or G66 @ A program error results with M99 unless WHILE
between WHILE-DOm’s and commands and END are paired within the subprograms
can be issutxl again from 1. Up to 27 nest- @cluding macro subprograms),
ing levels are possible for the main program
and subprograms.
., Main program Subprogram
Main program Subprogram (100)
‘1
WHILE-DO 1: I :1
WHILE-DO \ I WHILE
: ~jTo-_ M99 -DO i :
Possible Ploo;
Ploo:l \ \ \
\ \ P - M99:
END1 : I E!iD1 : I1
M02:
5 5 i.
M02 M99:
DOn ENDn constitutes
illegal usage.

-218-
 13. Pl?OGRAM S’UPPOR T FUNCTIONS ‘“
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

13.7.7 EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS

(1) Outline
Besides the standand user macro commands, the following macro instructions are also available as
externaI out~ut commands. Thev are designed to outuut . the variable values or characters via the
RS-232C in~erface.
1) Types
POPEN For preparing the processing of data outputs
PCLOS For terminating the processing of data outputs
BPRNT For character output and variable value bina~ output
DPRNT For character output and digit-bydigit variable value numerical output
2) Command sequenee

.“..-.-.. Open command

1 1
BPRNT DPRNT . ........ Data output command

I I
[
PC LOS “....,..-.. Close cmnmand

(2) Open command: I?OPEN

Command format: POPEN ;
Detailed description
1) The command is issued before the series of data outnut commands.
2} The DC2 control code and % code are output from’the NC system to the external output device.
3) Once POPEN ; has been issued, it will remain valid until PCLOS ; is issued.
(3) Close eornmand: PCLOS
Command formafi PCLOS ;
Detailed descrhtion
1) Thi~ command is issued when all the data outputs are complefed.
2) The DC4 control code and % code are output from the NC unit to the external output device.
3) This command is used together with the open eo,m,mand and it should not be issued unless the open
mode has been established.
4) Issue the close command at the end of the program even when operation has been suspended by
resetting or some other operation during data output.

-219-
13.PI?OGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

(4) Data output command: 13PRNT

Command format

BPRNT [~1 #vl [c1] {2 #v2 [c2].......] . ..

T—
Character string
Variable number Variable value x 10’1
Significant digits below decimal point }
D etaikd ckseription
1) This provides the character output and binary output of the variable values.
2) The commanded character string is output as is by the 1S0 cude.
Alphanumerics (A – ~ O – 9) andspecial characters (-I-, -, *,/) can be used.
“*“ is output as the space code.
3) All variables are stored with decimal points and so the number of digits required below the decimal
point is commanded inside square parentheses. The variable values are handled as &byte (32-bit) data
and they are output as binary data from the high-order bytes. Minus (-) data are handled as the
complement.
(&imple 1)
If 3 digits are to be specified for 12.3456, the following will be output as binary data
[12.346 X ld = 12346 (MN)0303A)
(Example 2)
If 0 digits are to be specified with -100.0, the following will be output as binary data:
-103 (FFFFFF9C)
4) After the specified data have been output, the EOB code is output in the form of an 1S0 code.
5) A <vacant> variable is treated as zero.
(5) Data output command: DPRNT
Command format
DPRNT [$1 441 [dlcl] e2#v2[d2c2] ......]

Significant digits above decimal point ~+ d ~ 8

-“’’’”’’”r Significant digits below deeimal point }
Detailed desabtion
1) Th~character output and variable value deeimal output are conducted in 1S0 c-odes.
2) The commanded character strings are output as they are in 1S0 codes.
Alphanumerics (A – z O – 9) and speeial characters (+, -, *,/) can be used.
3) The required significant digits above and below the decimal point in the variable values are
commanded within square parentheses. As a result, the variable values equivalent to the commanded
number of digits including the deeimal point are output in 1S0 code% decimal notation from the
high-order digits. Trailing zeroes are not omitted.

. .

-220-’1
 ,!

13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS

13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATION’S

13.7.8 CHECKPOINTS
(1] When the user macro commands are employed, it is possible to use the M, S, T and other NC control
commands together with the arithmetic, decision, branching and other macro commands for preparing the
machining programs. When the former commands are made into NC executable statements and the latter
commands into macro statements, the macro statement processing should be accomplished “as quickly as
possible in order to minimize the machining timq because such processing is not directly related to machine
control.
As a result, the parameter (“macro single” on the parameter page) can be decided upon and the macro
statements can be procesxxl in parallel with the execution of the NC executable statement.
(I’he parameter can be set OFF during normal machining to process a~lthe macro statements together or set
ON during a prom-am check to execute the macro statements block by block. This enables the setting to be
made in a-m~da&e with the inteuded objective in mind.)
-1

Example of program
[

N1 G91~28X0 20:
N2 G92x0 20:
N3 Coox- loo. z- loo,:

N4 #101= 100, *COS[210.l;

Macro statement
?4S $1103-10O.* SIN[2IO:):
N6 CO] XSIOI Z S103 F800:

Macro statements ar~

1. Arithmetic commands (blocks including =)
2. Control commands (@cks including @OTO, DO–END, etc.)
3. Macro call commands (including macro calls based on G codes and cancel command (G65. G66.
G66.1, G67))
NC statermmts are all those statements which are not macro statements.
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.7USER MACRO SPECIFICATIONS

low of processing

Macro single OFF

. ..
Program analysis N1. N2 +&*&
1 %
1; 1 N4 N.5 ;
a
Macro statement 1 , I
processing I t 1
I ; ~~ ;N 1 N6 I T47
8 I
NC statement ~=t mmnand ~ 1; t
processing I N1 !N2j N3 : N6
Executing
{

Macro single ON

Program analysis
,NI, N2 ,N3 N4 N5 N6 N7
t I I I ,
!1 I I
Macro statement l! 1 1N4 1 &N5 ~ t
processing , , , I
I I t “:1
I N2 a ~N3 ~ . N4 h 1 I NT
NC statement Nextcommand ! 4
1 1“1 I
processing I N1 lN2t N3 I N6
Executing 1
, I

Machining program display

Macro single OFF
N4, N5 and N6 are processed irt parallel with the
cmtrd of the NC executable statememt of N3. N6 is
an NC executable statement and so it is displayed as
the next command. If the N4, N5 and N6 analysis is:
-----------
-%, time during N3 control, the machine movement will h
I --.---—. .-7
continuously controlled.

. .

Macro single ON N4 is processed in paral~el with the control of the NC

executable statement of N3, and it is displayed as the
next eomrnand. N5 and N6 are analyzed and N6 is
executed after N3 has finished, and so the machine
control is held on standby during the N5 and N6
analysis time.

-222-
 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.
13.8.FACING TOOL REST MIRROR IMAGE {G68.G69J

13.8. FACING TOOL REST MIRROR IMAGE (G68, G69)

(1) Outline
With machines in which the reference tool rest and facing tool rest are integrated, this function enablea
the workpiece to be cut by the tools on the facing tool rest using the programs ptitpared at the
reference tool rest side. (See figure below).
The distance belween the two tool rests is set beforehand by parameter.

(2) Command format

G68: Facing tool rest mirror image ON
G69: Facing tool rest mirror image OFF

When the G68 command is issued, the subsequent programmed coordinate systems are shifted to the facing tool
rest side and the movement direction of the X axis is made the opposite of that commanded by the program. When
the G69 command is issued, the,subsequent programmed coordinate systems are returned to the reference tool rest
side.

x I
.A,
1 I Reference tool rest

Programmed path

Parameter
for distance
)-——— between too~
rests (radial
valuq X axis
only)

Facing tool rest path

(mirror image ON)

l--w

I I Facing tool rest

. .
 PROGR.M4 SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.
13.8.
FACING TOOL REST MRROR .IM4Gl?
{G6&G69j

(3) program and example of operation

1) Operation of absolute value command

TO1O1; Selection of reference tool rest

GOOX1O. ZO ; Machining by reference tool rest
GO1 2-40. F400 ; . . . . . . (A)
X20. ; )

G68 ; Facing tool rest mirror image ON

T0202 ; Selection of facing tool rest Machining by facing tool rest
GOOX20. Z-40. ; ..... [1] ...... (B)
GO1 X20. 2-80. F200 ; 1
X30. ;

G69 ; Facing tool rest mirror image cancel

TO1O1; Selection of reference tool rest Machining by reference tool rest
GOOX30. Z-SO. :..... ~21 1 . . . . . . (c)
. .
GO1 X30. Z–-12O.’F4O;’;“ J

rest

— z

! 1 ~
II Facing tool rest

The value obtained from the tool rest interval parameter is added to the fiist X axis command movement after the
facing tool rest mirror image turns on. In the above operation emmple, the movement WM changefrom @ tO @’
in the program [1] block.
The value obtained from the tool rest interval parameter will be deleted from the fwst X axis command movement
after the facing tool rest mirror image cancel. In the abotie’operation example, the movement will change from@)
to @’ in the program [2] block.

-224-
 13, PROGRAM SUPPORT’FUNCTIONS
13.8.
FACING TOOL REST JfIRllOR
liW4GE{G@,G69]

2) Operation of the incremental value command

TO1O1; Selection of reference tool rest

GOOX1O. Z@
GO1 Z-40. F400 ;
X20. ;
1 Machining by reference tool rest
. . . . . . (A)

G68; Facing tool rest mirror image ON

J
T020~ Selection of facing tool rest Machining by facing tool rest
GOOU–10. WO. ; ..... [1]’ . ..... (B)
GO1 X20. Z-80. F200 ;
X30. ;

G69 ; Facing tool rest mirror image cancel

TO1O1;
Gol ~- 10. WO
GOOU
Selection of reference tool rest
. . . Fig]’
. .
9
1
J
Machining by reference tool rest
. . . . . . (c)

–-i@
c1 \
1- —1
x Reference tool rest

I @

—
-R-------+E== —- *Z

II
LP
u Facing tool rest

The incremental value command, after the facing tool rest mirror image is turned ON, will move the X axis
movement direction the amount of the program command in reverse, regardless of the tool rest interval parameter.
In the [1]’ block where the 3-1 program [1] block has been changed to an incremental value cmmnand, the tool
will move + 10, the reverse of -10. In the operation exmpple, this will be the movement ~ - ~.
This is the same for the incremental command after the facing tool reset mirror image cancel. If the [2]’ block
where the 3-1 program [2] block has been changed to an incremental value command, the tool will move —10. In
the operation example, this will be the movement 0- a.

-225-
13.PROGR4M SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.8.
FACING TOOL REST MIRROR WGE (G68,G69j

(4) Facing tool rest offset amounts

j Z {001length{ Referenee tool rest

x To& Iength reference point.
1 L II

I Work offset ‘too’’en*

:>q i

-—-—
.—
Workpiece u-- ---<. -
I Z tool length
:,k
# Parameter for
?,;
~

or
I distance between tool
.—. z ;2 rests (radial valuq X
<,
,:
$ $!
... axis only)
Work zero point
z tool length [j

X tool Iengt

Tool length
reference point9 Facing tool rest

1) TOOIlength offset amount

The tool hmgth is the distance from the tool nose to the tool length referemx point. This definition is
the same for the facing tool rest. However, the offset amount setting differs aecarding to the position
of the tool length referenee point, as shown below. @e settings are approached from the types in the
table below.)
TypeA lypeB Type c

E
Work zero point Workfheecenter Work rlim cent= tvorktire c@er
TOC4kn@h refemnee rOOlrestrefereru. points Referencetool mt referencepoiof work fsce cater
point
Distancebetwwn 1001 Disfencebetweenrefsrem points of
rests both tool rests (mdisfvalue)
WO* offset work rm’opoint workSero point
- tool Ieagttlreftmmc4poinl of refer- - tool
lengthrefererm point of refer-
mJe tool msl mm twl rest
I Tool Ieugth rod lengthreferencepint - tool nose rOOltenglhreferencepoinl - tool nose Foollength referemxpoint -t@ nose
position positkm )osition
Outfinediagrams

Work of&t I Tool length

t m
Work )h ,.,,.:,,,,

Tool length _ ]

m- Tool length
M

-226-
 ,’

13.PROGRAkf SUPPORT FUNCTIO..S

13.8.
FACING TOOL REST MIRROR lik.&4GE
(G68,G69)

The previous page outline drawings apply when the machine parameter (basic spmifications parameter) “mirrA”
is O. lf it is 1, the value is set with the tool of the facing tooI rest in the same direction as the tool of the reference
tool rest. At this tire% the tool Iength reference point is the tool length reference point of the reference tool rest.
When “mirrA” is 1, the sign for the X-axis tool length wear amount for the facing tool is rmersed and the tool
nose point is set to the opposite side (for instanc~ 2 + 3). When tooi length measurement is-executed with
“mirrA” at O, the data will be accepted with “mirrA” as O.
(Setting examples)

mirrA = O mirrA = 1
x z x z
Work offset -120. -110. -120. -110.
TOO1length of reference tool rest 80. 35. $0. 35.
Tool wear amount of referenm tool rest -20. -5. -20. -5.
Tool nose POint of reference tool rest 3 3
Tool length of facing tool rest 150. 40. 120. 40.
TOO1wear amount of facing tool rest 20. -5. -20. -5.
Tool nose POint of facing tool rest 2 3
Distance between tool rests o 0
2) Tool length wear offset amount
The tool length wear offset amount is the distanm from the current tool nose to the original tool nose.
The original tool nose is that value applying when the tool length offsel amount was set.
3) Tool nose point with tool nose R compensation
The tool nose point with tool nose R compensation is as follows. It is the same for both the referenrx
and facing too-l rests.
Tool wear offset amount and tool nose R tool nose point

Referewe tool rest side

!I 26 I
x I 7.05
I
Wear ‘ 1
amount i 3 8 /!J
~p —----
Reference tool
z
T —--.
.= Reference tool

I Wear
amount’

~
I
Wear tool
Facing tooI rest side

4) Distance between tool rests

The distance between the tool rests is the distance from the tool Iength reference point of the facing tooI
rest to the tool length reference point of the reference tool rest. It is set by parameter only for the X
axis.
“O” is set when the tool length reference point is common.
Machine parameler (basic specifications parameter) #22 mirofs
Setting rangti O – 99999.999 (mm). (radial value)

-227-
13. PROGRAMSUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.9.
CORNER CH4ik@E~NG, CORNER ROUNDING FUNC170N I

13.9. CORNER CHAMFERING, CORNER ROUNDING FUNCTION I

Chamfering at any angle or corner rounding is performed automatically by adding”, C –“ or”, R –“ to the end
of the block to be commanded first among those cmmnand blocks which shape the comer with lines only.
. ..
13.9.1 CC)RNER CHAMFERING (, C . )
(1) Function
The corner is chamfered in such a way that the positions produced by subtracting the lengths commanded
by “, C_ “ from the imaginary starting and final comers which would apply if no chamfering were to be
performed, are connected.

(2) Command format

N1OOG(M X – 2-, C– ; Chamfering is performed at the point where NUN and N2C4)
N200 GO1 X – 2- ;~ intersect .
}
~gt hn h up to chamfering starting point or end point from
imaginary comer
(3) 13mmp1e of program

1) GO1W1OO.,C1O. F1OO ;
2) U280. Wloo. ;

X axis —

(a
Imaginary comer
intersection point / 140
Chamfering
Chamfering start point end point

I ‘7@e
1- *
m. o 100.0

(4) Detailed description

1) The start point of the block following the comer chamfering serves as the imaginary comer intersection
point.
2) When the comma in “,C>’ is not present, it is handkd as a C command.
3) When both C— and R— are commanded in the same block, the latter command is valid.
4) Tool offset is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to comer chamfering.
5) Program error “P382” results when the block following the command with comer chamfering does n’ot
contain a linear command.
6) Program error “P383” results when the movement amount in the block commanding comer
chamfering is less than the chamfering amount.
7) Program error “P384” results when the movement amount m the block following the block
commanding corner chamfering is kss than the chamfering amount.
8) Two blocks must be pre-read for intersection calculation when the corner rounding function I is assigned.

-22a-
 23.PROGW SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.9.
CORNER C~lUUNG, CORNER ROUNDING FUNCTKW I

13.9.2 CORNER ROUNDING (, R–)

(1) Function
The imaginary comer, which would exist if the comer were not to be rounded, is roundezl with the
arc having the radius which is commanded by “,R-”. . ..

(2) Command format

N1OOGOl X– Z-, R– ; Rounding is performed at the point where N1OO and N200
N200 GO1 X– Z- ;~ intersect.
}
I . Arc radius of comer rounding
(3) Example of program

1) GO1 W1OO., R1O. F1OO ;

2) U280. Wloo. ;

X axis 4
Comer rounding
end point

I
Comer rounding start point 140

0 J’

* Z axis
< >
100.0 103.0

(4) Detailed description

1) The start point of the block folIowing the corner rounding serves as the imaginary comer intersection
point.
2) When the comma in “,R’> is not present, it is handled as an R command.
3) When both C— and R— are commanded in thcl same block the latter command is valid.
4) Tool offset is calculated for the shape which has alr=dy been subjected to comer rounding.
5) Program error “P382” results when the block following the command with corner rounding does not
contain a linear command.
6) Program error “P383” results when the movement amount in the block commanding comer rounding
is less than the R value.
7) Program error “P384” results when the movement amount in the block following the block
commanding comer rounding is less than the R value.
8) Two bIocks must be pre-read for contact point calculation when corner RI is assigned.

-229-
 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.
13.10.
CORNER CMFERING, ROUNDING FUNCTTON L?

13.10. CORNER CHAMFERING, ROUNDING FUNCTION 11

This function enables chamfering and comer rounding by adding “,C-” or “,R-” after the first command~
block among the command blocks which configure the comer by an arc or line with any continuous angle.
Chamfering and comer rounding can be conducted with both absolute and incremental commanh.

13.10.1 CORNER CHAMFERING (,C– )

(1) Function
Comer chamfering is conducted by issuing the “,C_ “ command in the first block among 2 blocks
including a continuous arc. In the case of an arc, the length of the chord applies,

(2) Command format

N1OO G03 X– Z- I– K– ,C– ; Chamfering is performed at the point of intersection

between N1OO and N200
N200 GOI X– G ; d Length from imagina~ corner to start or end point of
chamfering

x
Irriagina~ comer intersection
point

.. 50
(3) Program examples

1) Line — arc

Absolute value cmnrnands

w-
N1 G28 XZ ;
N2 GOOX50, Z1OO. ;
N3 GO1 X150. Z50. , C20. F1OO ; .
N4 G02 X50. 20 IO K-50. ; 50 100. ‘
.

Incremental value commands

N1 G28 XZ ;
N2 GOOU25. W1OO. ;
N3 GO1 U50. W-50. , C20. F1OO ;
N4 G02 U-50. W-50. IO K-50. ;
.
.

,,!’

-230-
 13. PROGW SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.10.
CORNER CHAikfl?ER?NG,
ROUNDING FUNCT?ON 11

2) Arc – arc
x
Absolute value commands
. ..
IW G28 XZ ; 2~Q.- ●
N2 GOOX20. Z140. ;
N3 G02 X1OO.260.1100. KO , C20. F1OO ;
N4 X60. ZO 180. K-60. ;

Incremental value commands.

[00.-
N1 G28XZ ;
60.-
N2 GOOU1O. W140. ;
N3 G02 U40. W-80. R1OO. , C20. F1OO ;
N4 U-20. W-60, 180. K-60. ; 20.
-
‘z
60. MO.

(4) Detailed description

1) Both the corner chamfering and corner rounding I and II options are required in order to use this
function.
Program error P381 results when the function is assigned without an option.
2) The start point of the block following the comer chamfering serves as the imaginary comer intersection
point.
3) When the cumma in “,C” is not present, it is handled as a C command.
4) When both “,C-” and “,R-” are commanded in the same block, the latter command is valid.
5) Tool offset is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to comer chamfering.
6) Program error “P385” results when the command in comer chamfering or the following block contains
a positioning command or thread cutting command.
7) Program error “P382” results when the block following the command with comer chamfering contains
any command except a group 01 command or any other command.
8) Program error “P383” results when the movement amount in the block commanding comer
chamfering is less than the chamfering amount.
9) Program error “P384” results when the movement amount in the block following the block
commanding comer chamfering is less than the chamfering amount.
10) Radial command values apply for comer chamfering even with diametrical commands.
11) Two blocks must be pre-read for intersection calculation when corner rounding 11 is assigned.

-231-
 , “;“

PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS

13.
13.10.
CUR?JERCWFE~NG, ROV’’ING FUNCTION n

13.10.2 CORNER ROUNDING (, R– )

(1) Function

Comer rounding is accomplished by commanding “,R-” in the first block for 2 blocks including a
continuous arc.
(2) Command format

N1OO G03 X– Z- I– K– ,R– ; Rounding is performed at the point

N200 GO1 X– Z- ; ,} where NKIO and ?4200 intersect.
Arc radius of corner rounding

(3) Program examples

1) Line — arc

Absolute value commands

N1G28XZ; A -z
N2 GOOX60. Z1OO. ;
N3 GO1 X160. Z50. , RIO. F1OO ; I 50. 10U.

N4 G02 X60. ZO 10 K-SO. ;

.
.

Incremental value commands

N1G23XZ;
N2 G(MIU30. W1OO.;
N3 GO1 U50. W-50. , R1O. F1OO ;
N4 G02 U–SO. W-50., IO K-50. ;
.
.

. .

-232-
 13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.10.
CORNER CIZ4MFERLNG,ROUNDING FUNCTION I.’.

2) Arc – arc

Absolute value commands X4 ImaginaW corner intersection point

160.~
NI G28 X% ;
N2 GOOX60. ZIOO. ;
N3 G02 X160. 230. R50. , R1O. F1OO ;
N4 X60. Hl R50. ;
. N4
.
60.”
I.ncrementtd value commands
A-1 z
N1 G28 X2 ; 50 4 104.
“N2 GOOU30. W1OO. ;
N3 G02 U50. W-50. 150. KO , R1O. F1OO ;
N4 U-50. W-SO. 10 K-50. ;
.
@

(4) Detailed description

1) Both the comer chamfering and comer roundigg I and II options are required in order to use this
function.
Program error P381 results when the function is assigned without an option.
2) The start point of the block following the comer rounding serves as the imaginary corner intersection
point.
3) When the comma in “,R’ is not present, it is handled as an R command.
4) When both “,C-” aad “,R-” are commanded in the same block, the latter command is valid.
5) Tool offset is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner rounding.
6) Program error “P385” results when the command in comer rounding or the following block contains
a positioning command or thrmd cutting command.
7) Program error “P382” results when the block following the command with comer rounding contains
any command except a group 01 command or any other command.
8) Program error “P383” results when the movement amount in the block commanding comer rouqding
is leas than the R value.
9) Program error “P384” results when the movement amount in the block following the block
commanding comer rounding is less than the R vaIue.
10) Radial command values apply for comer rounding even with diametrical commands.
11) Two blocks must be pre-read for contact point calculation when the corner rounding function II is
assigned.
 l’, ‘1

PROG&lkf SUPPORT FUNCTIONS

13.
13.10.
CORNER ClWillFERING,ROUNDING FUNCTJON 11

13.10-3 INTERRUPT DURING CORNER CHAMFERING/ROUNDING

(1) The operations are shown below for manual interrupt during comer chamfering or emner rounding.
With an absolute value command and manual absolute switch ON

N1 G28 X2:
N2 GOO X40. 2120. ;
n ‘“-”
N3 G03 X140. Z70. K-50. ,R20. F1OO ; ‘_TA

N4 GO1 X40. 220. : { Z.-axis interrupt

/
:.

/
/ I
140,

40.

t I I ‘z
20. 70. 120.
With an incremental value cammand and manual absolute switch OFF

N1 G28 XZ:
N 2 GOO U20. W120. ;
N 3 G03 U50. W-50. K-50. , R20. F 100 ;
N4 GO1 U-50. W-50. ; ~, ~ 2&ixis interrupt

I
[
I ~ X-axis interrupt
I
., 1
I
140.- I

N4

40.” I
is not applied
* -z
20. 70. 120.
/

(2) With a single block during corner chamfering or rounding, the tool stops after corner chamfering or
rounding is executtxl.

-234-
 13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.11.
LINEAR ANGLE COM~

13.11. LINEAR ANGLE COMMAND

(1) Function

The end point coordinates are calculated automaticdy by commanding the linear angle and. one of the end
point coordinate axes.

(2) Command format

N1 GO1 Aal Zzl (XxI) ; This designates the angle and the X or Z axis coordinates.
N2 GO1 A–az Zzl (XxI) ;

(3) Detailed description

1) The angle is from the + direction of the horizontal axis on the selected plane. The counter-clockwise
(CCW) direction is considered to be + and the clockwise direction (CW) -.
2) Either of the axes on the selected plane is curmuanded for the end point.
3) The angle is ignored when the angle and the coordinates of both nxes are commanded.
4) When only the angle has been commanded, this is treated as a geometric command.
5) The angle of either the start point (al) or end point (az) may be used.
6) The function cannot be used when address A is used for the axis name or as the sexmd miscellantxms
function.
7) This function is valid only for the GO1 command; it is not valid for other interpolation or positioning
commands.

-.

,,

-235-
.23. PROGRAkf SUPPilRT
IW?CTIONS
13.12.
GEOhZE17UCCOMM4ND

13-12 GEOMETRIC COMMAND

13.12.1 GEO METRIC COMMAND IA

(1) Function . ..

When it is difficult to determine the point at which the two straight lines intersect with a continuous linear
interpolation command, the end point of the first straight line will be automatically calculated and the
movement command will be controlkxl provided that the slope of the first straight line as well as the end
point coordinates and slope of the second straight line are commanded.

(2) Command format

N1 GO1 Aal (A-a2] Ffl ; This designates the angle and feed rate,
N2 XX2~ A-a2 (Aa3) Ff2 ; This designates the next block end point coordinates, angle and fed rate.

L-
?

z
N1

Present position Horizontal axis

End point (~, X2)

(3) Detailed description

1) Program error “P396” results when the geometric command is not on the selected plane.
2) The slope is expressed as the angle that is formed with the horizontal axis -I- direction on the selected
plane. The counterclockwise (CCW) direction is considered to be + and the clockwise direction (CW)
-.
3) Slope “a” ranges from - 360.000 = a S +360.000.
4) The slope of the line can be commanded on the start or end point side. The start or end point side of
the commanded slope is identified automatically inside the NC system.
5) The end point coordinates of the second block should be commanded with absolute valuea. When
incremental values are used, program error “P393” will result.
6) The feed rate ean be commanded for each block.
7) When the angle where the two straight lines intersect is kss than 1 program error “P392” will result.
8) Program error “P3%’ results when the pIane is selected in the first block and second block.
9) This function is ignored when address A is used for the axis name or as the second miscekmeows
function.
10) Single b~ock stop is possible at the end point of the first block.
11) Program error “PMM” r~u]~s when the first and second blocks do not contain the GO1 or G33
command.
12) Two blocks must be pre-lead for intersection calculation when the geometric IA is assigned.

-236-
 ,,
‘: !,’
‘!,

13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS

13.12.
GEO..ETR?CCOMM4ND

(4]
. . Relationshi~ with other functions
1) Com~r chamfering or comer rounding can be commanded after the angle
cmnrnand in the first block.
(13amp1e 1) ....
N1 Aal, Ccl ;
N2Xxz~Aa, ; N2

c1

C$
(X,.21)
(X*,2,)
\
N2

(Ikample 2)
N1 Aal, Rrl ;
N2Xxz~Aaz; ?

(X, $2,)

2) The geometric mmmand IA ean be issued after the comer chamfering

or comer rounding command.
{

@ample 3) (X,* 2,)

N1 Xxz ~, Ccl ;
N2
N2 Aal ;
N3Xx3~Aaz;
c,

(x*# z:)
cl
(X*,2, )

3) The geome$ric command LA can be issued after the linear angle command.
f
(.Example 4)

I’?l Xxz Aal ;

‘x’- N2
ax

(x,, z,) N1
at
,<
(x,, Z,)

-237-
 ‘,

PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS

13.
13.13.
DATA SETTING (G1O,Gil)

13.13. DATA SETTING (G1O, Gil)

(1) Function

The parameters set from the setting and display unit can be changed in the machining pro.~ams.
The data format used for the data setting is the same as for the parameter tape.

(2) Format

G1O L50 ; ..... Data setting command

P major classification number N data number H bit type data ;

)
P major classification number A axis number N data number D byte type data ; - pmarnetm
I settings
P A N Sword type data; in data
setting
P A N L 2 word type data ; mode
\

Gll ; Data setting mode cancel (data setting completed)

There are 10 types of data formats according to the type of parameter (axis-common and axis-independent) and
data typq as listed below.
..
With axis-cammon data

Axis-common bit-type parameter ... P_ N_ H_;

Axis-cmnmon byted.ype parameter ... P_ N_ D_
Axis-common ward-type parameter ... P_ N_ s—;;
Axis-common 2 word-type parameter ... P ._. N_ L_ ;

With axis-independent data

Axis-independent bit-type parameter ... P _ A_ N_ H_ ;

Axis-independent byt~type parameter ... P _ A_ N_ D_;
Axis-independent word-type parameter ... P _ A_ N_ s“—,,
Axis-independent 2 word-type parameter ... P _ A_ N_ L— ;

lW1’I’E The scquenm of addresses in a block must be as shown above.

Prepare the input tape in accordance with the format below.

1) Data format fi@re

/ #
Fd = Head data Head data F&d F&d

2) There are no particu~ar restrictions cm the number of fed characters.

3) Only one parameter data can be commanded per block.

-238-
 13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.13.
DATA SE17ZNG (G1O,Gil)

(3) Detailed description

1) The data setting function operation is required in order to use this function. Program error “P420”
results when it is commanded without this function present.
2) Program error “P421” results with an illegal parameter number (major classification number, axis
number or data number).
The same error occurs when the setting data (bit-typq byte-typ% word-type or 2 word-type data) have
exceeded the data range.
3) When a program error has occurred in the data setting mod% first remedy the error and then proowd
again with the data setting.
4) H is not possible to use the B binary-type data command address with the data setting. Use the D
byte-type data command address instead.
5) Program error “P421” results if in the data setting format the major classification number, data
number and setting data for axis-common parameters or the major classification number, -axis number,
data number and setting data for axis-independent parameters are not commanded.
6) Program error “P421” results when any G command except Gll and any address except P, ~ N, H,
D, S and L are commanded in the data setting mode.
7) Program error “P421” results when a data setting command is issued during a canned cycle modal or
tool nose R compensation modal.
8) When there are two or more identical addresses in the same block, the last address is valid.
9) Program error “P421” occurs when there are two or more different types of setting data in the same
block.

(4) Program examplea

(Example 1) Setting the G71 ~nimum cut to 1 mm

G1O L50 ;
P1 N1128 L2000 ; G71 minimum cut (inte~olation unit) (1 mm/O.5p = 2000)
Gll ;

(ExampIe 2) DecimaI point ~mmand type 1/2 setting

G50 L50 ;
P1 N1084 H51 ; Setting to decimal point type 2
G;l ;

GOOX-l~Z-200 ; Equivalent to X-1OO. 2-200. (-100 mm, -200 mm)

>
G1O L50 ;
PI P?1084 H50 ; Setting to decimal point type 1
G:l ;

GOOX-1OOZ-2OO; Equivalent to X-O.1 Z-O.2 (-0.1 mm, -0.2 mm)

5
.
13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
1313.DATA SETTING [GIO,
GIIJ

(Example 3) Making the soft limit invalid

5
G1O L50 ;
P2 Al N272 H21 ; X- axis soft limit invalid
P2 A2 N272 H21 ; Z axis soft limit invalid . ..
G/l ;
(Example 4) Setting&e X-axis rapid traverse rate to 24000 mrdmin
5
G1O L50 ;

P2 Al NO L240Cil ; X-axis rapid traverse rate

Gll ;
5

(5) Checkpoints

1) The data format for the data setting is the same as for the parameter tape.
Far details, refer to the data setting N number correspondence table in Appendix 6.
2) ‘l%eparameters which can be set by data setting are restricted to user parameters, machine parameters,
machine error compensation and PLC parameters.
3) The Gll ; (data setting mode cancel) command must be issued after the data setting.
The data are stored in the EEROM by the Gll co”mmand, and so if the Gll command is not assigned,
some data will not be valid after the power is mvitched off.
4) Assign the data setting commands for backlash compensation and machine error compensation on the
zero point.

(6) Addresses and format description

1) The table below lists the addreases used in the data formats and their significance.

Address Significance Details of commands

Major classification command This assigns the major classtication number of
P address the parameter data using a 2-digit number
(positive integer) following P.
Axis number command This enables independent data to be set for’
address each control axis using an axis number follow-
ing A when the input data are
A axis-independent data. (The number of control
axes is inherent to each machine.)
An error results when this address is used for
the axis-common data command.
Data number command This assigns the data numbers (inherent
address number for each data) for the parameter data
using a 5-digit number (positive integer)
following N.
N
(Reference should be made to the correspimd-
ence table of N numbws in Appendix for the
correspondences between the P numbers, N
numbers and data contents.)
Bit-type data command This is used for the data command in which
address both the byte size parameter or command bit
command can be assigned. The first digit in
the 2-digit number (positive integer) fol~owing
H
H assigns the command bit while the last digit
assigns the parameter value (Oor 1).
Example of application:
HdO: Sets bit “d” off.
{ Hdl: Sets bit “d” on (d: O – 7)

-240 -
 13. PROGR.4J4SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.13.
DATA SETE?NG {GIQ,Gllj

Address Significance Details of commands

Byte-type data command This assigns the byte-ty~e parameter value
D
address (decimal) with a number (integer) following D.
Word-type data command This assigns the word-type pararne$er value
s
address (decimal) with a number (integer) following S.
2 word-type data command This assigns the 2 word-type parameter value
L
address (decimal) with a number (integer) following L.

. Leadirm zeroes can be omitted in the address data.

o Refere~ce should be made to the “data types” in the correspondence table for data setting N
numbers in Appendix 6 for information on which addresses are used for the data command
addresses

2) The corresmndence between the P numbers and parameter data major classiciations are listed in the
table below.

Major
classiilcation Type of parameter Axis data Remarks
(P number)
1 Axis-common parameters ~
2 Axis-independent parameters o
Machine error compensation
3 o
E information
14 Machine error compensation amount
PLC constant
t+- PLC timer
17 PLC counter I
Bit selection parameter
1 A batch output is executed
PLC axis control parameter o only when the PLC axis
control oDtion is used.
Not used
Axis-common parameters (additional
I 13
area)
Axis-independent parameters
L (additional area)
o

-241-i
 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.
13.13.
DATA SJYi71iVG
{GlO,
Gil)

3) The general data ranges determined by the data type are shown in the table below.

Data command Data type Data range

address

H Bit {fifi{:E{:&J:~&R
Bit
D Byte -128 – +255
s Word -32768 – + 65535
L 2 words —199999998 - -f-199999998

1
NOTE The data ranges enabling the parameter settings differs accxmding to each individual
parameter.
Thereforq when preparing the input tape, check the data ranges under the “setting ranges
(units)” in the correspondence table for the data setting N numbers in Appendix 6 and enter
the proper value.

4) Units
The units displayed in the correspondence table for the N numbers are the least input increments of the
parameter data.
For the interpolation unit% output units and speed units, refer to the following tables and set the
proper data vake.

1) Interpolation units
Interpolation unit = input unit x 1/2
The input unit can be selected by parameter for each axis from among the following types.

rnput Linear axis Rotary

unit axis
Machine Machine
constant (mm) constant ~nch)
A 0.01 mm O.OU1inch 0.010
B 0.001 mm O.~1 inch 0.0010
c 0,0001 mm 0.00001 inch O.00010

. .

-242-
 13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.13.
DATA SEll_lNG(G1O,Gil)

2) Output units
The output unit can be selected by parameter for each axis from among the following types. ‘

..

eonstrmt (mm) constant (inch)

A 0.005 mm 0.0005 inch 0.005 “
B 0.0005 mm 0.00005 inch 0.0Q05 Q
1 c 0.00005 mm I 0.000005 inch I 0.00005 @

3) Speed units
The speed unit em be selected by parameter for each axis from among the following typet+.

Input Linear axis Rotary

unit axis
Machine Machine
constant (mm) constant (inch)
A 10.0 mrrdmin LO inchfmin 10.00
B 1.0 mm/min 0.1 inchimin 1.04
,C 0.1 mrdmin 0.01 inch/rein 0.10

The parameter data in tables 1 through 3 are set with the follo ~ingparameters.

Input unit (A/B/C) + System parameters

Machine constant input unit (mm/inch) + Axis-common machine parameters
* Axis-independent machine parameters
{ Linear axishotary axis

5) 13ramplea of data formats

a. Axis-common parameters
Data format

Format used Data type Area in which N number is specified

PIN_ H_ ; Bit
PIN_ D_ ; Byte
PIN_ s— ; Word (See appendix for details)
PIN_ L_ ; 2 words

. .
13. PROGRAMSUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.13.
DATA SETTING (GIO,
Gil)

Programs
@3xample] Setting to the incremental value radial designation
PI N384 HOI ; or PI N384 H1 ;
~a.mple] Setting the 2nd miscellaneous function code (M2name) to B . ..
P 1 N386 D66 ; c~ASE SPEC PARAM] M. PARAM 1.2/5
ASCI I ‘B”=42H #
[ =66 1 1 Mfig 3 13
2 Mbin o 14
3 Sfin 1 15
4 Shin -1 16
.5 Tfig 1 17
6 Thin O 18
7 M2fig 1 19
8 MM 020
~9 M2name B 21
10 skip 150 22 mires 12345.678
11 extdcc 30023
12 tapovr 10024

b. Axis-independent parameters X E]~ATA( )

BASE I AXIS IZP-RTNI SERVO IMENU
Data fo~at

Format used Data type Area in which A Area in which N

number is specified number is specified
P2A_N_ H_; Bit
P2A_N_D _ ; Byte l– no. of control axes
P2A_N_s _ ; Word (See appendix for details)
lJ2A. N_L_ ; 2 words
Program
~ample] Setting the X-axis rapid traverse rate (rapid) to 15000 (mmhnin) (with millimeter system)

P2 Al NO L15000: psas SPEC.PAJLu.q K PARAM

2113
$ m
‘1 rapid . 15000 13 OT --12345.678
2 clamp 4000 14 OT + 10.000
smgsf 621 15 tlml - 1234.567
: GOIL 200 16 tlml + 1234.567
.5 GOtl 200 17 tlml
G012 60 18
; GItL 30 19 tap-g 10.00
8 GItl 3020
9 G1t2 1021
10 OTlm 5022
11 GOhack 1023
12 G1back 524

1#( ■)DATA( )
BASE ~ AXIS ~ZP-RTNI SERVO~ MENU

-244-
 ,;,
!,

13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS “

13.13.
DATA SHWING (GIO,Gil)

c. Machine error compensation information

Data format -

Data type Area in which A Arm in which N

number is specified number is. specified
Word l— no. of control axes 1—6
(see appendix for details)
2 words 7
(NOTE
. The A number indicates the number <1> of the setting location on the machine errol
compensation screen — <no. of control axes >.) -
Program example
@3xample] Setting Z into the basic axis (cmpax) in <2> on the screen

P3 A2 N1 S1; ~C-ERR. CMP. . M. PARAM 5.1/9

# (1}
\ (2) (3)
1 mpax x z c
2 drcax
3 rbvrio : 1: 3:
4 mdvno 13 25
5 pdvno i 17 30
6 SC
7 spcdv 1000: 1000! 1000:
:
10
11
~ample] Setting the division distance 12
(spcdv) in e 1> on the screen
to 100OO
, #() / [ )( )( )( )
P3 Al N7 L20000; MC-ERR MACRO j SPINDLE I ~ ~ C I MENIJ

d. Machine error compensation amount

Data format

Format used Data type Area in which N number is specified

P4N_ D_; Byte 1 — 128x no. of eontml axes
Program example
fExample] Setting -4 into offset numbez 5 (#5)
>
‘~C-ERR. CMP.] M. PARAM 5.2/9
#
-2 13 -4 25 -2 37 0
; o 14 -2 26 -4 38 0
3 6 15 -2 27 -2 39 0
P4 N5 D–4;
4 -4 16 4 28 -4 40 0
=5 -4 17 6 29 6 41 0
6 2 18 0 30 6 42 0
7 0 19 0 31 0 43 0
8 0 20 0 32 0 44 0
0 21 0 33 Q 45 0
1: 0 22 0 34 0 46 0
11 0 23 0 47 0
12 0 24 8 :: 0 48 0 ‘
# ( )DATA ( )
MC-ERR MACRO I SPINDLE I P LC I MENU
,

-245-
13.PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.13.
DATA SETTING (GIO,Gil)

e. PLC constant

Data format

Format used Data type Area in which N number. is specified

P5N_L—; Word 1–48
Program example
@%ample] Setting 100 into*
- ~LC DATA] M_ PARAM 8.1/10 ‘

13
P5 N8 LIOO; 14
15 .

H
18

I
21
1: 22
1; 23
12 24

# ( WATA ( )
MC-ERR I MACRO [ SPINDLE

f. PLC timer
Data format

Format used Data type Area in which N number is specified

P6N_s _ ; Word 0–103
Program example
~ample] Setting T17 into 100sw

F ~LC TIMER] M- PARAM 8.3/10 y

#
o 0.16 024 0
,~17 10025 0
P.6 N17 SIOO; ” 2 0 10 0 18 026 0
3 0 11 019 027 0
4 -o 12 020 028 0
5 0 13 021 029 0
6 0 14 022 030 0“
7 0 15 0 23 031 0

. . # O -# 15: 10ms
H6 -# 95:100ms
X96 - M 03: 100ms INC.

#( •)~ATJ+ ( )
MC-ERR I MACRO 1 SPINDLE ~ P L C 1 MENU ,

-246-
 13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.13.
DATA SETIING (Gl~ Gil)

g. PLC counter
Data format

Format ‘USd Data type Area in which N number is specified

. ..
P7N_S—; Word O–23
Program example
~ample] Setting C3 into 20

@?LCCOUNTER] M- PARAM 8.7/10

#
00120
P7 N3 S20; 1 0 13 0
14 0
‘; 2: 15 0
4016
17 i
;; 180
70190
80200
P 21 0
1: :220
11 0 23 0

#( ❑)DATA[ )
MCERR [ MACRO I SPINDLE MENU

h, Bit selection parameter

Data format

Format used Data type Area in which N number is spmified

F8N_ H__; Bit 1 – 96 (contents fixed for 45 – 95)
P8N_D—; Byte (See appendix for details.)
Program examples
~ample] Setting #1 into bit pattern 01010101
flpm SELECT] M- PARAM 8.8/10’
P8 N1 D85;
$76543210 76543210 76543210
01010101,=85 ‘1 01010101 13 11110000 25 l~OCl1100
2 00000000 14 00000000 2600000000
3 00000000 15 00000000 27 00000000
~ample] Setting #6 bit 3 CjN 4 00000000 16 00000000 28 00000000
5 00000000 17 00000000 29 00000000
P8 N6 H31; ‘6 00001000 18 00000000 30 00000000
L Off (0)/ON
L Bit number
(1)
““ 9
7
8

10
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
19 00000000
20 00000000
21 00000000
22 00000000
31 00000000
32 00000000
33 00000000
34 00000000
11 0000000023 00000000 35 00000000
12 0000000024 00000000 36 00000000
76543210
*( ■)DATA( )
Mc-Erm lMA~O ,] SPr~LE MEtW ~

-247-
 !,

13. PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS

13.13.DATA S.77ZNG {GM, Gil)

i. PLC axis control parameter

Data format

Format used Data type Area in which N number is specified

P9A N H ; Bit
P9 A—N—D ; Byte 0-120
P9 A—N—S ; Word
P9 A—N—L
.— —7 s 2 words

Program example
[Example] Setting FFFF into the 4th axis encoder motor type (#25 MTY). ~
P9 A4 N96 S65535 ;

[ PLC SERVO PARAMl 4-AXIS M_ PM?MvI10.4/~

#
2!5MTY FFFI
26
27

::
30
31
32

-248-
 13. PROGW SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.13.
DATA SM!TTNG (G1O,Gil)

j. Axis-common parameters (additional area)

Data format

Format used Data type Area in which N number is specified

P13N H ; Bit
P13N D ; Byte (Refer to appendm for details)
P13 N—S ~ Word
P13 N—L— ; 2 words

Program example
@3xample] Turn the dog-less absolute position detection abolute position set ON.
. P13 N3 H31 ;

\ [ ABSOLUTE POSITIONj M. PARMI 1.5/5

(x) {z) (c)
SET FIN
E~G
\#.
o~ 4: “o *
1
2
3
4

-249-
13. PROGRAMSUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13.13.
DATA SETl?NiG(GIO,
GIIJ

k. Axis-independent parameters (additional area)

Data format

Format used Data type Area iu which A Area in which N number is

number is specified specified
P14N —— H ; Bit
P14N — D —! . Byte 1- no. of control axes (Refer to appendix for details.)
P14N S ; Word
P14 N—L—;
—— 2 words

Program example
[Example] Set the Z axis dog-less absolute position detection zero point to 999.909.
P14 A 2 N20 L999909 ; ~’

[ ABSOLUTE POSI+IONl M. pm 1.5/5

(x) (z) (c)
SET
ELG
#
o
1 /
2 base 9999909
3
4

. .

-250-
 ,,

14.COORDINATE s YSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS

14.1.COORDINATE WORDS AND ICONTROL. AJiES

14. COORDINA~ SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS

14.1. CO ORDINATE WORDS AND CONTROL AXES
In the case of a Iathq the axis parallel to the spindle is known as the Z axis and its forward direetimi iii the direction
in which the tool rest moves away from the headstock whiIe the axis at right angles to the Z axis is the X axis and
its forward direction is the direction in which it movcx away from the Z axis, as shown in the figure below.

Tailstock

!
Headstock

Coordinate axes and polarities

Since coordinates based on the right hand rule are used with a lathe, the forward direction of the Y axis in the
above figure which is at right angles to the X-Z plane is downward. It should be borne in mind that an arc on the
X2 plane is expressed as clockwise or counterclockwise as seen from the forward direction of the Y axis. (Refer
to the section on circular interpolation.)

(“& – G59)

(Valid in G54 – G59)

.,
~-% ,-

=
2nd reference point +2
. /“’”
~28 @
-+x
A
Reference point
(+Y)

@
Relationship between coordinates

-251-
14. COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14.2. BASIC MACHINE, WORK AND LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEMS

14.2. BASIC MACHINE, WORK AND LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEMS

The basic machine eoordirmte system is fixed in the machine and it denotes that position which is determined
inberently by the machine,
The work coordinate systems are used for programming and in these systems the reference point on the workpiece
is set as the coordinate zero point.
The Ioeal eaordinate systems are created on the work coordinate systems and they are designed to facilitate the
programs for parts machining.
Upon completion of the referenee point return, the basic machine coordinate system and work coordinate systems
(G54 – G59) are automatically set with reference to the parameters.
The basic machine coordinate system is set so that the first reference Point is brought to the position succified by
the parameter from the basic machine coordinate zero point (machi~e zero point~. “ “

1st reference point

Basic machine coordinate system ,
I

G92 / I
(G 54)

+x
I Work ccmrdinate

● 0

<

(G 53)
Ik$aslcmacnme +??
.-
coordinate system )
I
The local coordinate systems (G52) are valid on the coordinate systems designated by work coordinate systems 1
through 6.
When G522M2ZZ2, is set in the G59 work coordinate system selection, the G59 work coordinate system will
shift to the G52 (G59) point in the figure. The other work coordinates (G54 to G58) will not be affected
by this.
The automatic coordinate system (G92) is valid on all work piece coordinate systems from 1 to 6.
When G92XXIZZ1; is set at A point in the G54 work coordinate system, the G54 work coordinate system
will shift to the G92 (G54) point in the diagram. The other work coordinate systems (G55 to G59) will also
shift at this time.
. .

-252-

.
 14. COORDINATE S Y’ TEM SETTING’ FUNCTIONS
14.3.MACHINE ZERO POINT AND 2ND REFERENCE pOINT (ZERO
POINT]

14.3. MACHINE ZERO POINT AND 2ND REFERENCE POINT (ZERO

POINT)
The machine zero point serves as the reference for the basic machine coordinate system. It is inherent to the
machine and is det~ned by the reference (zero) point return. . ..
The second reference (zero) point relates to the position of the coordinates which have bea set beforehand by
parameter from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate system.

Basic machine
coordinate system Machine zero point

2nd reference point z

x

1st reference point

(x,, z,)
x
(X,, z])

z
Local coordinate system
(G52)
x
7 P
Workcoordinatesystems (G54 – G59)
z

. .

-253-’
14.COORDINATE S YS TEikiSETTING FUNCTIONS
14.4.AUTOMATIC COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING

14.4. AUTOMATIC COO RDINATE SYSTEM SETTING

When the tool has arrived at the reference point by dog-type referenm point return after the NC system’s power
has been switched on. this function createa the various coordinate svstems
. in accordance with the .narameter values
input beforehand fro”m the setting and display unit.
The actua~ machining program is programmed over the coordinate systems which have been set”above.
#-
Basic machine coordinate system
Mach
pokt
k
coerdinale

Z*

#
xx Local coordinate system (G52)

2nd reference point 1st reference p{

Detailed description
(1) The coordinate systems created by this function areas follows
1) Basic machine coordinate system
2) Work coordinate systems (G54 – G59)
The local coordinate system (G52) is canceled.
(2) The parameters set in the NC system all provide the distance from the zero point of the basic machine
coordinate system. Tlwreforq it is decided at which position in the basic machine coordinate system the first
reference point should be set and then the zero point positions of the work coordinate systems are set.
(3) When the automatic coordinate system se$ting fonction is executed, the following functions are canceled:
work coordinate system shift based on G92, local coordinate system setting based on G52, work coordinate
system shift based on origin setting and work coordinate system shift based on manual interrapt.
(4) When a parameter has been used to select the dog-type of first manual reference point return or automatic
reference point return after the power has been switched on, the dog-type reference point return will be
execntcxl for the second and subsequent manual reference point returns or automatic reference point returns.

-254-
 COORDINATE
14; S YSTEik?SETTING FUNCTIONS
14.5.MACHINE COORDINATE S YSTE.M SELECTION (G53]

14.5. MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM SELECTION (G53)

(1) Function and objective
The tool is moved to the assigned position in the basic machine coordinate system by the G53 command and
the coordinate commapd that folIows.
(2) Command format
G53 GOOXx Zz a. ; (where a is the additional axis)
G53 GOOUu Ww t3B; (where@ is the incremental command axis of the additional axis)

(3) DetaiIed description

1) When the power is switched on, the basic machine coordinate system is automatically set as referenced
to the reference (zero) point return position, which is determined by the automatic or manual reference
(zero) point return.
2) The basic machine coordinate system is not changed by the G92 ammand.
3) The G53 command is valid only in the block in which it has bem designated.
4) In the incremental value command mode (U, W, /3 ), the G53 command Provides movement with the
incremental value in the coordinate system being selected.
5) The first reference point coordinates denote the distance from the basic machine coordinal : system
zero point to the reference (zero) point return position.
6) The G53 command will move at rapid traverse.

(–500, 500)
Reference (zero) point return position
–z q-$+jxi+j (#l)

Basic machine coordinate system zero point

1st reference point coordinates X = - 500/

z= + 500
I
I -i-x

. “1

-255-’
14.COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14.6COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING (G92]

14.6 CO ORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING (G92)

(1) Function and obiective . .
This function places the tool at the desired position, and the coordinate system is set by assigning the
coordinate system setting command G92 at that position.
This system can be set as desired aIthough normally the X and Y axes are set so that the work center serves
as the-zero point and the Z axis is set & that the work end serves as the zero point.

Basic machine coordinate system

Machinezeropoint — +2
1 I 1 #
k$
work Work m*m WO* WO*
eoo~lnate coordktate coordinate coetitite
x, 21
stem1 3Gh6 ‘:
b G54
7) 3:? 2 ~?? 5
i ~;#$ - - & -------$:--:.-”-------G> ----
Imagina~~ac~i;e 4* d, ;+_.. -$*~v ----
coordinate stem ? :’ ***Y
(shiftedby 8 92) ;, I 1 coordinate
I I i system
I ! I ! x, (G52)
-1-x ./
! z, ~

1st referenee point I

(Z) Command format

‘ ‘ G922@ Zzz ei~; (where “a” is an additional axis)
(3) Detailed description
1) The basic machine coordinate system is shifted by the G!32 command, the imaginary machine
coordinate system is created, and at the same time all work coordinate systems 1 through 6 are ako
shifted.
2) When G92 and S or Q are assigned, the spindle clamp sped is set, (Refer to the section on setting the
spindle clamp speed.)
 COORDINATE
14. SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14.7.REFERENCE (ZERO) POINT RETURN (G28.G29]

14.7. REFERENCE (ZERO) POINT RETURN (G2S, G29)

(1) Function and objective

1) After the commanded axes have been positioned by GO, they are returned respectively itt.rapid traverse
to the first reference (zero) rmint when G~ is commanded.
2) By commanding G2~ the &ws are first positioned independently at high speed to the G28 or G30
intermediate point and then positioned by GO at the commanded position.

; 2nd reference point

, 1st reference point
I

I
\
(Y. z. a,) \ G30 /’ I

‘--G&o’”i
XZfm3iate
Start point lint

(2) Command format

1) G28 Xxl Zzl aal ; (where a = additional axis) (Automatic reference point return)
2) G292Ctz ~ a% ; (where a = additional axis) (Start position return)

(3) Detailed description

1) The G28 command is equivalent to the following

GOOXxl Zxl aal ;
GOO=.=am:
h this &se,’x3, ”~ and us are the reference point coordinates and they are set by parameters as the
distance from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate system.
2) After the power has been switched on, the axes which have not been subject to manual reference (zero)
point are r~urned by the dog type of return just as with the manual type. In this cas~ the return
direction is regarded as the command sign direction. For the second and subsequent returns, the return
is made at high sped to the reference (zero) point which was stored at the first time. (The dog-type
return can also be set by parameter for the second and subsequent times.)
3) When reference (zero) point return is completed, the zero point arrival output signal is output and also
#1 appears at the axis name line on the setting and display unit screen.
4) The G29 command is equivalent to the followinw
GOOXxl Zzl WI ; ‘ Rapid traverse (non-interpolation type) appliea independently for each
GOOXxz ~ aaz ; axis.
}

In this cas~ XI, ZI and al are the coordinates of the G28 or G30 intermediate point.

-257-
14.CO ORDIiVA TE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14.7.REFERENCE {ZERO] POINT RETURN (G28,G29)

5) Program error “P430” results when G29 is executed when automatic reference (zero) point return
(G~) is not performed after the,power has been switched on.
6) The intermediate point coordinates (xl, Zl, al) of the positioning point are assigned by
absolute/incremental value mmmands.
7) G29 is valid for either G28 or G30 but the commanded axes arepositioned after a return has been made
to the latest intermediate point.
8) The tool offket will be temporarily canceled during reference point return unless it is already canceled,
and the intermediate point will be the offset position.
9) The intermediate point can also be ignored by parameter sating.
10) Control from the intermediate point to the reference (zero) point is i~ored for reference (zero) point
return in the machine lock mode. The next block is executed when the commanded axis arrives as far
as the intermediate point.
11) Mirror image is valid from the start point to the intermediate point during reference (zero) point return
in the mirror image mode and the tool will move in the opposite direction to that of the command.
However, mirror image is ignortxl from the intermediate point to the referen= (zero) point and the tool
will move to the reference (zero) point.

(4) Exampltx of programs

R,
Reference (zero) point position (#1)

}
1st operation after power
has been switched on. ./ GOX.X$ZZ$ :
> I
,/
2nd and subsequent
operations [ (x,, z,)
,
Intermediate point

#/
GOXx~ Zz, ;
Y
Return s~art position
1st operation after power
_ has been switched on
2nd and subsequent
Rapid traverse rate I

f
Reference (zero) point
Near-point dog position (#1)

-258-
 14. COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14.Z REFERENCE (ZERO) POINT RETURN (G28,G29)

(Example 2) G29 =, 2’2+;

. .,
~“Present position

(G O) XX, Zz, ;
\

‘
G28, G30 intermediate point (xl, ~)

GO XX* Zzz ;

\ (x*, 2,)

.
‘~rom point A to referenee (zero) point)
i
(l?rom mint B
~o 2nd ~eference Reference(zero)point
(zero) point pc5ition(#1)
Newintermediate
G29 Xx, Z& . Presentpasition R 1A point
(From point t
to point D) A
\

,... +--”
~ c? 2id reference (Zf3’0) @IIt
position (#2)
 COORDINATE SYSTEM SEITING3TJ..CTIONS
14.
14.8.
2ND REFERENCE (ZERO)POINT RETURN (G30J

14.8 2ND REFERENCE (ZERO) POINT RETURN ~G30)

(1) Function and objective
The tool can be made to return to the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference (zero) point by assigning G30 P2 (P3, P4).

2nd reference point

d/v
.?
.’”/
G30P 2 ,,</
G~ a.. G28,G~
...- ./
. ..- ..;
.. . . .. “/
... .“./
‘h
Start point . .._ .. “..’ (x 1, Yi, Z1 a J
/ Intermediate point
G30 /’
/
/
/ G30P 3
/
/
G30P 4
OH’ /\+
G29
+ 3rd reference point
4th reference point

(2) Command format

G30 P2 (P3, P4) Xxl Zzl on, ; (CZis an additional axis.)

(3) DetaiIed description

1) Specify the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference (zero) point return with P2, P3 or P4. When the spec~lcation is no
P, or PO, PI or P5 and higher, the specification will be ignored and the tool will return to the second
reference point.
2) With the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference (zero) point return, the tool fust passes through the intermediate point
designated by G30 as with the Ist reference (zero) point return, and then it returns to the 2nd, 3rd or 4th
reference (zero) point position.
3) The 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference (zero) point position coordinates refer to a position inherent to the
machine and these can be checked on the setting and display unit.
4) When G29 is assigned after executing 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference (zero) point return, the intermediate
position applied during the G29 return serves as the intermediate point of the reference (zero) point return
executed last. . .

-260-
 14. COORDINATE S YS T.EM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14.8.2ND REFERENCE (ZERO] POINT RETURN (G30)

~reference G30 Xx, zz, ;

..

(zero) point

G29XX2ZZ2:

R#2
(x,, Zz)
+x
2nd reference (zero) point

4) With reference (zero) point return on a plane during compensation, the tool moves without tool nose
radius compensation (zero compensation) from the intermediate point as far as the reference (zero)
point. With a subsequent G29 command, the tool moves without tool nose R compensation from the
reference (zero) point to the intermediate point and it moves with such compensation until the G29
command from the intermediate point.

-z R*z

Tool nose center path Intermediate point ‘

(zero) point
~’ $dTefer’-
Programmed path
G30XXIZZ!; ‘%

(X,. zlf, (
\
< \
\ +x
G29XX, ZZ, ; \ \ /
(x,; Z,)

. .

5) The tool length offset amount for the axis involved is cancehxl temporarily after the seeond reference
(zero) point ;etum.
6) With second reference (zero) point return in the machine lock status, control from the intermediate
point to the reference (zero) point will be ignored. When the designated axis reaches as far as the
intermediate point, the next block will be executed.
7) With second reference (zero) point return in the mirror image mod% mirror image will be valid from
the start point to the intermediate point and the tool will move in the opposite direction to that of the
command. However, mirror image is ignored from the intermediate point to the reference (zero) point
and the tool moves to the reference (zero) point.

-261-
14.COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14.9.REFERENCE POINT CHECK {G27J

&
–z ..
—-.
P
/
/’
/
reference (zero) point

<“
X-axis mirror \
image —\
\

G3CIPZXXIZZI:
\
No mirror image

14.9. REFERENCE POINT CHECK (G27)

(1) Function
‘ ‘ This command first positions the tool at the position assigned by the program and then, if that positioning
point is the fust reference point, it outputs the reference point arrival signal to the machine in the same way
as with the G28 command. Thereforq when a machining program is prepared so that the tool will depart
from the first reference point and return to the fwst reference point, it is posslhle to check whether the tool
has returned to the reference point after the program has been run.

(2) Command format

G27 xx, Zz, Ual Pp, ;

~:;;-’is
PI: 1st reference point check
P2 2nd referenee point check

(3) Detailed description

1) If the P command has been omitted, the first reference point will be checked.
2) The number of axes whose reference’points can be chec~ed simultaneously depends orI the number of
axes which can be controlled simultaneously.
3) An alarm results if the final command point is not the reference point.

-262-
 14.COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14.10.WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING A-ND OFFSET
{G54 – G59)

14.10. WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING AND OFFSET

(G54 – G59)
(1) Function and objective
. ..
1) The work coordinate systems are for facilitating theprograrmning of workpiece machining in which the
reference point of the workpiece to be machined is to serve as the zero point.
2) These commands enable the tool to move to the positions in the work coordinate system. There are 6
work coordinate systems which are used for programming. (G54 — G59)
3) Among the work coordinate systems currently selected by three commands, any work coordinate
system with coordinates which have been commanded by the present position of the tool is reset. @he
“present position of the tool” includes the offset amounts for tool radius, tool length and tool position
offset.)
4) * imaginmy machine coordinate system with coordinates which have been commanded by the
present position of the tool is set by this command. (The “present position of the tool” includes the
offset amounts for tooI radius, tool length and tool position offset.) (G54, G92)

(2) Command format

1) Work coordinate system selection (G54 — G59)

G54 Xxl ml cm, ; (where a is an additional axis)
2) Work coordinate system setting (G54 – G59)
(G54) G92 =, =, em, ; (where a is an additional axis)

(3) Detailed description

1) With any of the G54 through G59 mmmands, the tool radius offset amounts for the commanded axes
will not be canceled wen if work coordinate system seleetion is commanded.
2) The G54 work coordinate system is seleeted when the power is switched on.
3) Commands G54 through G59 are modal commands (group 12).
4) The coordinate system wiIl move with G92 in a work coordinate system.
5) The offset setting in a work coordinate system denotes the distance from the zero point of the basic
machine coordb~te system.

Basic machine coordinate

system Machine zero point — +2 *
t
k 9
work **O
mordiite coordinate
x, ~ system5
FE? 1 z;? 2 (G5S)
\
1. -@+ -- ~+-----”~k--------- ”--~k---
Imaginav ~ac~;e q \ ;W-.. -*---- -$*F ----
coordinate stem ? 7’ Ooe ?
(shiftedby 3 92) ~, I I I
I I ( f
I I I t I
I
+x I . .
z,
\ .

I 4
1st referenee point

-263-
14.COORDINATE S YS TEikfSETTING FUNCTIONS
14.10.WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTXNG ANl) OFFSET
(G54 – G59)

6) The offset settings of work coordinate systems ean be changed any number of times. (They em also be
changed by G1O L2 ppl Xxl 221.)
7) A new work coordinate system 1 is set by issuing the G92 command in the G54 (work coordinate
system 1) mode. At the same tirnq the other work coordinate systems 2 through 6 (G55 — G59) will
move in parallel and new work coordinate systems 2 through 6 will be set. . ..
8) h imaginary machine coordinate system is formed at the position which dwiates from the new
workpiece reference (zero) point by an amount equivalent to the work coordinate system offset

-z
Basicmachinecoordiite
systemmm point
-z _ .––– Inragrnarymachineuxmliiwdesysteu
- - ‘c#;~t, ~ti l)- OISw
–Z(GS4) ____
- -Old work 1 (GM) coordinate~stcm
___ _w_l _ _ - - -Old work 2 (G55) comdiite tystesn

--—- . .- —— - . _ Newwork 1 (054) coordinate~stem

-- Newwork 2 (G55)coordmte system

[W21

-x

Afterthe power has been awitchect on, the imaginary machine coordinate system is matched with the basic
machine coordinate system by the first automatic (G28) or manual mfemnce [zero) point return.
I

9) By setting the imaginaxy basic machine coordinate syst% the new work coordinate system will be set
at a position which dcwiates from that imaginary basic machine coordinate system by an amount
equivalent to the work coordinate system offset amount.
10) When the fwst automatic (G2i3) or manual referenee (zero) point return is completed after the power
has been switched on, the basic machine coordinate system and work coordinate systems are set
automatically in accordance with the parameter settings:

(4) Ihrnples of programs

@mmple 1) 1) G28 X 020 ;

2) G53 X +500 Z-1OOO;.
3) G53 X OZO;

x Reference (zero) point

G;:yposition
~z

-264-
 14. COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14.10.WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING AND OFFSET
{G54 – G59)

When the first reference point coordinate is zero, the basic machine coordinate system zero point and reference
(zero) point return posit~n (#1) will coincide.

@ample 2)
QlG28~OZO; . ..

@GooG53xo Zo ; Reference (zero) point return position

@G54X-t-5OO Z –500 : @
@GOl w–5ooF 100 ;
@u+500;
@w+500 ;
(G55)
@u-5oo ;
@GooG55xo z o ;
@GOl Z –500 F200 ;
(@ X-l-m Zo:
@G28xOz0 ; (G55) (G.W

(Example 3) When work coordinate system G54 has shifted (i-500, -500) in example 2
$ is ass~$lt~ 3 through 10 in example 2 have been entered in subprogram 01111.)
.
2) GOOG53 X; 20 ; .... (Not required when there is no basic machine coordinate system offset.)
3) G54 X-I-500Z-500 ; .... Amount by which work coordinate system deviates
4) G92 XO Zil ; .... New work coordinate system is set.
5) M98 Pllll ;

(#1) Reference (zero) point return position

(D
-z Present position
Old G55 coordinat: ~~$~
.- —-— - Old G54 coordinate
-Z (G55) ;~S4’) New G54 coordinate
New G55 coordinate \
system –Z (G55”)

+x
(G55) (~x~~ )
+X(”G~”)‘ ‘

+x

NOT13 The work coordinate system will shift each time steps 3 through 5 are repeated. The reference
point return (G28) command should therefore be issued upon completion of the program.

-265-;
14.COORDINATE S YS TEikfSETTING FUNCTIONS
14.11.LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING (G52j

14.11. LOCAL COO RDINATE SYSTEM SETTING (G52)

(1) Function and objective

The local coordinate systems can be set independently on the G54 – G59 work coordinate systems
using the G52 command so that the commanded position serves as the programmed zero point.
The G52 command can also be used instead of the G92 command to change the deviation between the
zero point in the machining program and the machining workpiece zero point.
.
(2) Command format

G54 {G54 — G59) G52 Xxl Zzl ;

(3) Detailed description

1) The G52 command is valid until a new G52 command is issued and the tool does not move. This
command comes in handy for employing another coordinate system without changing the zero point
positions of the work coordinate systems (G54 = G59).
2) The Iocd coordinate system offset will be cleared after the power is turned on.
3) The local coordinate system is canceled by (G54 – G59) G52 XO 20 ;.
4) Coordinate commands in the absolute value mode cause the tool to move to the local coordinate
system position.
5) The local coordinate system offset will not be cleared with Reset 1.
6) The local coordinate system offset will be cleared with Reset 2, Reset and Rewind.
f- -i
I
1 Incmnental value G52U_W_ ;
I
I Ln
I
I AbaoIute value LmcaIcoordinate
I systems
I Absolute value
I /1
G52X_Z _ :
-(@___________ ---- _Work coordinate system
~’Wn(n= l-6)
Referenee point
R ~ ~R~ ~~%%~~?~% ;)
/
temal work coordinate syalem oft%
*.@ z= ~C input, CRT setting)
Machine coordinate system
L M
J

-266-
 PROTECTION
15. FUNCTIONS
15.1.CHUCK BARRIERSITAILSTOCK BARRIERS

15. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

15.1. CHUCK BARRIERS/TAILSTO CK BARRIERS
The chuck barrks and taiktock barriers serve to limit the movement range of the tool nose points and they are
provided in order to prevent collisions with the chuck or tailstock which may arise due to programming errors.
The tool is automatically stopped at the barrier limit with movement commands which exceed the range set by
parameter,

X axis
4
//i // ///////////’//////////////’/////’,
Pi

PI
\\\\ ~..3P P2
P3
I
P4
\ P5
P6
.— Z axis
I
\\\\\ \
\

I
PI, P2, P3: Chuck barriers
P4, P5, P6: TaiIstock barriers
P7, P8 Stored stroke limits

P8 I
///y///// ////////////////////// / / /

The following commands are used for programming.

G2% Barriers valid
G23; Barriers invzdid
(1) When the machine is about to go beyond the movem~nt range, it stops and at the same time an alarm is
dispIayed. This alarm is released by NC resetting.
(2) This function is valid even in the machine lock mode.
(3) The function is valid when all the axes, for which the chuck and taiktock barriers have been set, have
compleled their return to the reference points.
(4) The stored stroke check function is also available. When the stored stroke limit area has been set, the
chuckttailstock barrier function is simultaneously valid with the stored stroke check function.

-267-
15.PI?OTECTION FUNCTIONS
15.1.CHUCK BARRIERSITNLSTOCK BARRIERS

15.1.1 CHUCK BARIUERITAILSTO CK BARRIER SETTING

P1

P4
i P2
P!5
P3
P6
.— . .—

+)
I <

Type 1

For both the chuck and taiktock barriers, 3 points can be input as parameters and these are set with the machine
coordinates.
Points Pl, P2 and P3 represent the chuck barrier~ points P4, I?5 and P6 represent the tailstock barriers.
The barrier area is symmetrical to the Z axis and when the barrier point P— X-axis coordinates have a minus
value, the sign is turned into a plus and the coordinates are checked.
The absolute vahws of the X-axis coordinates for each barrier point must be set as follows:

(i%wis coordinates do not need to conform to this sequence.)

. .

-268-

—
 15. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
15.1. CHUCK BARRIERS/TMLSTOCK BARRIERS

15.1.2 RESTR1CTIO NS
(1) The following points must be borne in m“nd since there is only 1 check point from the tool for the chuck
barriershilstock barriers.
When, in the examples given below, the tool nose width offset amount is set and the tool is moved in the
direction of the arrow in the figure in order to conduct the check at the imaginary tool nose”point, the tool
will automatically stop at the barrier limit because the check point is in range (a) of I?xample 1. However,
in Example 2, there is a danger that the tool and chuck will collide in range (a) since the check point is in
range @).

-——-
—
(Example 1) (Example 2)

—.
I
~b

-—
---—
----

—- 1

.
@
i
b“
—.-——
-—
-----‘––-
I

T
@

+?
I

In order to avoid collision, the tool can be stopped at the barrier limit when barrier points PI, P2 and P3 are set
so that the check point is in range (c), as shown in I?xarnple 3.

(13xample 3)
u
PI
-— --
Q
P3 ti~
_&____
I
P2

-— .

T {
i -71
1>
I I
. .

(2) When the tool enters inside the barrier area and the alarm is given, the NC system is first reset to reltzise the
alarm and then the tool can be moved in the opposite direction to that in which it was moving before.
(3) There is no barrier area for an axis without the reference point return function. Consequently, there is no
barrier alarm for such an axis.
(4) When the barriers have been made valid after the tool has entered the barrier area during cancellation, an
alarm occurs as soon as any attempt is made by the tool to move.
In a case like this, first release the alarm by resetting the NC system and issue the G23 wmmand so that the
tool will avoid the area or change the barrier point settings.

-269-
16. ikiEASUREli4ENT
SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
16.1.SKIPFUNCTION (G31J

16. MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS

16.1 SKIPFUNCTION (G31)
16.1.1 FUNCTION
(1) Outline ..
When the skip signal is input externally during linear interpolation based on the G31 command, the machine
fed is stopped immediately, the remaining distanm is discarded and the command in the following block is
executed.
(2) Command format
G31 %/Vu fijwW Yy/VV Ff ;
x, z, y, u, w, v : Axis coordinates; they are commanded as absolute or incremental values.
f : Fm.d rate (mm/min)
Linear interpolation can be executed using this function. If the skip signal is input ext~ally while this
command is being executed, the machine will stop, the remaining commands will be canceled and operation will
be executed from the next block.
(3) Detailed dbntion
1) If Ff is commanded as the feed ratq command feed f will apply; if it not commanded, the “G31, skip”
set in the parameter will serve as the fed rate. In either case, the F rnodal will not be updated.
2) The machine will not automatically accelerate and decelerate with the G31 block.
3) Overnde is invalid with the G31 command and it is fixed at 100%. Dry run is also invalid. The stop
conditions (feed hold, interlock, override zero and stroke end) are valid. External deceleration is also
valid.
4) The G31 command is unmodal and so it needs to be commanded each time.
5) If the skip command is input during G31 command start, the G31 command will be completed
immediately.
When a skip signal has not been input until the G31 block completion, the G31 command wiIl also be
completed upon compktion of the movement commands.
6) When the G31 command is isswxl during tool nose R mmpensation, program error “P608” will result.
7) When there is no F command in the G31 command and thepararrmler speed is also zero, program error
“P603” will result.
8) With the machine lock, the skip signal will be ignored and execution will continue as far as the end
of the block.
(4) Parameter settings
The “G31 skip conditions” are set on the parameter page.
The “G31 skip speed” is set on the machine builder parameter page.
For details, referemx should be made to the section on parameters and to the control instructions for the
setting and disp~ay unit in the Operating Instructions Manual.

-270-
 16. MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
16S.S’ FUNCTION (G31)

(5) Execution of G31

Ex. 1) When the next block is an incremental value command

G31 Z 1000 F 100 ; . ..

Go1 U2000 W1OOO:
,/

External signal entered

x
t when external signal is not entered

I
i--’
&. 2) When the next block is an one axis movement command with absolute value

t
G31 Z 1000 F 100 ;
GOI XIOOO: I
k
1 Movement when =temal
External signal entered
~,signal is not entered
x

t 4 --- -1

z
-1--

Ex. 3) When the next block is a two axes movement command with absolute value

G31 Z1OOO F1OO ;

/
GO1 X1OOO 22000; /
/ /

J-
‘m.~ Z
___ ~’ Movement when external signal is not entered

16.1.2 READOUT OF SKIP COORDINATES

&the skip signal inputting eoordinatepositions have been stord in the system variabks #5061 (Ist axis) – #5063
(3rd axis), it is possible to use them with user macro.

4
5
GOO X–1OO. ;
G31 X–200. I?60 ; Skip command
# 101= #5061 Skip signal input coordinate values (workpiece coordinate system) are
readout to #101.
\

-271-
 JL?M!XJRMIENTSUPPORT FUNCTIONS
16.
16.1.
SKIPFUNCTION (G31)

16.1.3 G31 COASTING

The amount of coasting from when the skip signal is inputduringthe G31 command until the machine stops
differs according to the “G31 skip speed” and the F command in G31.
It takes only a short time from when the response to the skip signal is commenced until the machine
. .. decelerates
and stops.
As a result, this enables the machine to stop with high degree of precision and with small amount of coasting. The
coasting amount can be calculated from the following formula.

do ‘:x TP +:x (tiftz)

F F
=—X (Tp+tl) & &xt:
60
\
h.0. Coasting amount (mm) 3, 6?
F: G31 skip speed(mm/min.)
T P: Position loop time constant (see) = (position loop gain)-~
t~ : Response delay time (SW) = (time taken from the detection to the arrival of the skip signal at the NC via
Pc)
t,: Response error time (0.001 see)
When G31 is used for calculation, the value calculated from the section indicated by al in the above equation can
be compensated, however, 8Zresults in calculation error.

Skip signal input .

F

Area inside shaded section denotes

~coasting amount 80

Time (Sj
t,kt, Tp

Stop pattern with skip signal input

I

The relationship between the coasting amount and speed whei Tp is 30 msec and tl is 5 msec is shown in the
following figure.

TP=O.03
o.oso - t, =0. cos

0.040-
. .
o.w -
cmsting
amount
6
(m) O.o!m
.

0.010-

0 10203040ti 70
Feedrate F (mm/m%)
Relationship between coasting arno~nt and feed rate (mample)

-272-
 16. M?MSURHWENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
16.1. SKIP FUNCTION (G31)

16.1.4 SKIP COORDINATE READOUT ERROR (mm) I

(1) Ski~ simml inuut coordinate readout
Th& co~sting &ount based on the position loop time constant TP and cutting feed time constant T. is not
incIuded in the skip signal input coordinate vahm.
Therefor& the work coordinate values applying when the skip signal is input ean be read out across the error
range in the following formula as the skip signal input coordinate values. I-Iowever, coasting based on
response delay time tl results in a measurement error and so compensation must be provided.

e: Readout error (mm)

F: Feed rate (mrdmin)
e =&&x t,
tz: Response error time 0.001 (see)

i-l

Readouterror G o
@)_l

Readout error of skip input coordinates

Readout error of skip input coordinates

Readout error with a 60 mndmin feed rate ix

e = & 60/60 x 0.001

= * 0.001 (mm)

Measurement value is within readout error range of * Ip.

(2) Readout of other coordinates

The readout mordinatevalues include the coasting amount. Therefor% when coordinate vaIues are required
with skip signal input, referenee should be made to the seetion on the G31 coasting amount and
compensation provided. As in the ease of (l), the coasting amount based on the delay error time tz cannot
be eakxdated, and this generates a measuring error,

-273-
 M“SUREkfENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
16.
16S.SKIPFUNCTION (G31)

(3) Examples of compensating for coasting

1) Compensating for skip signal input coordinates . ..

#uo = Skip feed rate;

#ill = Response delay time tl ;

s
G31 X1OO.F1OO ; Skip command
G04 ; Machine stop cheek
#lol = #5061 Skip signal input eoordirmte readout
#lo2 = #llo*#lll/60 ; Coasting based on response delay time “
#lo5 = #lol#lo2 ; Skip signal input coordinates
5

2) Compensating for work coordinates

I
G31 X1OO.F1OO ; Skip command
G04 ; Machine stop check
#lol = #5061 Skip signal input coordinate readout
#lo2 = #llo*#lll/60 ; Coasting based on response delay time
#lo3 = #llo*#l12/60 ; Coasting based on position loop time constant
#lo5 = #101402+103; Skip signal input coordinates
f

. .

-274-’
 APPENDIX 1.LISTOF FUNCTION CODES

APPENDIX 1. LISTOF FUNCTION CODES

Seaiag
Fundixr code NC Subject and stored in Punch-outoutput . ..
CRT dqkty Internal NC systemfuneiion
controller to parity display memory
recognition v count Urdt
EM 1S0 key-in EfA 1s0
o-9 0-9 Yes fhrnkd Displayed Key-is stored o-9 0-9 Numericaldata
A-Z A-Z “ ., . ,$ “ A-Z A-Z Addressee
+ i- ,, <’ . .’ ,. + + Sin variable operator (+)
,. ,, . >. “ Sigq variabIeopemtor (-)
,, ‘, ,, “ ,, Decimalpoint
<’ ,, ‘, ,, ,, Addressfunctionsekxdon
,
i ,, ,, ,, ,. ,> I f Block delete(optiortd block skip)
t
Variableoperator (+)
EOR % <. ,, “(%) NOkey- “ EOR % End of record (capestorageend)
in (rmto- Rewindstart & StOp during tape
rnadcafly search
brserted)
EOBiCR LFINL “ ,, Key-in “ EOB LF End of block
“(J
~EOB
2+4+5 ‘, ,, ‘, ,, “ 2+4+5 Control out (commentstart)
( (
2+4+7 ,, “ “ ‘, ,. 2+4+7 Control in (commentcod)
) )
* ‘, ,, . No ,, * Programnumber address(instead
key-in of o, 1s0 Ordy)
* # ‘. ,! 4/ Key-in .“ * # VariabIenumber
* * “ ?. “ ,, “ * * Variabieopemtor (x)
* . ,, ,’ “ ‘. ,, * . Variabte definition
* ,, ,$ ,3 t, ,, * Var%bleoperator
[ [
* !, >> ,, ,, >, * 1 Variabfeoperator
1
* j 4. ,, . ,, ‘6 * ! Synchronized operation (vaIidonly
with M3XEiL)
* $ ,. .’ . ‘4 ,, * $ Systemselection(validordywith
M330HL)
Bs Bs No ,, Bkmk No ,,
key-in
TAB HT “ ,, . ,, 4’
SP se ,, <’ . Keyin “ SPSstartingwith EOB and ending
(3 ;V when fii characteror number
imtomatic antonmtic code appears are not subjed to
adjustment) adjustment) parity V cant.
CR “ ,, ,’ No ,,
key-in
DEL DEL No Not Not “ Not
counted displayed stored
AU space NULL “ “ ,. “ ,,
.-MImark (DEL) 4’ “ “ “ “

w - No Gunted (Note3) No stored

other other key-in
.,

NO’ITk 1. The. black (x) and white asterisks (A) indicate that the corresponding eodepattem can beset
by parameter.

NOTl% 2. Codes represented by white asterisks except those for appropriate functions and codes not
listed in the above table are stored on tape, but an error will result during operation if they
are not comments.

NO= 3. This denotes characters (including blanks) which are stored inside the CNC system and
which correspond to the command codes. “@” is not displayed.

-275-
APPENDIX 2.LISTOF COMIL4ND VALUES AND SETZINGRANGES

APPENDIX 2. LISTOF COMMAND VALUES AND

SETTING RANG~
I Linear axis I Rotarv axis
Input unit (mm) Input unit (inch) llegree (deg)
Minimum input 0.0001/0.001/0.01 o.Ooool/o.0001/o.ool 0.001/0.01
setting unit
Maximum stroke *9999.9999 mm &999.99999 inch
k 99999.999 Q
(value for machine &99999.999 mm %9999.9999 inch
coordinate system) * 99999.99 ~
&99999.99 mm fc 9999.999 inch
&9999.9999 mm &999.99999 inch
Maximum programmable & 99999.999 *
dimension &99999.999 mm is 9999.9999 inch
299999.990
a 99999.99 mm &9999.999 inch
1—12000 mm/min 1—1200 inch/rein
Rapid traverse rate 1—60000 0/rein
1—60000 mmimin 1—6000 inch/rein
1—12000 mmlmin 1—1200 inch/rein
Cutting feed rate l—dOOOO0/rein
l—m mmimin 1—6000 inchlmin
2nd zero point offset &9999.9999 mm &999.99999 inch
(value with machine &99999.999 mm *9999.9999 inch * 99999.9990
coordinate system)
&99999.99 mm 29999.999 inch * 99999.990
&99.9999 mm k 9.99999 inch
Tool offket amount
(tOOIlength) *999.999 mm %99.9999 inch
* 999.99 mm &99.999 inch
&9.9999 mm ~ 0.99999 inch
Tool offket amount
(wear) 599.999 mm &9.9999 inch
A 99.99 mm 29.999 inch
0.00001 inchfP
Incremental feed amount 0.0031 mm/P,O.001 mmlP 0.001 ql?
0.0001 inch/P
O.OCKKU inch/P
Handle feed amount 0.0001 mm/P,O.001mm/P 0.001 q-l?
0.0001 inch/P
-9999.9999 mm— -999.99999 inch—
Soft limit range
+9999.9999 mm +999.99999 inch
(value with machine 1—359.999 0
coordinate system) -99999.999 mm– -9999.9999 inch—
+99999.999mm i-9999.9999 inch
o–99999.999 WC o—99999.999 Sec
Dwell time
o–99999 rev o–99999 IW
Backbsh compensationamount o–%511pulseS ()_~511 pu]~ I 0– ~sll p~]~
Pitcherror cmnponsation amount 0– A 127 Pu]m O—%127 pUkXS O_ ~ 12,7Pu]=
Dry run speed 0—3600mm/min 0—360 inch 0—3600Qfmin
Manual jog rapid traverse 0–60000 mmjmin - O–6(KNOinch/rein 0—60000Ojmin
0.0001-99.999999 mm 0.00001-9.9999999 inch
Thread lead
0.001–999.99999 mm 0.0001-99.999999 inch
0.0001-99.9999 mmlrev 0.00001-9.99999 inch~rev
Synchronous feed
0.001-999.999 mm/rev 0.0001-99.9999 inchfrev

-276-
 APPENDIX 3.CIRCUIAR CUTTING RADIUS ERROR

APPENDIX 3. CIRCULAR C’UITING RADIUS ERROR

When circular cutting is performed, an error k caused between the command coordinate and the tracking
coordinate due to the tracking delay in the smoothing circuit and servo system, and the workpiece ends up with
. ..
a radius smaller than the commanded value.

A Command coordinate
= B: Tracking coordinate
\
R. Command radius (mm)
AR: Radius error (mm)
A8 Angle error (rad)
F. Cutting feed rate (m/min)

LRJ=I
The AR radius error and angle error A@are calculated from the following formula.

A@=tan-l(T~* ~)-l-tan-’(Tp=~) (r ad)

Ts: Time constant of smoothing circuit (see)

Tp: Position loop time constant
Tp: 0.03 see for semi-closed droop system
Tp: 0.04 sec for closed loop system

NOTE 1. When the AR radius error applying with circular cutting dom not come within the allowable
valu~ proceed to reduce the cutting feed rate F, set Ts to a lower value or rmiew the
program.

NOTE 2, In the steady statq AR is constant. However, it is not constant with command start and stop
transitions. Under command start and stop conditions, therefore. the trackinz coordinate
should be as shown in the figure be~ow. -

Start/stop
. .
,

coordinate coordinate

-277-
APPENDIX 4.STANDARD C4NNED CYCLE SUBPROGRAMS

APPENDIX 4. ST~ARD CANNED CYCLE

SUBPROGMS
Automatic tool length ..
G37 ( 0370 ) I ~Mu=,nl

G31z4%F #3;
IF [ROUNDc ABS [$2– [ 4!/10 * ?411I ] ] GT #8 ] GOTO1 :
IF [ROUND
[ 4$10 * gll ] EQ W ] GOTO1 ;
##9 = !!#10-#2/ill+#i9 ;
#3003 = #l ;
N2;
M99:
W i 3901 =126 ;

I G74 (0740 ) Facecut-offcanned cycle I

G.1 :
1F[AIL3[#2]GTO] GOTO1O;
:14=1;
Nlo #13=#3–#5 ;
DO1;
#lo=o;
till =34;
D02 ;
#lo = #lo+i’4
IF IABS[?/lO] GE IABS[#l]]] GOTO1;
GOI X $11 ;
coo x t!6 :
ill = #4–#6 ;
END2 ;
NI GO1Xt41-#10-!-#11 ;
GOOY ti5 ;
GOOX–#1 ; . .
IF [ #14 1 GOTO3 ;
:12 = #12+j3:
lFIABs[ #121 LT[ABs [#211] GOT02;
414=1;
#i3 = tt2-ti12+ii13 ;
N2 GOOY $13 :
END1 ;
N3 GOOY –#2=$5 ;
M99;

-278-
 —

APPEN..lX4.STMDARD CANNED CYCLE SUBPROGRAMS

G 7S (07’5~ ) I.im@udinal cut-off canned cycIe

. ..
G.1 :
1FCABS[81]GTOI COTO1O;
414=1;
Nlo #13 =,44–$5 ;
DO1;
#lo=o;
$11 =$3:
D02;
410 = #lo -+ $3 ;
lF[.ABS[#lO] GE [ABS[#2]]]GOT0 1;
GOI Y $11 ;
GOOY #6 ;
411 = ii3-{6 :
ND 2;
Ill GO11’ #2 –$10+#11 :
Goo x #5 ;
coo Y- #2 ;
IF [ 3141 GOTO3 ;
#12 = f12+#4 ;
lFIABS[ #i12]LT [ABSiill J] GOT02;
#14 = 1;
#13 = #1–il12-i-i13 ;
N2 GOOX #!13 ;
ENI 1 ;
IJ3 coo x– #1–% ;
1199 ;

. .

-279-
APPENDIX 4. STANDARD CANNED CYCLE SUBPROGRAMS

G76 (0760 ) Multiplerepetlkethreada!ltingminti cycle

G.1 : . ..
jj~2=~;
il13 = $9;
IF[r!BS [$13] GE[ABSCl!8]]I GOTO1:
$16=1:
113 =#8 ;
N1 811 = $13 ;
iFINsc#ll lLT[Ms[$4 -#5113 GOT02:
:11 = M-%;
814=1;
N2 #17 = X11;
$18 = ROl14D[ [ #4-#11 -#5 1 * $7 ] ;
IF I [ $18 NIR #l] GEO 1 GOTOIO:
:18 = -#18 ;
Nlo :19 = #18 :
*1O = ROUND
[ ;!ill+$5 ] * !!7 ]
IF [ [ $10 10R #l] GEO 1 GOTO20;
$10 = -$10
N20 GODX it10 ;
#20 = %10
001;
%15= ROUND
[ #10 * #3/?ll ] :
Goo Y #2 -!-#3-!?4-#15+:11 ;
G33 X#l–if10-#18 Y -#3+#15 :
GOOY –#f2+%4-#11 ;
IF [#14 GT 01 GOT03:
lF [#16 GT 01 GOT07;
t/12 = $12+1 ;
*13 = ROUND
f. #9 * SQRT[ *12 ] ] ;
IF [ ABS[ #13-#11 1 GE [ AM [ M ] I ] GOTO8;
#16=l;
N7 fl13 = $11-18:
N8 #11 = ff13:
JFr ABs[411J LT[ABs[ #4-#5111 GoTo9: “’
ill = M-$5:
#14=l;
N9 f10 = ROUND
[ E #17–#11 ] * i17] :
lF [ [ $10 XOR#l] GE O ] COTO6 ;
310 = – #lo;
N6 :10 = $10+#20 ;
GOOY –41+$l10+i18 ;
IF t #14 LT O I GOTO11:
$!18=0;

-280:
 APPENDLY 4. STANDARD CANNED CYCLE SUBPROGRAMS

GOTOM ;
WI t18 = #19–iIO+WO ;
NI~ ENDI ;
X3 IF[~IKi [#6] L’TI]GOT05; ..

#14=o;
#13=o;
oo~;
IF [ :14 GTO] GOTO5 ;
fl13 = tJ13+#6 ;
lFIABS[ 8132 LT[ABS[M]]]GOT04 ;
$13=%;
$14=1;
N4 GOOX :10- #l ;
GOOY #2 +~3-:4+4’13-$15 +fIll ;
C33 x #l -:10 Y -$3+*15 ;
GOOY-j2-!-f!4-:13-gll ;
2ND 2:
N5 GOOX -ill ;
K99;

G77 (0770 ) Lcmgitudml

turningcannedcycle

G.1 ;
JF [[#l EQ 0], OR 1$2 EQ O] JGOTO1;
#3003 = % OR 1 ; Single block stop inhibit
Y:2+H ; Movement with G(M command
Cl XtlY-$7 ;
y-$~ ;
#30i)3 = $5 ; Single block stop inhibit relmse
GO1–:1 :
N1 i{99 :

j G78 (0780 ) Thad cutting canned cycle

1

G.1 ;
. .
w[til EQO] OR [#2 EQo]l G0T01:
:3003 = :5 OR 1 ; Single block stop inhibit
Y!J2+$i7; Movement with GO(.Icommand
G33 ~~15 Y~ll F$9 E#10 :
xi13 Y*I2 ; Thread cutting
GOY-$2–$i–$11–i12 ;
:3003 = :5 ; Single block stop inhibit release
1-315-:13 ;
!/1 M99 ;

-231-’
 APPENDK 4. STANDARD CANNED CYCLE SUBPROGRAMS

G?9 (O 79o ) IFace cuttingcann~ cycle

G.1 ;
]F [[#l EQOI OR Vi2EQOl}G0T01; ..

$/3003 = #5 OR 1; Single block stop inhibit

x#l+#7 ; Movement with GOOcommand
G1 X–#7 Y#2 ;
x–ill ;
43003 = #5 ; Single block stop inhibit release
GOY–#2 :
Ill M99 ;

G83 Deep hole drilling cycle

G87 (0830 ) ~

G.1 ;
IF [ +30 j GOTO2 ;
M #24;
#29 = #11 #f28 = O ;
z#2;
#2 = $/45 ;3003 = #8 OR I :
DOI;
#28 = #28 -#n #26=-#28 –#29 ;
2 $26;
●

lF[MS[fi28 ]GE[ABS[$3j]]GOT0 1;
G1 z #29 ;
GOz 428 ;
429 = i#H+ii14 ;
END1 ;
N1 GI Z #3 –426 ;
G4P #4;
ii3003 = 18 ;
GOZ–#3–#2 ;
IF [ #24 EQ #O ] GOTO2
M //24+1 ;
G4Pi21;
N2 M99;

-282-’
 APPENDIX 4. STANDARD CANNED CYCLE SUBPROGRAMS

tt
~; (0831 ) Deephole drilling cycleA

. ..
G.1 ;
IF [ #30 ] GOTO2 ;
M #24 ;
429 = O i/28 = fll ;
2 #2;
42 = ##5 $3003 = #8 OR1;
001;
{29 = //29+:11 ;
lFIABS[ #29] GE[ABS[#3]]l GOT0 1;
G1 Z 428 ;
GOZ–ild ;
i28 = $11+314 ;
END1 ;
M U Z i/3 -#29+ #28 ;
G4P $4;
:3003 = $8 ;
GO2i-i3-ii2 ;
IF [ #24 EQ $0 ] GOTO2 ;
H //24+1 ;
G4 P #21 ;
N2 M99 ;

G83. 2 (0832) Dew holedriW cwle

N1OO;
lF [/!301 GOTO3 ; Canned cycle invalid chink
;3003 =Hl OR 1; Single block stop inhibit
*29=+12 428=0 ; . . Initial cutting amount setting
Retung amount (= total cutting amount)
initialization
GO 2.%2;
IF [#12NEftOIGOTO1 ; I*O?
IF [411EQ:OI GOTO2 ; (I= ) K =0?+ Final cutting

3!1 +28=!28—;12 :26= -328 —;29

: Rentum amount setting for next block
Feed amount calculation

IF [AM [~281 GE [ABS [~31 j 1 GOTO2 ; Cutting end (hole machining)? + Final cutting

-283-’
APPENDLX 4. STANDARD CANNED CYCLE SUBPROGRAMS

GI Z$12: Initial cutting pass

G.1P#i ; Dwell
GOZi28–$2 ; Return ..
G4 P#13 : Dwell
#29=#11+:15 ; Next cutting amount setting

Del; (Loop 1)
i28=#28-#11 $26=-$28–$29 ; Next block rclurn amount setting
Fed amount calculation
GO2X26+%2; Fed
IF [.4BS[~28] GE [ABS[$3] ] ] GOTO2: Cutting end? -D Final cutting
G1 7Ji29; Cutting
G4 PM ; Dwell
GOI%
Z8-*2 : Return
G4 P:13 ; Dwell
13NII1: (Loop 1 end)
M2Cl Z33-iR6 : Final cutting
G4 P~4 : Dwell
t3003=#8 ; Single block stop valid
GO2-$3-:2: Return

N3 i[99 ; %

G.1 ;
lF [ :30 ] GOTO2 ;
M $24 ;
232;
i2 = M5 #3003 = 48 OR1 ~3004 = :9 OR3 ;
Glz f3;
G4P ti4;
\f4 ;
#3900 = I :
G1 z-#3 ;
i!3004 = $9 ;
M3;
f13003= :8 :
IF [ i2.4 FYji10] GOTO1 :
k! :24+1 ;
G4 P i21 ;
NI CO2–;2 :
N2 1{99 ;

-284-
 APPEA?D.IX4. STANDARD C24NIVEDCYCLE SUBPROGRAMS

G 85
~89 (0850’} Boring cycle

..

G.1 ;
IF [ i130 1 COTO 2:
!4 #24 ;
2$2;
f~ = $$5 #3003= :8 OR1:
G12 :3;
G4P :4:
:3003 = 28 ;
Z–$3 F ~23 ;
F 322 ;
]F [ :24 EQ 40 ] GOTO1 ;
1( 424+1;
G4 P MI ;
?JI GO2– $2 :
N2 1!99 ;

.,

-285-!
APPENDLY 5. LIST OF VXR.JMBLENUMBERS {1)

APPENDIX 5. LISTOF VARIABLE NUMBERS (1)

0: Can be read or written
x: Cannot be written
—: Unrelated to reading or writing

Variable
Description Read Write
number (#)
o Vacant o x
1–32 Local variables
Argument designation I
# 1 2 3 4 5 6 ~ 8 9 10 11 2 13 14-26 27-32
~m~t * D c I J ‘o o
K D E F G H L M N–Z
address

Argument designation II
# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 – 27 28 29 30 31 32
m~@ ~ B c 11 J1 K1 [2 J2 K2 13-K8 19 J9 K9 110 Jlo
addrms i

100–149 Common variables, 100sets: 100-149,500-549

500–549
1000-1031 Macro interface inputs

g -~ ~;; s: : :

1100–1131 Macro interface outputs

: W ~:; s:: 0 ‘
9

300U NC alarm {alarm display with macro program) . —

3001 Integrated time 1 0 0
Integrated time 2 0 0
3003 Single block stop, miscellaneousfunction finish signal waiting suppression o 0
3004 Feed hold, feed rate override, G09 valid/invalid o 0
3006 Message display/stop (messagedisplay with matio programs, block stop) . —
3007 Mirror image o x

N0TE2 The variables corresponding to the optional specifications can be used only when those
specifications have been provided.

-2$6-i
 LIST OF VARL4BLE NUMBERS (2)

LIST OF VARIABLE NUMBERS (2)

O: Can be read or written
x: Cannot be written
–: Unrelated to reading or writing

Variable
Description Read Write
number ($
4001-4320 Modal information

Modal Modal
lPre-,eadl~~cutionl I information [Prti-readl~~cutionl
information
o x
G codes M codes 4113 4313
4001- 4201 – N codes 4114 4314
4021 4221
0 codes 4115 4315
F code 4109 4309 S codes 4119 4319
T codes 4120 4320

5001-5103 Position information

Position Axis MS 1 ~,s 2 &s 3 Axis 4 .&is 5

information
5004 5005
0 x
Block end point 5001 5002 5003
Machine coordinate 5021 5022 5~23 5024 502s
Work coordinate 5041 5042 5043 5044 5045
Skip coordinates 5061 5062 5063 5064 5065
Servo deviation amount 5101 .5102 5103 I 5104 5105

5201–5323 Work coordinate ofiet

&
Ads 1 Axis2 Ark+3 Axis4 Axis 5
I work I I I I I I
EXT 5201 5202 5203 5204 5205 0 o
GS4 5221 5222 5223 5224 5225
G55 5241 5242 5243 5244 5245
G56 5261 5262 5263 5264 5265
G57 5281 5282 5283 5284 5285
G58 5301 5302 5303 5304 5305
G59 5321 5322 5323 5324 5325

10001-18040 Tool offset

2001-2940
Axis1 tool length offset amount 10001-1OO4O 2001-2940
Wls 1 wear offset
.......—
amount 11001-10040 2701–2740
0 0
&k 3 t001lengthOm* amount 12001-12040 —
Axis 3 wear offwt amount 13001-13040 —
Asis 2 tool length offset amount 14001– 14040 2101–2140
Axis 2 wear offset amount 15001–15040 2801-2840
Tool nose R offset amount 16001-16040 2201–2240
Tool nose R wear offset amount 17001– 17040 2901-2940
Toolnosepo”mts 18001-18040 2301-2340

NOT.JZ The variables corresponding to the optional specifications can be used only when those
specifications have been provided.

-287-
APPEND-H 6. CORRESPONDENCE TMLES OF DATA SEllYNG N NUMBERS

APPENDIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE TABLES OF DATA

SETTING N NUMBERS
..
NOTE 1 The units indicated in the tables are the minimum input setting unit of the parameter
data.
FIowever, reference should be made to the table in ckekpoint (4) under sub-section (5)
of Seetion 13.13 dealing with data settings for further details on the interpolation units,
output units and speed units.

I!IOTIZ 2 13inary parameters should be converted into byte-type data and assigned with decimal
data following address D.
Ehm.mple 1: Binary data
01010101, = 55~ = 85~ .....85 is assigned.
IZmmple 2: ASCII code
<’M, = OIOO1lOIB = 4D~ = 77~ .....77 is assigned.
(“B” stands for binary, “H’ for hexadecimal and “D” for d~mai fomat+)

,’

. .

-288-
 APPE.NDLY 6. CORRESPONDENCE TMLES OF DATA SETTING N NUMBERS
t%l. AXIS-CWii$fONP~ETH?S (M4CHINEJ

6.1. AXIS-COMMON PARAMEms (MACHINE)

P number 1 (Machine)

1number N number Remarks

Contents Data type settingrange (unit)
32iiL 330HL
O-?-8n O-1-8n G macrocallprogram 2 words 0-99999999 IXO-9 (integer)
number (8 digits) 10sets of data canbe
set as the G code
4+8n 4-!-8n CallG number Word 1-255 macroparameters.
The correspondence
between“n”and the N
6+8n 6-1-8n G calltype Byte o-3 0: M98type numbersis given
1: G65type below.
2: G66type (n)” (N number]
3 G66.1type o ..... 0-7
1 ..... 8-15
7+8n 7+8n Not used Byte 2 ..... 16-23
3 .....24-31
4 ..... 32-39
s .....40-47
6 .....48-.5.5
7 .....56-63
8 ..... 64-71
9 ..... n -79

SO-i-8n 80 + 8n M macrocallprogram 2 words 1-99999999 m O-9 (integer)

number (8 digits) 10 sets of data can be
set as the M macro
B4 + 8n 84+8n Call M number Word 1-9999 call parameters.
The correspondence
between “n” and the N
R6 + 8n 86 + 8n M cal[ type Byte 0-3 numbers is given
below,

37 + 8n 87 + 8n Not used Byte (:) (~2um;12)

..... -
1 ..... 88-95
2 ..... 96-103
104-111
:::: 112-119
5 .....120-127
6 ..... 128- 13.5
7 ..... 136-143
8 ..... 144-151
9 .....152- 1S9

160 160+64n Orientation 1st Word 0-359 De: 0-500 (ins) for M O-1 (integer)
deceleration point magnetic sensor The 1st and 2nd
spindle data can be set
162 162+64n Orientation 2nd Word 0- 3.s9 Deg O-40 (deg) for as the G code macro
. . parameters.
deceleration point magnetic sensor
The correspondence
164 164+ 64n Tap-less position loop Word 1-20000 0.01 radls between “n” and the N
gain numbers is given
below.
166 166+6% In-position range Word 1-20000 0.01 deg 0-39 (deg) for (n) (h! number)
magnetic sensor o .....160-222
1 .....224-286
168 168+64 Orientation speed Word 0-1000 rpm

170 170+ 64n Creep speed Word 0-1000 rpm

172 172+ 64n Position shift Word 0-4095 Pulse 1536-2.560 for
magnetic sensor

174 174+64n Backlash Word 0-32767 Pulse

-289-
APPENDIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE TMLES OF DATA SETTING N NUMBERS
6.1.AXIS-COMMON P~ETERS (.CkUNE)

P number 1 (Machine)

N numbe N number
Cmntents Data type setting Iimge (unit) Remarks
321JL 330HL

176 176 Not used Byte

t=-
I 177 177 Not used Byte

1-
178 178 Not used Byte

179 179 Not used Byte

180 Not used Byte

181 181 Not used Byte

E
182 182 Not used Byte

183 183 Not used Byte

184 184 Not used Byte

18.5 18.5 Not used Byte

186 186 Not used Byte

187 187 Not used Byte

188 188+64n Orientation stop Word 0- FFFF (hex)

control 1

190 190i-64n Orientation stop Word 0- FFFF (hex)

L 192
control 2

192-f-64n Maximum speed Word 0-32767 rpm

E
194 194+ 64n Zero speed Word 0-1000 rpm

196 196 +64rI Cushton time constant Word 0-32767 rpm

198 198+64n Speed detection rate Word 0-120 %

200 200-!-64n Torque restriction Word 0-120 %

202 202-1-64n V loop proportional Word 0-1000 radls

gain

204 204+ 64n V loop integral gain Word 0-1000 radis

-290-
 APPENDLX 6. CORRESPONDENCE TMLES OF DATA SEIWNG N NUMBERS
6.1.AXIS-COMMON P~E?ERs (M4CHINE)

P number 1 (Machine)

N numbs
320L
N number
330HL
Contents Data typ setting range
I (unit)
I Remarks

206 206 + 64n Spindle type Word 1-32767

1 I
00 gear ratio
208 208+64n (gear teeth number at Word 1-32767 I I I
spindle side)

01 gear ratio
210 21O-I-641t (gear teeth number at Word 1-32767
spindle side)

10 gear ratio
212 212i-64n (gear teeth number at Word 1-32767
spindle side)

11 gear ratio
214 214+64n (yar teeth number at Word 1-32767
spindle side)

00 gear ratio
216 216+ 64n (gear teeth number at Word 1-32767
spindle side)

01 gear ratio
218 218 +64 (gear teeth number at Word 1- 3276+
spindle side)

I
10 gear ratio
220 220 +&In (gear teeth number at Word 1-32767
spindle side)

11 gear ratio
222 222+6A (gear teeth number at Word 1-32767
spindle side) I I I

224 0-99999 rpm m O-3 (integer)

The 1st to 4th spindIe
data can be set as the
228 0-99999 rpm G code macro
parameters.
The correspondence
232 ‘Maximum spindle 2 words 0-99999 rpm between “n” and the N
speed (gear stage 3) numbem is given

300 + 128n

240 304 Not used 2 words

1
244 308 Not used 2 words

312 Not used 2 words

2s2 316 I Not used I 2 words

256 320 -t 128n Spindle limit speed

(gear stage 1)
2 words 0-99999
I rpm
I I

2 words 0-99999
I rpm

264 2 words 0-99999 rpm

268 332+ 128n Spindle limit speed 2 words 0-99999 rpm

(gear stage 4)

-291-
APPENDLY 6. CORRESPONDENCE TMLES OF DATA SETTING N NUMBERS
6.1.AX13=COiMWOiVl?541t4METERS
(M4CH’N.E)

P number 1 (Machine)

N numbs N number

k
Data tgpe Sdrlg (unit)
320L 330Hi.,
lange
I
272 336 Not used 2 words

276 340 Not used 2 words

Not used 2 words

284 348 Not used 2 words

288 352 + 128n Spindle tap speed 2 words 0-99999 rpm

[gear stage 1)

292 3S6+ 128n Spindle tap speed 2 words 0-99999 rpm

k
(gear stage 2)

296 360 + 128n Spindle tap speed 2 words 0-99999 rpm

(gear stage 3)

300 364+ 128n Spindle tap speed 2 words 0-99999 rpm

[gear stage 4)

R= 312 376
Not used

Not used

Not used
2 words

2 words

2 words

1+ 316

320

324
380

Refer to
P No.11

800
Not used

Estemal deceleration
speed

S macro call program

number
2 words

2 words

2 words
1-120000

1-99999999
(8 digits]

328 804 r macro call program 2 words 1-99999999

number (8 digits)

332 808 M macro call program 2 words 1-99999999

number (8 digits]

336 Refer to Opposite tool reset 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 lterpola-

P No.Il distance on unit

340 Refer to G78 chamfering speed 2 words 0-120000

P No.11

344 Refer to G31 skip speed 2 words 1-120000

P No.11
I
348 i Refer to G31.1 skip speed 2 words 1- 1200U0:
P No.11

3S2 Refer to G3L2 skip speed 2 words 1-120000

P No.11

-292-
 APPENDIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE TBLES OF DATA SETIY.NG N NUMBERS
6.1.AXIS-COMMON P~ETERS (M4CHINE)

P number 1 (Machine)

i number N number
Contents Data type setting range (unit) Rmaarks
320L mm
256 Refer to G3L3 skip speed 2 words 0-120000
P No.11

360 Refer to G31.4 skip speed 2 words 1-120000

P No.11

364 384+ 128n Spindle shift speed Word 0-32767 rpm

(gear stage 1)

366 386 + 128n Spindle shift speed word 0-32767 rpm

(gear stage 2)

368 388 -t 128n Spindle shift speed Word 0-32767 rpm

(gear stage 3)

370 390 + 128n Spindle shift speed Word 0-32767 rpm

(gear stage 4)

372 392 + 128n Not used Word

374 394 + 128n Not used Word

376 396 -t-128n Not used Word

378 398 + 128n Not used Word

380 400 + 128n SpindIe orientation Word 0-32767 rpm

speed

382 402 + 128n Minimum spindle Word O* 32767 rpm

speed

384 824 Machine bit 8-digit bit O Incremental axis radial designation
parameters designation bit 1: M call macro valid
Binary (Leading zeroes bit 2 S call macro valid
cannot be bit 3 T call macro valid
or omitted.) bit 4 B call macro valid
Oor 1 for each bit S: Offset number Tl digit
bit :]bit bit 6: Shape/wear offset number separation
bit T Machine constant input unit (inch)
dO Bit “d”-OFF
or
[)dl: Bit “d”-ON
(d: O-7)

38s 825 Machine bit 8-digit bit O Status trigger system valid
parametem designation bit ‘L Interrupt type 2 valid
Bina~ (Leading zeroes bit 2 Replacement M code valid
cannot be bit 3: Pitch error incremental system
or omitted.) bit 4: M2 format label L
Oor 1 for each bit 5 M2 format label O
bit [:bit bit 6
bit % Simulation stand
.“” -

~:;;!;]
:-

-293-
APPENDLX 6. CORRESPONDENCE T@LE$ OF DATA SETTING N NUMBERS
6.1.AUS-COMkiONP~ETERS (ki!ACHINE)

P number 1 (Machine)

i number N number
Contents Data P settingrange (unit) Remarks
320L 330HL
386 Refer to Secondary miscel- Btna~ AjBor C
P No.11 laneous function name (ASCII)

O M98 type
387 812 S macro call type B@ o-3 K G6S type
2 G66 type
3: G66.1 type

388 813 T macro call type Byte o-3 (See above)

389 814 M macro call type Byte o-3 (See above)

Number of M
Refer to
390 commands which can Byte 1-4
P No.11
be assigned in 1 block

—1: Binary with sign

Refer to
391 M data type Byte -1-1 0 BCD
P No.11
1: Bkmry

Number of S
Refer to
392 commands which can Byte 1
P No.11 be assigned in 1 block

—E Binary with sign

Refer to
393 S data type Byte -1-1 0: BCD
P No.11
k Binary

Number of T
Refer to
394 commands which can Byte 1-3
P No.11
be assigned in 1 block

—h Binary with sign

Refer to
39.5 T data type Byte –l-1 O:BCD
P No.11
1: Bina~

Number of B
Refer to
396 commands which can Byte 1-4
P No.11
be assigned in 1 block

—1: Binary with sign

Refer to
397 B data type Byte -1-1 0 BCD
P No.11
1: Binary

o: 1/1
398 404-1-128n Encoder gear ratio Byte o-3 ., 1:1/2
2 1/4
3 1/8

-294-
 APPEA?DIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE TMLES OF DATA SE27”NG N NUMBERS
61.AXIS-COMMON P~EIEYW (M4CHIA?E)

P number 1 (Machine)

N number N number
mm., 330HL, Contents 3ata typeI Settingrange I (Unit) I Re-
bit O Signal O
Refer to
399 G31.1 skip condition Byte o-2 bit 1: Signal 1
P No.11
bit 2 Simal 2

400 Refer to
G31.2 skip condition Byte 0-2 (See above)
I
P No.11

401 Refer to
P No.11 G31.3 skip condition Byte 0-2 (See above)

Refer to
402 G31.4 skip condition Byte 0-2 (See above)
I
P No.Il

Refer to
403 G4 skip condition Byte 0-2 (See above)
I
P No.11

I 404
I 832 Sequence parameter 1 Word

406 834 Sequence parameter 2 Word

I I

408 836 Sequence parameter 3 word

I I

410 838 Sequence parameter 4 Word

412 840 Sequence parameter 5 Word

I I

414 842 Sequence parameter 6 Word

I 416
I
844 Sequence parameter 7 Word

I 418 I 846 lSequencepmameter8 Word

Word

422 8s0 Sequence parameter lC Word

. .

I 424
I 8.52 Sequence parameter 11 Word

426 8s4 Sequence parameter 12 word

I I
428 856 Sequence parameter 13 Word
I I

-295-
APPEMXX 6. CORRESPONDENCE T~LES OF DATA SE?TING N NUMBERS
6.1.AXIS-COMMON P~ETHW @iACklINE)

P number 1 (Machine)

[ numbs J number Contents >atalype settinglange (uUit) Remarka

320L 330HL

430 Word

432 860 Sequence parameter 15 Word

862 Sequence parameter 16 Word

Lefer to Synchronous tap return Word

436 0-999 70
‘ No.11 override I
I

M96 replacement M (Except M30)

438 815 Byte 3-97
code

M97 replacement M (Ecept M30)

439 816 Bfle 3-97
code

tefer to Constant peripheral

440
‘ No.11 speed control axis
Byte 1- no. of axes
I (O = always axis 1)

Spindle speed arrival

441
,05 + ~28n
Byte 11-99 ~ % I(O = invalid)
detection width
.
Leading zeroes bit L Constant peripheral speed invalid during
442 828 Machine bit cannot be rapid traverse
parametem Binary omitted. bit 1: Reset initial
(8 digits must be bit 2: Tool position offset execution with T
or designated.) command
Q or 1 for each bit bit 3 Simultaneous automaticfmanual absolute
1
bit value updating
bit 4 Reset initial

1
&L Bit “d’’-OFF
or bit 5 No handle accelerationldeceleration
Jl: Bit ‘dH-ON bit 6 No G30 soft limit
(d: O-7) bit ?

bit &
Machine bit bit 1:
443 829 (See above)
parameters bit 2
bit 3
1

444 Word 1-60006 ‘

I msec
I
t
D Japanese
Display language 1: English
446 822 Byte o-3
selection 2
3

447 823 Not used Byte

I I I

-296-
 APPENDLY 6. CORRESPONDENCE TmLES OF DATA SETTING N NUMBERS
6.1.AXE-COMikf’NE4RAhZEll?RS
(M.4CHlNE)

P number 1 (Machine)

~ number N number Contents )ata typ setting lange (unit) Remarks

320L %OHL

448
I Refer to
P No.11
Synchronous tap accel.
eration/decelerat ion
time constant
Word 4-1800
I
msec
I

4s0 Not used Word

I

2 words 0-99999999

2 words 0-99999999 msec

460
I Not used 2 words

2 words

2 words

472 Not used 2 words

476 Not used 2 words

480 Not used 2 words

2 words

2 words

492 I I Not used 2 words

w 2 words

2 words

2 words
. .

E 2 words
I

-297-
APPEh?DIX 6. C@UWSPONDENCE TMLES OF DATA SETTING N NUMBERS
6.1.
AXE-COMMON P~ETERS (kUiCH~E)

P number 1 (User)

1 number N number
setting mn~ (unit) Remarks
contents Data type
320L mmn.

Referto X-axischuckbarrier Intmpola-

608 P No.11 area 1 2 words o -99999999 x 2 ~ionunit

Referto X-askchuckbarrier Interpola-

612 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 tion ~nit
P No.11 area 2

Referto X-axischuckbarrier Interpola-

616 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 tion unit
P No.11 area 3

Ilefer to X-axischuckbarrier Interpola-

620 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 tion unit
P No.11 area 4

Referto X-axischuckbarrier lnterpola-

624 P No.11 area 5 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 tjonunit

628 Referto X-axischuckbarrier lnterpola-

2 words 0-99999999 x 2 ~ionunit
P No.11 area 6

Referto Z-axischuckbarrier Interpola-

632 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 tion unit
P No.11 area 1

Referto Z-ask chuckbarrier Interpola-

636 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 tion unit
P No.11 area 2

Referfo Zaxis chuckbarrier lnterpola-

640 P No.11 area 3 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 ~ionunit

Referto Z-axischuckbarrier Interpola-

644 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 ~ionunit
P No.11 area 4

Referto Z-asischuckbarrier Interpola-

648 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 tion “nit
P No.11 area 5

Refer to z-axis chuck barrier Interpola-

652 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 ~ion unit
P No.11 area 6

656+ 8n 960-I-8n Character 1 Byte Name must contain 7 n: O-19

6.57+ 8n 961 +8n Character 2 Byte . . or less characters. (n) (Variable)
658i- 8n 962+8n Character 3 Variable Byte End of character string 0 ..... :%
659i-fh 963+ 8n Character 4 names Byte must be O. 1 .....
660-I-8n 964+8n Character 5 #(.500+n ) Byte 2 ..... #502
661+8n 96S+8n Character 6 name g 3 ....4#503
662+8n 966+8n Character 7
663i-8n 967+ 8n Character 81 Byte 19 ..... #519

-298-
 APPE.NDR 6. CORRESPONDENCE T&LES Of’ DATA SETTING N NUMBERS
6.1.Ak?S-COMMONP~ETliRS (M4CHINEJ

P number 1 (User)

Mnumbm N numbex Contents >ata type setting mnge (unit) Remarks

320L 330HL
S16+32n 1120+32n Character 1 Byte Device name must
817+32n 1121+ 32n Character 2 Devict Byte contain 3 or less
818+ 32n 1122+32n Character 3 name Byte alphanumeric charac-
819+32n 1123+ 32n Character 4 1 Byte ters and symbols.
End of character string
must be O.

0:19200 IXO-4 (integer)

820+ 32n 1124-1-32n Transfer rate Byte o-7 1:9600 5 groups (device Oto
24800 device 4) can be set as
32400 se~al I/O parameters.
41200 Correspondences
S 600 between “n” and N
6300 numbers are as
? 110 follows.

1:1 (bit) n = O(deviceO)

821-!-32n 112S+ 32n Stop bit Byte 1-3 2 1.S(bit) [N numben 816-847 1
32 (bit)

O Odd number n = 1 (device 1)

822+ 32n l126+32n Even number parity Byte o-1 1: Even number [ N numben 848-8791

823+32n l127+32n Parity valid Byte 0-1

824i-32n llM + 32n Character length Byte o-3

O:.5 bits
1:6 bits
27 bits
n = 3 (device 3)
[ N number 912+43 1
i38 bits
0: None n = 4 (device 4)
82.5+ 32n l129+32n Terminator type Byte o-5 L EOIVEOB [ N numben 944-97.51
2: EOB
3: EOR
4 Any 1 character
5 Any 2 characters

826+32n 1130+ 32n Terminator code 1 Binary ASCII

I I I

827+32n 1131+32n Terminator code 1 ASCII

I I I

O No output
828 + 32n 1132+32n CR output Byte o-1 . 1: output

O No output
829+ 32n l133+32n Title feed output Byte o-1 1: output

-299-
APPENDLY 6. CURRESPONDENCE T~LES OF DATA SEWING N NUMBERS
6.1.AXXS-COMMON P~EllXS @MCHINE)

P number 1 (User)

Data ~ settingrange (unit) Remarks

I I
O:RTS/CTS
830-t-32n 1134-1-32nHandshake system Byte 0-2 1:None
2 DC!
& No parity
I L parity I

832+ 32n 1136+32n Ef.A [ code BinaW 0- FF (hes)

I I I
Binary 0- FF (hex) m 0-4 (integer)
5 groups (device Oto
device 4) can be set as
834i-32n 11138+32nIEIA # code 0- FF (hex) serial I/O parameters.
Correspondences
between “n”and N
Binaty 0- FF (hex) numbers are as
follows.

1140+ 32n EIA = code n = O(device O) 1

I I 1[ N number 816-847J

837+3211 l141+32n EIA : code 0- FF (hex) n = 1 (device 1) -

I I 1[ N numbe~ 848-879.

838+32n 1142-f-32n EfA ! Code Binary 0- FF (hex)

I
330HLonly
1[ n = 2 (device 2) ~
N number 880-911J

II
839-1-32n 1143-t-32n EIA $ code

&ll+32n 1145-1-32n Feed control flag Byte 0-3 0 Neither IX?, nor
DC4 output
k DC2 only output
2 DC4 only output
3 Both DC2 and IlC4
output

842+ 32n 11146+32n INo. of feeds

844-t-32n 1148+ 32n Time-out time

846i- 32n 11.50+32n EIA output

847+ 32n 1151-1-32nNot used

+-+3--i

-300-
 APPEiVDLY 6. CORRESPONDENCE T~LES OF DATA SETTING N NUMBERS
til. AXKJ-COMMO.NP~ETERS (kL4ClZliVE)

P number 1 (User)

Contents Data w setting range (unit)

976 Not used 2 words

I
I

7=
980 Not used 2 words
I

9s4 Not used

I 2 words

988 Not used 2 words

I

992

996

1000 Not used 2 words

*
1004 Not used 2 words
I

1008

1012
=+-=
1016 Not used 2 words
*
1020” Not used 2 words

1024 Not used 2 words

+ +
1028

1032

=+-F
1036

1040
.
--t
1044

1048
+ =--i-=
Maximum allowable
Refer to Interpola-
10.52 P No.11 value for arc radius 2 words 0-220 tion unit
difference

10.S6
I Not used
I
2 words

-301-
APPENDLY 6. CORRESPONDENCE T~.LES OF DATA SETTING NUMBERS
6.1.AXIS-COMMON P~ETERS (XL4CH1NE)

~ number N number tintents Data ~ settingrange

320L 330UL (unit) Remarks

1060 Not used 2 words

1064 Not used 2 words

1068 Not used 2 words

1072 Not used 2 words

1076 Not used 2 words

1080 Not used Word

1082 Not used Word

8digit bit & Command unit xIO

1084 1296 Control bit parameter designation bit h G code C selection
1 (Leading zeroes bit 2 G code A selection
cannot be bit 3: G code B selection
Bina~ omitted.) bit 4 Initial G20
Oor 1 for each bit 5; Decimal point command type 2
[ 1 bit 6 GOOindependent
bit % G33El precision

; i:::3
(d: 0-7)

b it O:Initial G18
108s 1297 Control bit parameter (See (See above) b it h Initial G19
2 above) bit 2 Dwell command time
bit 3
bit 4: TooI nose compensation start fcancel typt
B
bit 5: Interference avoidance
bit 6 Hole machining reds Z fiiediG83i87 high
. . speed
bit 2 Turning canned cycle G66.1 type

b it O: Initial G96
1086 1298 c ontrol bit parameter (See (See above) bit 1: Initial G95
3 above) b it 2: Initial G90
b it 3:
b it 4: Machine lock high speed
b it 5: Reference point/intermediate point
ignored
bit 6: Macro single block
b it ? AbsoIute/incremental axis name change

-302-
 APPENDLY 6. CORRESPONDENCE TBLES OF DATA SETEING N NUMBERS
6.1.AXZS-COMMON P~EIERS (M4ClZNE]

P number 1 (User)

J number N number settingrange (unit) Remarks

Contents Data type
320L 330HL
8d@ bit O: Canned cycle positioning modal
1087 1299 Ccmtro[ bit parameter designation bit 1: Cutting feed external deceleration invnlid
4 (Leading zeroes bit 2 Parameter setting lock
Bina~ cannot be bit 3: InitiaI GO
omitted.) bit 4 TooI command system
or Oor 1 for each (0 group number
[1bit U tool number)
bit.% Spare tool seIection system
bit ~:::::) (O entry sequence~
1: uniform service life)
bit 6 Synchronous tap cycle
(d O.+) bit % Tool life management function selection

bit O
1088 1300 Control bit parameter (See (See above) bit 1:
5 above) bit 2 Program restart automatic return
bit 3: GOOdry run
bit 4: Wear offset amount input, absolute
value
bit 5 Wear offset amount input, incremental
value
bit 6 Interrupt amount resetting
bit 7: G46 reversal error avoidance

1089 Not used Binagf

1090 Not used Blna~

0 Port Oselected (CNS12)

Data input port Byte o-2 1: Port 1 selected (CNS32)
1091 1280
selection 2 Port 2 selected (CNS31)

1092 1281 Data output port Byte o-2 (See above)

selection

1093 1282 NC operation port Byte 0-2 (See above)

selection

1094 1283 Data input device Byte 0-4 Selection of <0> * <4> entered in “1/O
selection device parameters”

1095 1284 Data output device Byte 0-4 (See above)

selection

1096 1285 NC operation device Byte o-4 (See above)

selection

-303-
APPE.NDLX 6. CORRESPONDENCE T~LES OF DATA SETTING iv NUMBERS
til. AZIXCOMMON P~EIEIU (M4CHINE)

P number 1 (User)

I contents Data w setting range (unit)

w
Remarka

1097

109s Refer to O-89 Deg.

P No.11

Plane selection G17,

Refer to
1099 basic horizontal axis ASCII
P No.11
name

Plane selection G17,

Refer to

I+
1100 horizontal parallel azis BinaW ASCII
P No.11
I1 name

Plane seIection G17,

Refer to
1101 horizontal parallel axis Binary ASCII
P No.11
2 name

1102 Refer to Plane selection G17, Bina~ ASCII

P No.11 basic vertical axis name

PIane selection G17,

1103 Refer to vertical parallel axis 1 Binary ASCII
P No.11
name

Plane selection G17,

Refer to
1104 vertical parallel axis 2 B;na~ ASCII
P No.11
name I I

1105 Refer to Plane selection G17, Binary ASCII

P No.11 basic height azis name

Plane selection G17,

Refer to
1106 height paraI1elaxis 1 Binary ASCII
P No.11
name

Plane selection G17,

1107 Refer to height parallel axis 2 ASCII
Blnaiy
P No.11
name

Thread cutting cycle,

Refer to
1108 chamfering Byte 1-127 X041
P No.11
magnification I I

1109 1286 Macro print port Byte

selection

1110 1287 PLC 1/0 port selection Byte

Byte
1111 1288 Macro print device
selection I
0-4
I Selection of e 0>-<4> entered in “VO

1112 1289 PLC 1/0 device Byte o-4

selection

1113 Not used Byte

-304-
 APPENDLY 6. CORRESPONDENCE TBLES OF DATA SETTING N NUMBERS
61. AX7S-C@f..ONP~ETE~ @L4CHINE)

P number 1 (User)

1number N number
Contents Data type setting range (unit) Remarka
3211L 330HL
O Port Oselected (CNS12)
Computer link port
1114 1290 Byte 0-”2 1: Port 1 selected (CNS32)
selection
2 Port 2 selected (CNS31)

1115 1291 Computer link device Byte

selection

Automatic tool length

Interpola-
1116 measurement 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 tion unit
(decelemtion area “r”)

Automatic tool length

Interpola-
1120 measurement 2 words 0-99999999 x2 tion unit
(deceleration area “d”)

Automatic tool Ienglh

1124 measurement 2 words 1-120000
(measurement speed)

1128 G71 minimum cut 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 Interpola-

amount tion unit

1132 G71 cut change 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 Interpola-

amount tion unit

1136 G71 escape amount 2 words 2-99999999 x 2 Interpola-

tion unit

1140 G74 return amount 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 Interpola-

tion unit

1144 G76 finishing 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 Interpola-

allowance tion unit

1148 G76 minimum cut 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 lnterpola-

amount tion unit
I
1152 G71 cut amount 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 interpola-
tion unit

1156 G73 turning X 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 Interpola-

tion unit

1160 G73 turning Z 2 words 0-99999999 x 2 interpola-

tion unit

1164 G73 division number Word 0-9999

1166 G76 repetition number Byte o-99 “,

1167 G76 tool nose angle Byte o-99 Deg

-305-
APPEND.H 6. CORRESPONDENCE TDLES OF DATA SEWING N NUMBERS
6.1.AX?S-COMM”.N P~EIERS (M4C’’INE)

P number 1 (User)

N number N number
Contents Data type setting lange (unit) Remarka
320L 33013L

‘8-digit ‘ bit Q Start code BEL

1168 1292 Computer link designation bit 1:
parameter (Leading zeroes bit 2:
Binary cannot be bit 3
omitted.) bit k
or Oor 1 for each bit 5:
~it . bit 6:
bit bit 7:

%-digit bit O: % RWII (SEARCH)

1172 1301 Operation bit designation bit 1: SHORT CUT (RT)
parameter 6 (Leading zeroes bit 2
Bina~ cannot be bit 3:
omitted.) 1 bit 4
or Oor 1 fo~ each bit 5:
Lbit J bit 6:
bit bit 2

. .

-306-
 APPENDIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE TDLES OF DATA SEWING N NUMBERS
6.1.AXIS-COMMON P~ETERS (M.4CHINEJ

P number 11 (Machine)
I

I (unit) Remarks
1 I

Data type setting range

I
2 words 1-120000

Interpola-
4 lFacing tool rest distance 2 words 1-99999999 x 2 tion unit

8 pm Wiipspwd 2 words 1-120000

2 words 1-120000
I I
16 pm SKipspwi 2 words 1-120000

20 G31.3Skip speed
I

24 IG31.4 Skipspwd 2 words 1-120000

28 G28 chamfering speed 2 words 0-120000

Byte 1-4

%yte –1-1

Byte 1

25 S daia type Byte –1-1

Byte 11-3 I

Byte –1-l

No. of B commands that

38 can be assigned in one Byte 1-4
block

39 B data type Byte —1-1

Bina~ A, Bor C
(ASCII)

-307-
APPEi’?DIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE TDLES OF DATA SEK?ZVG N NUMBERS
61. A.XXS-COMM”N P~ETERS (AL4CH.NE)

P number 11 (Machine)

N number
330HL
Contents Data type setting Ian& (unit) Remarks

41 G31.1 Skip conditions Byte 0-2

I I
42 G31.2 Skip conditions Byte o-2

43 G31.3 Skip conditions Byte o-2

I I

44 G31.4 Skip conditions Byte 0-2

45 G4 Skip conditions Byte o-2

1- No. of axis

48 Synchronous tap return Word 0-999

F
override

50 4-1800 msec
I
52 Hole machining cycle C axis 2 words 0-99999999
clamp M

56 Hole machining cycleDwell 2 words 0-99999999

I after C axis clamp M

I 60 Millingrotary axis number Byte

I 61 lMillingrotaVaxis name \ Byw O Y axis, 1: C axi:

L
64

I 68 Not used
I 2 words

12 Not used 2 words

I I

76 Not used 2 words

-308-
 APPENDIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE TBLES OF DATA SEllWG N NUMBERS
iii. ~S-COiWkfON P~ETERS @i!21CH~E]

P number 11 (User)

Inumber ((hit) Remarks

Contents Data ~ setting range
33(IHL

224 X axis chuck barrier area 1 2 words 0-99999999 x2 Interpola-

tion unit

228 X axis chuck barrier area 2 2 words 0-99999999 x2 Interpola-

tion unit

232 X axis chuck barrier area 3 2 words 0-99999999 x2 Interpola-

tion unit

236 X axis chuck barrier area 4 2 words 0-99999999 x2 Interpola-

tion unit

240 X axis chuck barrier area S 2 words 0-99999999 x2 Interpola-

tion unit

244 X asis chuck barrier area 6 2 words 0-99999999 x2 Interpola-

tion unit

248 Z axis chuck barrier area 1 2 words 0-99999999 x2 Interpola-

tion unit

2.52 Z axis chuck barrier area 2 2 words 0-99999999 x2 interpola-

tion unit

2S6 Z axis chuck barrier area 3 2 words 0-99999999 x2 Interpola-

tion unit

260 Z axis chuck barrier area 4 2 words 0-99999999 x2 Interpola-

tion unit

264 Z axis chuck barrier area 5 2 words 0-99999999 x2 interpola-

tion unit

268 Z axis chuck barrier area 6 2 words 0-99999999 x2 Interpola-

tion unit

-309-
APPE.NDLX 6. C@?R.ESPOA?DEiVCETBLES OF DATA SE71YNGN NUMBERS
&l. AXL$-COMMON P~E7WlS @i?AcHw)

P number 11 (User)

Wnumber
Contents Data * setting range (unit) Remarks
33(EIL

280 Maximum tolerabIe arc 2 words 0-220 Interpola-

radius difference tion unit

297 G78 thread chamfering Byte O-89 Deg

angle

Plane selection
298 Basic horizontal axis name Blnaxy ASCII
G17

Plane selection
299 HorizontallparalIel azis 1 Binary ASCII
name G17

Plane selection
300 Horizontal/parallel azis 2 Binary ASCII
name G17

Plane selection
301 Basic vertical azis name Binary ASCII
G17

Plane se~ection
302 Vertical/paralIel azis 1 Blna~ ASCII
name G17

Plane selection
303 Vertical/paralleI azis 2 Binary ASCII
name G17

Plane selection
304 Basic height axis name Binary ASCII
G17

Plane selection
305 Height/parallel azis 1 13ina~ ASCII
name G17

PIane seIection
306 Height/parallel azis 2 Bha~ ASCII
name G17

307 Thread cutting cycle Byte 1-127 0.1 times

chamfering scale

-310-
 APPEN..LY 6. CORRESPONDENCE T~LES OF DATA SE?TING N NUMBERS
6.2.A.XRWNDEPENDENTP~ETERS (-CHINE)

6.2. AXIS-INDEPENDENT PARAMETERS @A2HlNE)

P number 2 (Machine)

Vnumber N number
Contents Data type setting range (unit) Remarks
ml, 330HL

Refer to
o 0 Rapid traverse rate 2 words 1-120000 speed unit
table

Refer to
Reference point return ~ words ~ - ~20000
4 4 speed unit
rapid traverse rate
table

Refer to
8 8 Clamp speed 2 words 1-120000 speed unit
table

Basic machine InterpoIa-

12 12 coordinate system 2 words O-* 99999999 X2 tion unit
offset

16 16 Second reference point 2 words O-*99999999 X2 lnterpola-

coordinate tion unit

20 20 Not used 2 words

24 24 Not used 2 words

28 28 Store stroke end upper 2 words O-299999999 X2 Interpola-

limit tion unit

32 32 St70ke end lower limit 2 wo~ds o-=99999999 X2 Interpola-

tion unit

36 36 Command unit Word

1000 100 10 1 0.1
micron micron micron micron micron
system system system system system
10000 1000 100 10 1
2degree 2
20000 2000 200 20
indexing
5-degree 50000 5000 500 50 5
indexing

38 38 Axh name Bina~ ASCII

39 39 IncremeMaI axis name Binary ASCII - ‘

8-digit bit O: Servo OFF, no follow-up

40 40 Axis control flag 1 designation bit 1:
Binary (Leading zeroes bit 2 No zero point
cannot be bit 3:
or omitted.) bit 4:
0 or 1 for each bit 3 Diametrical designation asis
bit [1bit bit & Simultaneous automatic/marmal absolute
value updating
bit 1 Absolute position detection execution

E::=I
(d: O-7)

-311-
APPENDIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE TBLES OF DATA SETTING N NUMBERS
6.2.AXIS-INDEPENDENT P~ETERS (iW4CHINE)

P number 2 (Machine)

Vnumbe
320L
Contents Data type setting range (unit) Remarks

kdigit ‘ bit 0
41 41 ksk control flag 2 designation bit 1: Inch output
Binary (f.sading zeroes bit 2 Z%ro point direction (–)
cannot be bit 3: Servo off error correction
or omitted.) bit 4: Rotary axis
Oor 1 for each bit 5: Counterclockwise
bit bit bit 6:
bit % Control axis removable
dO: Blt “d”-Oti
Or
dk Bh “d’’-ON
(d: O-7)

8-digit ‘ bit O OT-multipIe deceleration

42 42 ~moothingmode 1 designation (time constant)
Bha~ (Leading zeroes bit 1: OT deceleration pattern
cannot be bit 2 OT deceleration pattern
or omitted.) bit 3
Oor 1 for each bit 4
bit bit bit 5
bit 6
dO Bit “d’’-O~ bit 7:
Or
dl: Blt ‘d”-ON<
(d: O-7)

~-digit ‘ bit O Rapid traverse finear acceleration/

43 43 ~moothingmode 2 designation deceleration
Binary (Leading zeroes bit 1: Rapid traveme primary delay
cannot be bit 2 Rapid traverse seconda~ delay
or omitted.) bit 3 Rapid traverse exponential acceleration/
O or 1 for each finear deceleration
bit bit bit 4 Cutting feed finear acceleratiotd
deceleration
do ~lt ‘d’’-Oti bit S Cutting feed primary delay
Or bit 6 Cutting feed secondary delay
dl: Bit “d”-ON bh 1 Cutting feed exponential acceleratiord
(d: O-7) - linear deceleration

Linear acceleration/
44 44 deceleration rapid Word -5000 ms
traverze time constant

Linear acceleration/
46 46 deceleration cutting Word -5000 ms
feed time constant

48 48 Rapid traverse time Word -5000 ms

constant

~Rapid traverse time

.50 50 ‘constant (for secondaq Word -5000 “ : ms
delay)

52 52 Cutting feed time Word -5000 ms

constant

iCutting feed time

54 54 ‘constant (for secondag Word -5000 ms
delay)

56 56 10T time Word -32767 ms

eed
Creep speed (zero
58 58 Word -60000 peed
point return)
nit table

60 60 ~Grid mask amount Word -65535 )Utput

nit

-312-
 APPENDLY 6. CORRESPONDENCE TMLES OF DATA SETI’ING N NUMBERS
ti2. A.X?S-INDEPENDENT
P~E’llU?S @i%CH.E)

P number 2 (Machine)

N numbs Vnumbe
Contents )ata type setting
range (unit) Remarks
320L 330HL I

62 62 Grid interval Word 0-100 output

unit I

64 64 2kro point shift Word 0-65535 output

amount unit I

66 66 Rapid traveme Word output

backlash amount unit
I

68 6S Cutting feed backIash

amount
Word (J- .+9999 output
unit I
70 70 Axis servo gain (with 0-100.00 x4 rad/s h 0.2.5 increments
synchronous tapping) Example: 31.75-31.75 x 4 = 127

72 72 Gear ratio 1 word 1-30 No. of gear teeth on motor side

74 74 Gear ratio 2 Word 1-30 No. of gear teeth on machhle side

76 76 Position loop gain Word 0-100.00 x4 rad/s In 0.25 increments

78 78 Position loop feedback Word 0- FFFF (hex)

constant

80 so Speed loop Word 1-500

proportional gain 1

82 82 Speed loop Word -32768-32767

proportional gain 2

84 84 Speed Ioop deIay Word 9000-10000

compensation

86 86 Speed loop advance Word 163-16384

compensation

88 88 Current [oop advance Word 1-7680

compensation 1

90 90 Current loop advance Word 1-32767

compensation 2

92 92 Current loop Word 100-5000

proportional gain 1

94 94 Current loop Word 1-2.560

proportional gain 2 .

96 96 Current [imiting Word 1-1364

+ side

98 98 Current limiting Word –1 - –1364

- side
i
100 100 Not used Byte

101 101 Not used Byte

-313 -
 —.

APPENDIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE T&LES OF DATA SEi7’.’.NGN NUMBERS

6.2.AXXHNDEPENDENT P~EIW?S @lACHINE)

P number 2 (Machine)

N number N number
320L mm’m cmltcnts Data ~ settingrange (unit) Remarks

lo~ 102 Not used Byte

103 103 Not used Byte

104 104 Additional function Word 0- m (hex)

selection

106 106 Ball screw pitch PB Word 1-.50 mm

108 108 Movement unit Word 1-1000

110 110 Excessive regeneration Word 51-18000 OS sec

alarm time constant

112 112 Overload time constant Word 1-18000 0.1 sec

114 114 Overload detection Word 1-500 %

level

116 116 Excessive error alarm Word 1-32’767 Interpola-

mnge tion unit

118 118 In-position width Word 0-32767 output

unit

120 120 Encoder, motor type Word 0- FPPF (hex)

122 122 Overload detection Word 0-32767 Interpola-

Ievel 2 tion unit

124 124 Not used Byte

125 125 Not used Byte

126 126 Not used Byte

127 127 Not used Byte

128 128 Not used Byte

. .

129 129 Not used Byte

130 130 Not used Byte

131 131 Not used Byte

132 132 Not used Byte

-314-
 APPENDLX 6. CORRESPONDENCE Z4BLES W DATA SETTING N NUMBERS
6.2 A-XZILINDEPEh?DENTP~EZEIW (MACHINE)

P number 2 (Machine)

numbex N number
Contents Data type setting range (unit) Remarks
320L 33(JHL

133 133 Not used Byte

134 134 Not used Byte

135 135 Not used Byte

136 136 Absolute position Word

detection

138 138 Absolute position Word

detection

140 140 Tool setter standard 2 words 0-599999999 x2 Interpola-

position + tion unit

144 144 Tool setter standard 2 words O-t99999999 x2 Interpola-

position – tion unit

148 152 Absolute value 2 words 0-99999999

detection limit

152 Not used 2 words

156 Not used 2 words

160 Not used 2 words

164 Not used 2 words

168 Not used 2 words

172 Not used 2 words

176 Not used 2 words

180 Not used 2 words

184 Not used 2 words

. .

188 Not used 2 words

-315-
APPENDIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE T@LES OF DATA SETTING N iVUMBE~
i52.AXIS-INDEPENDE~ P~EZERS (3L4CHINEJ

P number 2 (User)

~ number N number
320L 33(E’IL
(kmtents Data type settingrange (unit) Remarks

Unidirectional Interpola-
2.56 2.56 positioning shift 2 words o-t 99999999x2 tion unit
amount

260 260 User stroke end upper 2 words o-% 99999999x2 Interpola-
limit tion unit

264 264 User stroke end lower 2 words 0-299999999 x2 lnterpola-

Iimit tion unit

Tool length Interpola-

268 268 measurement reference 2 words &O~ 99999999X2 tion unit
surface height

8-digit bit 0: Mirror image

272 272 Axis bit parameter 1 designation bit L Length offset invalid
Binary (Leading zeroes blt Z Soft limit invalid
cannot be bit 3 No G76/86 shift
or omitted.) bit 4 G76/86 shift (–)
Oor 1 for each bit 5:
bit [1bit bit 6:

B::::o bit7:
(do-7)

8-digit bit 0 Automatic reference point dog type

273 273 Ask bit parameter 2 designation bit 1: Manual reference point dog type
Bina~ (Leading zeroes bit 2
cannot be bit 3:
or omitted.) bit 4:
0 or 1 for each bit 5
bit bit
[1 bit 6 Control axis removal request

E::::$ bity
(d: O-7)

274 274 Not used Word

276 276 Not used 2 words

280 280 Not used 2 words

284 284 Not used 2 words ‘,

288 288 Not used 2 words

292 292 Not used 2 words

296 296 Not used 2 words

300 300

-316-
 APPENDiX 6. CORRESPONDENCE TM.LES OF DATA SETTING N NUMBERS
6.3.iW4CHINE ERROR COMPENSATION INFORM4TTON

6.3. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION INFORMATION

P number 3

N number N number
contents
Data settingrange Remarks

T
32(X. 330HL

330HL ~ The N numbem correspond to the #

Compensation basic
320L 256x (O- numbers on the machine error
1 1 Word O- (_f%i no. compensation screen.
axis number
(axis No.
–1) -l- (o-
(Sys.tesn-1)

2 2 Compensation
direction axis number

3 3 Division point number

of reference point +

4 4 Division point number Word

on minus-most side

5 s Division point number Word

on plus-most side

6 6 Compensation
I I
magnification

7
I 7 Division interval 2
words
0-99999999

6.4. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION AMOUNT

P number 4

N number N number
Contents Data type setting range (unit) Remarks
320L 3?(EIL

. The N numbers correspond to the

1- (128 1- (128 Machine error Byte –128 -127 numbers of the offset amounts (#
x no. of x no. of compensation data numbers) on the machine error
control control compensation data screen.
sxes) axes) . The setting units are output units but the
units for the actual compensation puIses
differ according to the compensation
ma=mification rate.

-317-
APPENDLY 6. CURRESPONDENCE T&LES OF DATA
ti5. PLC CONiST~

6.5. PLC

P number 5

F=
N number N number Data * setting range (unit) Remarks
Contents
320L 330HL I

● The N numbers correspond to the constant

1-48 PLC constant 2 words numbers (# numbers) on the PLC
constant screen.

6.6. PLC TIMER

P number 6

~ number N number Data w setting range (unit) Remarks

Contents
320L 330HL

. The N numbers correspond to the #

*_l$ 10 ms add timer 0.01 sec rwmbem on the PLC timer screen.
0-15 Word 0-32767
@o - TIS)

16-95 100 ms add timer Word 0-32767 0.1 sec

16-95 (736 - T95)

100 ms accumulating Word 0-32767 0.1 sec

96 - 103 96 - 103 timer (T96 - T103)

. .

-318-
 APPENDIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE T~LES OF DATA SETTING N NUMBERS
6% PLC cmnvZ7m

6.7 I?LCCOUNTER
P number 7

Y number N number
Contents Data type setting rao& (unit) Remarks
3XJL 330HL

● The N numbers correspond to the #

0-23 0-23 Counter (CO- C23) Word 0-32767 numbers on the PLC counter screen.

6.8 BIT SELECTION PARAMETERS

P number 8

$ number N number
Contents Data type setting mnfy (unit) Remarks
320L 3301’D...

8-digit ● The numbers correspond to the #

1--96 1-96 Bit selection Bina~ designation numbers on the bit selection screen.
parameters (Leading zeroes . The contents of N numbers 49 through 96
or cannot be are already defined and fixed since they are
omitted.) used by the machine builder and
bit Oor 1 for each MELDAS.
[1bit

E:::3
(d: O-7)

.,

-319-
APPENDIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE T~LES OF DATA SE7TLVG N NUMBERS
6.9.PLCAXIS’ CONTROL PARAMETERS

6.9 I?LCAXIS CONTROL PARAMETERS

~ rmmbm Contents lata typt (unit) I Remarks

I
Rapid traverse mmtmin
o 2 words 1-60000 (0.1 incfr/
rein)

G28 rapid traverse mtnImin

4 2 words 1-60000 (0.1 incii
rein)

Cutting feed clamp speed mm/min

8 2 words 1-60000 (0.1 inchl
rein)

12 Not used 3yte

13 Not used Byte

14 Not used Byte

15 Not used Byte

8-digit bit O
Axis control flag 1 Binary [designation bit Y
‘(1.xading zeros bit 2
or cannot be bit 3:
omitted.) bit 4:
bit Oor 1 for each bit 5:
~bit 1 bit 6:
/ bit T

)
no: Blt “n” OFF

~~~ Bit “n”ON

(no-7)

f8-digit o:
17 Axk control flag 2 Binary ~designation 1:
(Leading zeros 2 Zero point direction
or cannot be 3 Servo off error correction ,
omitted.) 4 Rotary axis
bit Oor 1 for each s Ccw
1“
blt 6:
‘L
/

1
nO fM “n” OFF

l$y~y
:- .

PLC axis mounted card No. Byte (Hexadecimal)

76543Z1O

i CardNo.!MS No.I
Card No. 1-3
Azis No. 1 - 6

19 Not used Byte

20 GOtime constant (linear) Word 1-1500 msec

-320-
 APPEN..LY 6. CORRESPONDENCE TMLES OF DATA SEWING N NUMBERS
6.9.PLCAXZS COM!RUL P~E~RS

J number COnteata Data type setting range (unit) Remarks

22 Word

24 Word

26 Word

28 G1 time constant Word 1-1500 msec

(fimt-order lag)

30 Word

32 Word

mmlmin
34 G28 approach speed Word 1-60000 (0.1 incfd
rein)

36 Grid mask amount Word 0- 6s53s w

Setting value = RNG/n

38 Grid interval Word 0-100 “ (m grid number per one detector rotation)

Detector RNG grspc

12000 (3000 P/rpm) 12 12,6,4 ...
20000 (5000 Plrpm) 20 20, 10,5 .. .
100000 (2SO#0P/rPm) 100 100,50,25 ...

40 Reference point shift Word 0-65535 P

amount

42 GO bacfdash Word 0-9999 Output unit

44 G1 backlash Word 0-9999 Output unit

46 Word

48 Gear ratio 1 Word 1-30 Refer to Note 1 when the setting range given on
the left is exceeded.

50 Gear ratio 2 Word 1-30 Refer to Note 1 when the setting range given on
the left is exceeded.
.
52 Position loop gain Word 1-100 rad/sec

S4 Speed loop FB constant Word 0- FFFF (hex) Normally set to O

-321-
APPENDLX 6. CORRESPONDENCE T~LES OF DATA SETTING N NUMBERS
6.9.PLCAXXS CO~OL P~EZERS

i number contents Data type setting mnge (Unit) Remarks

56 Speed loop proportional Word 1-500

gain 1

58 Speed loop proportional Word -32768-32767 Normally set to O

gain 2

60 Speed loop delay Word 9000-10000

compensation

62 Speed loop advance Word 163-16384 0.085

compensation radlsec

64 Current loop advance word 1-7680

compensation 1

66 Current loop advance Word 1-32767

compensation 2

68 Current loop proportional Word 100-5000

gain 1

70 Current loop proportional Word 1- 2S60

gain 2

72 Current limit (+) side Word 1-1364 Motor name Max. current Scale
HA 40,43 22A 62.0
74 Current limit (-) side Word -1- –1364 80,83 40 34.1
100 60 22,7
200 80 17.0
300 120 11.3

76 Not used Word (Hexadecimal)

78 Lost motion offset gain Word 0-64 70 Set 0-100 (%) with HEX
(Hexadecimal)

80 Additional function 8-digit bit O:

selection 1 Binary designation bit 1:
(Leading zeros bit 2 Speed FB offset
or cannot be bit 3
omitted.) bit 4
bit Oor 1 for each bit S
[1bit bit & Lost motion offset
b it T Speed detector connection direction
nO: Bit “n” OFT O:~ C directions ~
Or ( 1: B, D directions
[1nl: Bit “n” ON
(n: O-7) PD2/PDl Position detector connection card
VD2JVJJ1 Speed detector connection c@.
. .
Connection card PD2/VD2 PDVVD1
Pl?ol o 0
RF31,RF33 o 1

Example) The values wiIl follow this !able

according to the servo amplifier.
Sewo amplifier PD2 PD1 VD2 VDl
Eol 0000 0
EM 0100 4
E33 0001
0101 :
Z33 0100 4
0 1 0 I’ 5

-322-
 APPENDLY 6. CORRESPONDENCE TmLES OF DATA SE73WVGN JVUMBERS
(i9.
PLCA.X7SCONTROL P~EnjRs

~ number Contents Data type Sating range (Unit) Remarks

81 Additional function BinaW ““

selection
, [*] K!&

(O:semi-closed, 1: closed)

.“” bit 5:

((k
bit 6 Position feedback polarity

E;;;]
positive, k negative)
bit Z Absolute position detection function
.“”

:-

82 Bail screw pitch word 1-50 mm

84 RNG 1-1OOO
Position detector ~ RNG
Encoder 30#0 pfr 12
OSJ35K-6-8-1O8 5000ph 20
0AER5K-IX-3-8-108
OSI%K-13T-3-9.S2-O
OAER.5K-lX-EI’-3-9.S2-O
OAER2SK.IX. 3.8.108 25003pfr 100
Linearscaleinductsyn PITXIU
Scale rmotution (v)

86 Over regenerative alarm word 51- 180Q0

time constant

‘Wins =

83 Overlond time constant Word 1-18000 100 ms Standard @Xl(60 seconds)

90 Overload detection leveI Word 1-SOU 70 Standard 150~o

92 Maximum error range 1-32767 lnterpola- (Exnmple) Rapid tmverse 15 mndmin

during servo ON tion unit Position kmp gain 33
Interpolation unit 0.5 p
15 x 104
60x33 x0.S ‘“*3100
Rapid traverse Setting
1 mm/min 30a
2 Soo
. 3 700
4 900
5 1100
6 1300
8 170U
10 210fl
12 2s00
15 1 3100
16 3300
18 3700
20 4100
24 4900 i
NOW Position loop gain 33
Interpolation unit 0.S y

-323-
APPENDIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE T~LES OF DATA SEIT’NG N NUM..ERS
6.9.PLC AXIS’ CONTROL P~ETERS

[ numbm Cclntelm Datatype wing mnge (unit) Remark

nter-
mposition judgement
94
alue
word 3-32767 ,olation
nit

96 !ncoder, motor type Word et with c s 4 0

exadecimal
PEN 1 ENT I
PEN Set the position detector with the following table,
ENI’ Set the heed detector (installed opposite ~he motor
load) with the foIIowingtable.

‘EN = 13NTwhen semi-closed.

Detector ‘EN/ENT
3000 P/R encoder o
5000 Pm encoder 1
OSE5K-6-8-1O8
OSE.5K-ET-3-9.52-O
5000 p/r encoder i- absolute value 9
OAER5K-1X-3-8-1O8
0AER5K-lX-ET-3-9.52
25000 p/r encoder + absolute value A
(OAER25K-1X-3-8-1O8)
Linear scale 4
(Inductsyn + AD converter, optical scale,
magnet scale)
/fTr
Set the motor name with the followinz table
Motor name
HA33 8F
t- HA40 o
43 80

L
80
83 ;1
100 2
200 3
300 4

hximum range of mter-

98 rror during setvo Word olation
)FF nit

100 pecial setvo function Word et with

15141312111098765 43210
exadecimal
DIR INi2 PID

“Normally o“
I PID Speed 100P delay compensation
O:Does not opernte
,
E Operates
IND When using inductsyn + A/D converter
n

n DIR Set

Zero point return direction + when using o 1

induct~ + AID converter
Zero point return direction – when using 1 1
inductsyn + A/D converter

-324-
 APPENDIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE OF DATA SE77WVGN NUMBERS
ti9. PLCAXXS CtWTROL P~Enms

N number Contents Data type setting mnge (unit) Remarks

102 Not used word

104 Not used Word

106 Not used Word

108 Not used Word

110 Not used Word

~m
112 Reference point position 2 words 0- *99999999
(l&oinch)

116 Soft limit area (upper limit) 2 words O--* 99999999X2 Interpola.
tion unit

120 Soft limit area (lower limit) 2 words O-A 99999999X2 lnte~la-
tion unit

124 Not used Byte

125 Not used Byte

126 Not used Byte

127 Not used Byte

-325
APPENDLY 6. CORRESPONDENCE T~LES OF DATA SElllVG N .NVXIBERS
t510.AXXS-COMMON P~ETER ADDIIWIWiL AREA

6.10. AXIS-COhIhION PARAMETER ADDITIONAL AREA

P number 13 (Machine)

N number Contents Data typt setting range (unit) Rmlarks

o Not Used Byte

I
I

1 Not used Byte

I
2 Not used

8-digit bit 0
3 Machinebit parameters designation bit 1:
(Leading zeros bit Z
or cannot be bit 3 Absolute position initial set
omitted.) bit k
bit Oor 1 for each bit 5:
[ bit bit 6
bit z
nO:Bit “n”-OFl
Or
[ nl: Bit “n”+
ON,
(n:o-7)

-326-
 ,,

APPENDLY 6. CORRESPONDENCE i54BL.ESOF DATA SETTING N NUMBERS

6.11.AXIS-INDEPENDENT P~ETER Ai2.Il?t7N& AREA

6.11. AXIS-JNDEPENDENI’ PAR.AMETER ADDITIONAL AREA

P number 14 (Machine)

setting mngc (unit) Remarks

I i

1 Not used Byte

I 1

4 Dog-less absolute position Byte o-2 0 Initial status

detection set 1: Zero point initiai set executed
2 Basic machine coordinate system reset

H=--F-
7 Not used Byte
1

8 Not used Byte

9 Not used Byte

10 Not used Byte

11 Not used Byte

12 Not used Word

I

%4 Not used Word

16 Not used 2 words

20 Dog-less absolute position 2 words O--* 99999999x2 Interpola-

detector zero point . tion unit

24 Dog-1ess absolute position Word 0-6.5535 Interpola-

detection G28 matching tion unit
width

26 Not used Word

-32’7-

,,,,,,,,,,
APPEii!DIX 6. CORRESPONDENCE TMLES OF DATA SETTING N NUiWBE~
6.11.AXE-INDEPENDENT P~ETER ADD~ONXL AREA

N nude Cbntents Data typI setting range (unit) Remarks

28 Not used 2 words

32 Not used 2 words

36 Not used Word

38 Not used Word

40 Not used Word

42 Not used Word

44 Not used Word

46 Not used Word

48 Not used S-digit bit ti No dog-less absolute position detection

Binary designation stopper
(tiading zeros bit 1:
or cannot be bit 2
omitted.) bit 3
bit O or 1 for each bit 4
[bit bit .%

-328-
 APPENDIX 7. SUPPLEMENTARY DETAILS ON INCOMPLETE
THREAD AREAS ARISING D URIiVG THREAD CtJTTING

APPENDIX 7. SUPPLEMENTARY DETAILS ON

INCOMPLETE THREAD AREAS
ARISING DURING THREAD c?JrrING
The delay caused by the automatic aecelerationjdeceleration and deIay caused by the position loop in the servo
system create an illegal pitch near the start and end points of thread cutting. When programming, steps must be
taken to assign thread cutting commands which include a margin for the approach distance iil and for the length
of the area ~2 where the thread is incomplete during chamfering, as shown in the figure below.

-
F
82 61
— ———— ——-— ———.— —,

~ Command dirmtion

6, : Approach distance
62 :’ Area where thread is incomplete during chamfering
1) Approach distan~ [dl]
When Ts is not equal to zero:

-— tl .— t]
Tp: e TP –Ts’ e TP
al =+tl” ~ (Ts~TP- ) (mm)
TP– Ts
‘Where F :Thread cutting speed (mmhn.in)
T S :A~]erationld~eration time ~~stant (s=)
T p :Position loop time constant (see)
t 1 :Time taken until pitch error reaches allowable accuracy “a” (w)
If “p” is the pitch and “AP>’ is the pitch error, then allowable accuracy “a” will be

tl tl
.— .—
1
a= (Tpe TP –Tse Ts )
TP– Ts

.
APPENDIX 7. SUPPLEMENTARY DETAILS ON INCOMPLETE
THREAD AREAS ARISING DURING THREAD CUTTING

When Ts is equal to zero

..
.—71
d,=+tl –~ (Tp-Tpe TP ) (mm)

tl
.—
ae = TP

Since the calculation of approach distance al is a complicated prowxlurq 61 is normally determined from the chart
on the next page. This chart is used as foliows.
1) Find the position on the P axis scale represented by the thread grade and pitch ~~ and follow the
perpendicular (1) drawn upward to find the point where it intersects with the curve of ac-
celeration/deceleration time constant ~s].
2) Follow horizontal line (2) and find where it intersects with the thread cutting speed ~].
3) Follow perpendicular (3) and find approach distance [61]on the scale at the point where it intersects
with the & axis.

I
I P
P

NOTE 1. The chart on the next page applies when the position loop time ecmstant Tp is 3Gns.

.,

..-
:330-’
APPENDIX 7. SUPPLEMENTARY DETAILS UN INCOMPLETE
THREAD AREAS ARISING DURING THREAD CUTTING

L4 m ii

-331-
APPENDIX 7. SUPPLEMENTAL Y DETAILS ON INCOMPLETE
THREAD AREAS ARISING DURING THREAD CUTTING

2) Length of area where thread is incmnplete during chamfering [dz]

. .-
Where F : Thread cutting speed (mm/min)
T s : Acceleration/deceleration time constant (see)
T P : position loop time constant (see)

NOTJ% 2, When proceeding with ehamfa”ng during a thread-cutting cyclq the length of the area where
the thread is incomplete is equivalent to the value produced by adding 62 determined by the
above formula to the chamfering pitch set by parameter.

1 .

—a
o 1 2 3 4 5
I
50 100 150 200 inch/rnin
,. . . Thread-cutting speed l?

Chart to calculate length of area where thrad is incmnpkte [6J

-332- i ‘
 APPENDIX 8. LIST OF ALARMS

APPENDIX 8. LISTOF ALARMS

(The letters in bold type appear as the messages on the actual screen.)
These alarms are generated during automatic operation. In the main, they denote errors in the preparation of the
machining programs and also program errors applying when programs matching the NC specifiehtions have not
been prepared.

Error Nature of trouble Remedy

No.
Plo EXCS. AXIS No. . Divide the alarm block commands into
The number of axis addresses commanded two.
in the same block is greater than the o Check the specifications.
nnmber provided for by the specifications.
AXIS A13R. ERROR ● Correct the axis names in the program.
The axis address names in the program
commands and the axis address names set
in the parameters do not match.
3?20 D1VIS1ON ERROR o Review the program.
An axis has been commanded for which
division cannot be made by the command
units.
F30 PARITY H * Check the paper tape.
The number of holes per character on the o Check the tape puncher and tape reader.
paper tape is even for the HA code and
add for the 1S0 cade.
P31 PARITY v * Make the number of characters per block
The number of characters per block on the on the paper tape even.
paper tape is odd. * Set the parity V select parameter to OFF.
P32 ADDRESS. ERROR @ Check and correct the addresses in the
An address not contained in the specifica- program.
tions has been used. e Check the specifications.
P33 FORMAT ERROR ● Review the program.
The command format in the program is not
Cr)rrmt.
P34 G-CODE ERROR * Check and correct the G code addreswxi in
A G code not contained in the specifica- the program.
tions has been commanded.
P35 CM D-VALUE OVER * I&view the program.
The setting range of the addresses has been
exceeded.
I?36 PROGRAM END ERR . Enter M(E! or M30 at the end of the
“EOR” has been read during tape and program.
memo ry operation. . ● Enter M99 at the end of the subprogram.

-333-
,,,,,,,
APPENDIX 8. LIST OF ALARMS

Error I Nature of trouble Remedy

No.
P37 PROG. NO. ZERO a The program numbers which wan be
A zero has been designated for the program designated range from 1 through
number or for the sequence number. 99999999.
* The seouence numbers which can be
1

P50 I NO INCHIMM SPEC

A command for inch/millimeter conversion
has been assigned using a G code even
though there is no such G code specifica-
tion.
P 60 OVER CMP. LENG.
The commanded movement distance is too
great @ mceeds 231).
P62 F-CMD. NOTHING ● When the power is switched on, (301 is set I
The fed rate command has not been input. as the movement modal command. Assim I
the feed rate using an F command. “
P7Q I ARC ERROR ● Check the addrcas vzduea in the program
The start and end points of the arc and the speci~ing the start and end paints and the
arc center are not correct. arc center.
* Check the”+” and “-” directions of the
addreas values.
P71 ARC CENTER . Check the address values in the program.
The center of the arc is not found during
R-specified circular interpolation.

F 90 NO THREAD SPEC * Check the specifications.

A thread-cutting cmumand has been as-
signed even though such a spmification
does not mist.
iWOVARIABLE THREAD SPEC @ Check the specifications.
A variable thread cutting command has
been assigned even though such a
speciilcation does not exist.

-334-’
 APPEND,, 8. LIST OF ALARMS

Error no. Nature of trouble Remedy

P93 SCREW PITTII ERR * Set the thread lead command properly in
The thread lead (thread pitch) is not the thread cutting command.
correct when thread cutting is commanded,
P112 PLANE CHG (CC) . Assign the plane selection command after
A plane seIection command (G17, G18, canceling the tool diameter compensation
G19) has been assigned during a tool command and tool nose R compensation
diameter compensation command and tool command (by issuing the G40 cancel
nose R compensation command (G41, G42, command).
G46).
J?I13 ILLEGAL PLANE ● Assign the arc command with the proper
The arc command axis and selected pkme plane selection.
do not match.
P120 NCI SYNC. FEED . Check the synchronous feed command
A synchronous feed command has been specifications.
assigned even though such a specification Q Change the synchronous feed command
does not exist. (G95) into a per-minute feed command
(G94). (The F command value must ako be
changed.)

P130 2nd AUX. ADDR c Confirm the parameter No.2 auxiliary

m The address set in the parameter is other function address.
than A, B or C. s Change the parameter to a address with a
a The axis name is overlapped. different axis name.
P131 NO G96 SPEC ● Check the specifications.
A constant peripheral speed command has c Change the constant peripheral speed
been assigned even though such a command (G96) into a speed command
specification (G96) does not exist. (rpmhin).
P133 G96 p-No. ERR s Review the parameter program designation
An illegal constant peripheral speed control for the constant peripheral speed control
axis has been designated. axis.
P150 NO C-CMP SPEC c Check the tool diameter and tool nose R
A tool diameter compensation and tool compensation specifications.
nose R compensation command (G41, G42,
G46) has been assigned even though such a
specification does not exist.
P151 G2, 3 CMP. ERR ● Assign a rapid traverse command (GOO) or
A compensation command (G40, G41, G42, linear command (GO1) in the compensation
G46) has been assigned in the arc mode command block or cancel block. (Set the
(G02, G03). modal to liiear interpolation.)
P152 LS.P. NOTHING . Review the program.
The intersection point compensation vector
is not found when a tool dhrneter
compensation or tool nose R compensation
command (G41, G42, G46) has been
executed.

-335-
APPENDIX 8. LIST OF ALARMS

Error no. Nature of trouble Remedy

P153 I.I?. ERROR . Review the program.
An interference error is generated when a
tool diameter and tool nose R compensation
command (G41, G42, G46) is executed.
P155 I?-CYC ERR (CC) ● The tool diameter compensation mode is
A canned cycle command was assigned in established when a canned cycle command
the tool diameter compensation mode. is executed and so the diameter
compensation cancel command (G40)
should be assigned.
P156 BOUND DIRECT “ Change to a movement vector whose
When the GM tool nose R compensation is compensation direction is defined,
commenced, the movement vector has an ● Change to a tool with a different tool nose
undefined compensation direction. point number.
P157 SIDE REVERSED . Even if the compensation dwection is
The compensation direction is reversed reversed, change to a more suitable G
during G46 tool nose R compensation. command (GOO,G28, G30, G33, G53).
@ Change to a tool with a different tool nose
point number.
● Set the G46 reversaI error avoidance
parameter to ON.
P158 ILLEGAL TIP P. o Change to the correct tool nose point
The tool nose point number is dlegal (any number.
number except 1 through 8) during G46 tool
nose R compensation.
P159 CMD ERROR Q Cancel the nose R compensation before the
An illegal command was given during the block where the error occurs.
nose R compensation (G41, G42, G46)
mode.
P170 NO CORR. No. ● Add the offset number command to the
There is no offset number (TOO) command compensation command block.
when a compensation command (G41, G42, o Check the number of offset number sets and
G46) is assigned. Alternatively, the offset correct the command so that it has an offset
number is greater than the number of sets number within the number of offset sets.
in the specifications.
P171 NO GIO SPEC ● Check the specitkations.
A GIO command has been assigned even
though such a specification does not exist.
P172 G1O L-No. ERR ● Check the G1O command address L number
The L address command is not correct and command the proper number.
when the G1O command is assigned.
P173 G1O p-No. ERR ~ First check the number of offset sets and
An offset number outside the number of then set the address P designation to within
sets in the speciilcations has been assignid that number.
for the offset number command when the
G1O command is assigned.
P180 NO BORING CYC. Q Check the specflcations.
A canned cycle command has been assigned * Correct the program.
even though such a speciilcation (G81 -
G89) does not exist.

-336-
 APPENDIX 8. LIST OF ALARMS

Error no. Nature of trouble Remedy

P181 NO S-CMD (TAP) * Assign the spindle speed command (S) with
The spindle speed command has not been the G84 or G88 hole machhing canned
assigned when a hole machining casmed cycle command.
cycle command is assigned.
P182 SYN TAP ERROR * Check the connection with the spindle unit:
Coupling is not possible with the spindle ~ Check whether the spindle encoder is
unit. present or not.
Pun PTCffHD No. . Assign the pitch or thread number
The pitch or thread number command is commaud using the F or E command.
not present in the tap cycle of the hole
machining canned cycle command.
M84 NO PTCjT.HD CMD ● Check the pitch or thread n~ber.
An incorrect pitch or thread number
command has been assigned in the tap cycle
of the hole machining canned cycle
command.
P190 NO CUTTING CYC ● Check the spe~lcations.
A turning cycle command has been assigned ~ Delete the turning cycle command.
even though the turning cycle specification
is not provided.
P191 TAPER LENG ERR ● Set the setting of R in the turning cycle
There is an error in the taper length command to less than the movement amount
command when the turning cycle command of the axis.
is assigned.
P192 CHAMFERING ERR ● Set a chamfering amount which does not
The chamfering conducted during the protrude from the cycle.
thread cutting cycle is illegal.
P200 NO MRC CYC SPC w Check the specifications.
A multiple repetitive canned cycle
command I (G70 = G73) has been assigned
even though the multiple repetitive canned
cycle I speciilcation is not provided.
P201 FROG. ERR (MRC) Delete the followiug G codes from the
~ One or more of the following commands subprogram which has been called by the
are present in the subprogram which has multiple repetitive canned cycle I (G70 -
been called by the multiple repetitive G73): G27, GM, G30, G31, G33
canned cycle L G1OI, G102, G105, G106
reference point return commands (G27, Delete the arc command in the fwst
G213,G30), thread cutting command movement block of the multiple repetitive
(G33), canned cycle, skip function canned cycle I ftished shape program.
command (G31), geometric II (G101,
G102, G105, G106) .
0 There is an arc command in the first
movement block of the multiple repetitive
canned cycle I finished shane momam.

-337-
APPENDIX 8. LIST OF ALARMS

Error no. Nature of trouble Remedy

P270 NO MACRO SPEC * Check the speciikations.
A macro specification command has been ● Delete the macro command.
assigned even though such specifkations do
not exist.
P271 NO MACRO INT. ● Check the specifkations.
A macro interrupt command was assigned
even though there are no macro interrupt
specifkations.
P272 NCIMACRO ILL. ● Review the program, and program so that
An NC statement and a macro statement the NC statement and macro statement are
exist in the same block. in separate blocks.
P273 MACRO OVERCALL ● Review the program and correct so that the
The maxinum number of macro call nesting macro talk do not exceed the number of
levels have been exceeded. levels provided for by the spetilcations.
P275 MACRO ARG. EX. - Review the program.
There are too many argument sets in macro
eaU argument type IL
P276 CALL CANCEL ● Review the program.
A G67 command has been assigned ● The G67 command serves to cancel the cdl
although it is not during the G66 command and so the G66 command is assigned before
modal. thk command.

P280 EXC. [ , ] * Review the program and correct so that the

More than 5 “ [ “ or “ ] “ parentheses have number of” [ “ or “ ] “ parentheses does not
been used in a block. exceed 5.
I?281 I , ] ILLEGAL ● Review the program and correct so that the
The number of the “ [ “ or “ ] “ parentheses numbers of” [ “ and “ ] “ parentheses are
commanded in a block does not match. paired off properly.
P282 CALC. IMPOSS. ● Review the program and correct the
An arithmetic expression is not correct. expression.
P283 DMDE BY ZERO ● Review the program and correct so that the
The division denominator is zero. denominator for division in the arithmetic
expression is not zero.
P284 INTEGER OVER * Review the arithmetic expressions in the
In the process of arithmetic operation the program and correct so that the value of the
integer value has exceeded —231(231—1). integers after the arithmetic operations does
not exceed —2s1.
F285 OVERFLOW VALUE ● Review the variable data in the program.
There is a variable data overflow.
P290 IF SNT. ERROR ● Review the program.
There is an error in the IF [<conditional
expression >] GOTO •l statement. .

-338-
 APPENDIX 8. LIST OF ALARMS

Error Nature of trouble Remedy

No.
P291 WHILE S NT. ERR ● Review the program. ..
There is an error in the WHILE
[<~nditional expression>] DOD –
ENDO statement.
P292 SETVN SNT. ERR . Review the program.
The variable name setting or SETWWI . Make sure that the variable name of the
statement is incorrect. SETVN statement has 7 or fewer
characters,
P293 DO — END EXCESS . Review the program and correqt so that
The number of O’s in the DOO and the number of DO—END statements does
ENDn of the WHILE [e conditional not exceed 27.
expression >] 1100 — I?NDCI statements
has bexm exceeded 27.
P2W DO—END MMC. ● Review the program and correct so that
The DO’s and END’s are not paired off they are paired off properly.
properly.
P295 WHILE!GOTO TPE * During tape operation, any program.
There is a WHILE or GOTO statement in containing a WHILE or GOTO statement
the tape during tape operation. cannot be executed and so the memory
oueration should be used instead.
P300 VAR. NAME ERROR * Correct the program so that the variable
A variable name has not been commanded name is corrected.
properly. ● Review the variable names in the program
and correct them.
P301 VAR NAME DUPLI * Correct the program so that the variable
A variable name has been durdicated. names are not durdicated.
P370 NO OPOS MR SPC ● Check the specifications.
An opposite tool rest mirror image com- o Correct the G6S command to G69.
maad has been assigned ewm though the
opposite tool rest mirror image specification
ii not provided.
P380 NO CORNER R/C * Check the specifications.
A comer chamfering (C)or comer * Remove” , R“ and “ , ~’ from the
rounding (R) command has been assigned program.
even though the comer chamfering and
comer rounding I and II specifications do
not exist.
P381 NO ARC RIC SPC ● Check the specifications.
A corner chamfering or comer rounding * Set the arc modal to the linear interpola-
command has been assigned in a circular , tion mode.
interpolation block even though the corner ‘
chamfering and comer rounding II
specification does not mist.
APPENDE 8. LIST OF AL4RikW

Error no. Nature of trouble Remedy

P382 CORNER NO MOVE 9 Assign the bIock following the corner R/C
There is no movement command in the command in the block with movement.
block folIowing the corner
chamferingfrounding,
P383 CORNER SHORT ● Since the movement dhnce is shorter than
The movement distance is shorter than the the corner WC, the corner WC should be
comer WC command when such a reduced to less than the movement dktanw.
command is assigned.
P384 CORNER SHORT ~ Since the movement distance in the
Whh a corner RfC command, the movement following block is shorter than the corner
distance in the following block is shorter WC, the corner WC should be made less
than the corner R/C. than the movement distance.
P385 GO G33 IN C!ONR a Review the program. “
GO or G33 is contained in the block
folIowing the corner R/C.
F390 NO GEOMETRIC = Check the specifications.
A geometric command has been assigned
even though such specifications do not exist.
P391 NO GEOMETRIC2 s Check the specifkations.
The geometric 113or II specillcations do not
exist.
P392 LES AGL (GEOMT) ● Correct the geometric angle.
The difference in the angle between
geometric lines is less than 1 degree.
F393 INC MU? (GEOMT) ● Assign the commands in the second
The commands in the second geometric geometric command as absolute values.
block have been assigned as incremental
values.
P394 NO GOl (GEOMT) . Assign the linear command (GO1] in the
There is no linear command in the second second block.
geometric block.
P395 NO ADRS (GEOMT) q Review the program.
The geometric format is incorrect.
l?396 I% CHG. (GEOMT) ● Select the plane before issuing the
A pkme selection command was assigned in geometric command. .
the geometric command.
Q397 ARC END EPR (GEOMT) ● Check the previous and next commands
The arc end point in the geometric IB, 11 including the geometric circular command.
does not join or intersect with the next
block’s starting point.
P398 NO GEMOT IB . . c Check the specifications,
A geometric command has been assigned
even though the geometric IB specifications
do not exist.
P399 GEO MONO ERR ● Change the program so that tone increase
A tone increase or tone decrease is not or decrease is possible.
possible in geometric II.

-340 -
 APPENDLX 8. LIST OF ALARMS

Error Nature of trouble Remedy

No.
F41O NO ADD12S. CHG. ● Cheek the specifications. ---
The”specifieations for converting
absolutdinerementrd axis addresses do not
exist .
I?420 NO PARM. IN SPC . Check the specifications.
A parameter input command has been as-
signed men though such a specification
does not exist.
F421 PARM . IN ERROR Q Review the program.
* The commanded parameter number or
setting data is illegal.
● An illegal G cammand address has been
assigned in the parameter input mode.
o A parametw input command has been as-
signed during a canned cycle modal or
tool nose R camrwnsation.
Y430 AXIS NOT RET. * J&cute the reference point return manu-
A movement command except referenee ally.
point return has been assigned for an axis
which has not returned to the referenee
noint.
P431 NO 2ndR?3F. SPC ● Check the specifications.
A 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point return
command has bwn assigned even though
such a specifkation does not exist.
P432 !S0 G29 SPEC ● Chwk the specifications.
A start position return command (G29) has
been assigned even though such a specifica-
tion does not exist.
P433 NO G27 SPEC ● Check the specifications.
A zero point cheek command (G27) has
been assigned even though such a specifica-
tion dom not exist.
P434 COLLATION ERR ● Review the program.
There is an axis which does not return to
the zero point position when the zero point
check command (G27) is mecuted.
P435 G27/M ERROR ● An M independent command cannot be
An M independent command has bwm as- assigned in the G27 command block and
signed sinmkaneously in the G27 command . so the G27 command and M independent
block. command should be divided into separate
blocks.

-341-’
,,,,—

APPEND.LX 8. LIST OF ALARMS

Error rIo. Nature of trouble Remedy

P436 G291M ERROR ~ An M independent command cannot be
An M independent command has been assigned in the G29 command block and so
assigned simultaneously in the G29 the G29 command and M independent
command block. command should be divided into separate
blocks.
P450 NO CHUCK BARR I Check the specifications.
A chuck barrier valid command (G22) has
been assigned even though the chuck
barrier specification is not provided.
P460 I’APE I/O ERROR
An error has arisen in the tape reader or in
the ~rinter duriruz macro urintin~.
P461 NO FILE DATA
The machining program fde cannot be read
or there is no file.
P462 DNC ERROR I Reset

P480 NO MILL SPEC ‘ Check the specillcations.

There are no rdlin.g function sneci.tlcations.
P481 MILL ILL.G 1 Remove the illegal G code.
A illegal G code was assigned in the
&g mode.
P482 klILL ILLAXIS ! Remove the rotary axis command,
A rotary axis command was assigned in the
milling mode.
P483 CANCEL SHIFT X i Cimcel the coordinate system shift before
There is a coordinate system shift in the X entering the milling mode.
axis duection when entering the milIing
mode.
P484 MILL AXIS RET. . Q Manually execute reference point return,
An axis assigned in the milling mode has
not been returned to the reference point
before entering the milIing mode.
P485 MILL ILL.MODAL ● Assign the G@ (offset cancel) or G80 (hole
Offset is being executed when entering the machining cancel) command before
milling mode, or the hole machining cycle is assigning G12.1.
not canceled,
P500 NO GIIO STATE ● Check the specifications.
The cross machining command (G11O) was
assigned even though such specitkations do
not exist.
P501 ILL.G11O STATE ● Review the program.
The cross machining command (G11O) was
assigned during the nose R mode, milling
mode, balance cut mode, freed cycle mode,
or facing tool rest mirror image mode.

-342-
 APPEND.R 8. LIST OF ALARMS

Error no. Nature of trouble Remedy

P502 ILL.GIIO $NO. ● Confiim the address in the program.
The system no. of the assigned axis is
incorrect.
P503 ILL.G11O AXIS . Confirm the address in the program.
The assigned axis does not exist.
Too many axes are designated.
The assigned axis cannot be controlled in
the designated system.
P600 N() AUTO TLM. . Check the specitlcations,
i%n automatic tool length measurement
command (G37) has been assigned even
though such a specification does not exist.
P601 NO SKIP SPEC. ● Check the specifications.
A skip command (G31) has been assigned
even though such a speciilcation does not
exist.
P602 NO MULTI SKIP = Check the specifications.
A multiple skipping command was assigned
even though no multiple skipping command
exists in the specifications.
P603 SKIP SPEED O ● Command the skip speed.
The skip speed is zero.
P604 G37 ILL. AXIS II Command ody one axis.
The axis has not been commanded in the
automatic tool length measurement block
or, alternatively, two or more axes have
been commanded.
P605 H-CMD IN BLOCK . Assign the T command before the block
The T code is in the same block as the which contains the automatic tool length
automatic tool length measurement measurement command.
command.
P606 NO H-CMD BEFOR Q Assign the T command before the block
The T code has still not been commanded which contains the automatic tool Iength
for automatic tool length measurement. measurement command.
P607 G37 ILL. SIGNL ● Review the program,
The measurement position arrival signal has
been set ON before the area commanded by
the parameter deceleration area “d’ or D
command. Alternatively, the signal was not
set ON untfi the end.
P608 SKIP ERROR (CC) ., ● Assign the tool diameter compensation
The skip command was assigned during a cancel command (G40) or remove the skip
tool diameter compensation command. command.
P990 PRE-CALC ERR. ● Reduce the number of command
More than 8 blocks have been pre-read with combinations for pre-reading, or eliminate
the combination of the commands required them.
for pre-reading (nose R compensation,
corner rounding R/ corner R, geometric I,
geometric 13, multiple repetitive canned
cycle).

-343-

b ,,,!’ ,,,